Project Manual - Community Ventures

Project Manual - Community Ventures
Project Manual
for
INGERSOLL COMMONS HOMEOWNERSHIP
1301-1319 N. Smedley Street
(North 16th Street and Master Street)
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania
Date: September 26, 2013
Issued for Bidding
DEVELOPER:
Community Ventures
1501 Cherry Street
Philadelphia, PA 19102
215-564-6004 Fax: 215-564-1865
E-Mail: [email protected]
CONTRACTOR:
ARCHITECT:
KSK Architects Planners Historians, Inc.
123 South Broad Street, Suite 2250
Philadelphia, PA 19109-1029
215-790-1050
Fax: 215-790-0215
E-Mail: [email protected]
CIVIL ENGINEER:
Stantec
1500 Spring Garden St., Suite 1100
Philadelphia, PA 19130
215-545-7525
Fax: 215-665-7180
E-Mail: [email protected]
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER
Hunt Engineering Company
P.O. Box 537
18 E. King Street
Malvern, PA 19355
610-644-4600
Fax: 610-644-2466
E-Mail: [email protected]
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
002513
003132
003133
003134
004313
004323
Pre-Bid Meetings
Geotechnical Data
Environmental Document
City of Philadelphia Specifications for Construction and Rehabilitation of
Single-Family Houses
Bid Security Forms
Alternates Form
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000
012100
012300
012500
012600
012900
013100
013200
013300
015000
017300
017419
017700
017823
017839
Summary
Allowances
Alternates
Substitution Procedures
Contract Modification Procedures
Payment Procedures
Project Management and Coordination
Construction Progress Documentation
Submittal Procedures
Temporary Facilities and Controls
Execution
Construction Work Management
Closeout Procedures
Operation and Maintenance Data
Project Record Documents
SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITION
024119
Selective Demolition
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
033000
034102
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Precast Foundation Walls
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
042000
047200
Unit Masonry
Cast Stone Masonry
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 5 – METALS
055000
057300
Metal Fabrications
Decorative Metal Railings
DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS
061000
061600
061753
061800
062013
062023
064300
Rough Carpentry
Sheathing
Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses
Glued-Laminated Construction
Exterior Finish Carpentry
Interior Finish Carpentry
Wood Stairs and Railings
DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
071353
072100
072500
074600
074633
075323
076200
077200
079200
Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing
Thermal Insulation
Weather Barriers
Fiber Cement Siding
Plastic Siding
Ethylene-Propylene-Diene Monomer (EPDM) Roofing
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Roof Accessories
Joint Sealants
DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS
081114
081115
081416
085313
086200
087100
Fiberglass Entry Doors
Metal Security Storm Doors
Interior Wood Doors
Vinyl Windows
Unit Skylights
Door Hardware
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
092216.23
092400
092900
093000
096513
096516
096516.01
096519
096816
099113
099123
Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies
Portland Cement Plastering
Gypsum Board
Ceramic Tiling
Resilient Base and Accessories
Resilient Sheet Flooring
Vinyl Plank Flooring
Resilient Tile Flooring
Sheet Carpeting
Exterior Painting
Interior Painting
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALITIES
101419
102800
106710
Dimensional Letter Signage
Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories
Wire Closet Shelving System
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
113100
Residential Appliances
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
122113
123530
123623.13
123661
Horizontal Louver Blinds
Residential Casework
Plastic Laminate-Clad Countertops
Simulated Stone Countertops
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Not Used.
DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS
142600
Private Residence Elevator
DIVISION 22 –PLUMBING
223400
223401
224100
224101
224410
224412
224430
Gas-Fired Domestic Water Heaters
Gas-Fired Instanteous High-Efficiency Tankless Hot Water Heater
Residential Plumbing Fixtures
Plumbing Fixtures
Plumbing Piping
Piping Insulation
Plumbing Specialties
DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
233200
233290
233714
233715
233717
233860
233890
233990
HVAC General Requirements
Ductwork Insulation
Gas Furnaces
Air Cooled Condensing Unit
Air Outlets and Inlets
Exhaust Fans
Ductwork
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
262100
262110
262112
262113
262215
262217
265100
265200
265600
265800
266741
266781
Electrical General Provisions
Conduit
Building Wire and Cable
Boxes
Grounding and Bonding
Electrical Lighting System
Interior Lighting
Wiring Devices
Exterior Lighting
Fire Alarm
Telephone Wiring
Cable Television Distribution System
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
311000
312000
312319
315000
Site Clearing
Earth Moving
Dewatering
Excavation Support and Protection
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
321100
321216
321313
321613
323119
329200
329300
329343
Base Courses
Asphalt Paving
Concrete Paving
Concrete Curbs
Decorative Metal Fences and Gates
Turf and Grass
Plants
Street Tree Planting
DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
331000
333000
224000
334600
Water Utilities
Sewerage Utilities
Storm Drainage Utilities
Subdrainage
APPENDICES
Appendix A:
Appendix B:
Appendix C:
Geotechnical Data
Environmental Document
 Final Update Letter to Stephen Kaufman, June 2013
 Site Map
City of Philadelphia Specifications for Construction of Single-Family
Houses
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DOCUMENT 002513 – PRE-BID MEETINGS
1.1
PREBID MEETING
A.
Owner will conduct a Pre-bid meeting as indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Attendance:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Meeting Date: October 2, 2013
Meeting Time: 10 a.m., local time.
Location: Community Ventures, 1501 Cherry Street, Philadelphia, PA 19102.
Prime Bidders: Attendance at Pre-bid meeting is mandatory.
Subcontractors: Attendance at Pre-bid meeting is recommended.
Notice: Bids will only be accepted from prime bidders represented on Pre-bid
Meeting sign-in sheet.
Agenda: Pre-bid meeting agenda will include review of topics that may affect proper
preparation and submittal of bids, including the following:
1.
Procurement and Contracting Requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
Communication during Bidding Period:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Advertisement for Bids.
Instructions to Bidders.
Bidder Qualifications.
Bonding.
Insurance.
Bid Security.
Bid Form and Attachments.
Bid Submittal Requirements.
Bid Submittal Checklist.
Notice of Award.
Obtaining documents.
Access to Project Information.
Bidder's Requests for Information.
Bidder's Substitution Request/Prior Approval Request.
Addenda.
Contracting Requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Agreement.
The General Conditions.
The Supplementary Conditions.
Other Owner requirements.
PREBID MEETINGS
002513 - 1
4.
Construction Documents:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
5.
Separate Contracts:
a.
b.
6.
D.
Work by Owner.
Work of Other Contracts.
Schedule:
a.
b.
c.
7.
Scopes of Work.
Temporary Facilities.
Use of Site.
Work Restrictions.
Alternates, Allowances, and Unit Prices.
Substitutions following award.
Project Schedule.
Contract Time.
Other Bidder Questions.
Post-Meeting Addendum.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting
minutes to attendees. Minutes of meeting are issued as Available Information and do not
constitute a modification to the Procurement and Contracting Documents. Modifications
to the Procurement and Contracting Documents are issued by written Addendum only.
1.
2.
Sign-in Sheet: Minutes will include list of meeting attendees.
List of Planholders: Minutes will include list of planholders.
END OF DOCUMENT 002513
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PREBID MEETINGS
002513 - 2
DOCUMENT 003132 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA
1.1
GEOTECHNICAL DATA
A.
This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and
Contracting Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders'
convenience and are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own
investigations. They are made available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are
not a warranty of existing conditions.
B.
A geotechnical investigation report for Project, prepared by Hunt Engineering Company,
dated March 12, 2012, is available for viewing as Appendix A to the Project Manual.
C.
Related Requirements:
1.
Please see Invitation to Bid and Exhibit 1, Instructions to Bidders for the Bidder's
responsibilities for examination of Project site and existing conditions.
END OF DOCUMENT 003132
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GEOTECHNICAL DATA
003132 - 1
DOCUMENT 003133 – ENVIRONMENTAL DOCUMENT
1.1
ENVIRONMENTAL DOCUMENT
A.
This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and
Contracting Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders'
convenience and are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own
investigations. They are made available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are
not a warranty of existing conditions. This Document and its attachments are not part of
the Contract Documents.
B.
An environmental investigation report for Project “letter to Stephen J. Kaufman”, prepared
by Stantec, dated June 4, 2013 regarding status of environmental remediation is available
for viewing as Appendix B to the Project Manual. A site map that accompanies this letter
is also attached. The environmental remediation report notes that the contractor is
required to remove all soil to a depth of 6 inches from the entire residential development
site (including yard areas).
C.
Related Requirements:
1.
Please see Invitation to Bid and Exhibit 1, Instructions to Bidders for the Bidder's
responsibilities for examination of Project site and existing conditions.
END OF DOCUMENT 003133
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ENVIRONMENTAL DOCUMENT
003133 - 1
DOCUMENT 003134 – CITY OF PHILADELPHIA SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION AND
REHABILITATION OF SINGLE-FAMILY HOUSES
1.1
CITY OF PHILADELPHIA SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF SINGLE-FAMILY
HOUSES
A.
The specifications dated May 2011, are available for viewing as Appendix C to the Project
Manual.
B.
In case of discrepancies and/or conflicts between the City of Philadelphia Specifications
and the project specifications, the more stringent requirement shall apply. The Architect
will provide clarification upon request.
C.
Related Requirements:
1.
Please see Invitation to Bid and Exhibit 1, Instructions to Bidders for the Bidder's
responsibilities for examination of Project site and existing conditions.
END OF DOCUMENT 003134
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CITY OF PHILADELPHIA SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
AND REHABILIATION OF SINGLE-FAMILY HOUSES
003134 - 1
DOCUMENT 004313 - BID SECURITY FORMS
1.1
A.
1.2
BID FORM SUPPLEMENT
A completed bid bond form is required to be attached to the Bid Form.
BID BOND FORM
A.
AIA Document A310, "Bid Bond," is the recommended form for a bid bond. A bid bond
acceptable to Owner, or other bid security as described in the Instructions to Bidders, is
required to be attached to the Bid Form as a supplement.
B.
Copies of AIA standard forms may be obtained from The American Institute of Architects;
www.aia.org/contractdocs/purchase/index.htm; email: [email protected]; (800)
942-7732.
END OF DOCUMENT 004313
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
BID SECURITY FORMS
004313 - 1
DOCUMENT 004323 - ALTERNATES FORM
1.1
BID INFORMATION
A.
Bidder:
B.
Prime Contract:
C.
Project Name: Ingersoll Commons.
D.
Project Location: 1301-1319 N. Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA 19121.
E.
Owner: Community Ventures.
F.
Architect: KSK Architects Planners Historians, Inc.
1.2
A.
1.3
.
_.
BID FORM SUPPLEMENT
This form is required to be attached to the Bid Form.
DESCRIPTION
A.
The undersigned Bidder proposes the amount below be deducted from the Base Bid if
particular alternates are accepted by Owner. Amounts listed for each alternate include
costs of related coordination, modification, or adjustment.
B.
If the alternate does not affect the Contract Sum, the Bidder shall indicate "NO CHANGE."
C.
The Bidder shall be responsible for determining from the Contract Documents the affects
of each alternate on the Contract Time and the Contract Sum.
D.
Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any alternate, in any order, and to award or
amend the Contract accordingly within sixty (60) days of the Notice of Award unless
otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.
E.
Acceptance or non-acceptance of any alternates by the Owner shall have no affect on the
Contract Time unless the "Schedule of Alternates" Article below provides a formatted
space for the adjustment of the Contract Time.
1.4
A.
SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
Alternate No. 1: Bath and Tub/Shower Surround:
1.
Base Bid: White vitreous enameled cast iron bath; Kohler Villager or approved
equal. 4” white ceramic wall tile; American Olean or approved equal.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ALTERNATES FORM
004323 - 1
2.
B.
Alternate No. 2: Ceiling Fans:
1.
2.
C.
1.5
Base Bid: Provide and install ceiling fans as specified and indicated on the
drawings.
Deduct Alternate: Delete ceiling fans. Provide rough-in wiring and structural
support for ceiling fans to be installed by owner.
Deduct Alternate No. 3: Stair Treads:
1.
2.
D.
Deduct Alternate: Fiberglass tub; Sterling or approved equal. 3-piece fiberglass
tub/shower surround; Sterling or approved equal.
Base Bid: Solid wood Red Oak treads, painted pine risers.
Deduct Alternate: Pine treads and risers with carpet on pad; Shaw Design Series
V.30 oz. sq.yd. or approved equal.
Deduct Alternate No. 4: A Unit bathroom 203
1.
Base Bid: bathroom 203 as shown and scheduled in drawings
2.
Deduct Alternate: Walk in closet with carpet floor, painted gwb walls, rod and
shelves as shown. Install all rough plumbing for bathroom and cap behind walls.
SUBMISSION OF BID SUPPLEMENT
A.
Respectfully submitted this
B.
Submitted By:
corporation).
C.
Authorized Signature:
D.
Signed By:
E.
Title:
day of
, 2013.
(Name of bidding firm or
(Handwritten signature).
(Type or print name).
(Owner/Partner/President/Vice President).
END OF DOCUMENT 004323
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ALTERNATES FORM
004323 - 2
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.2
A.
PROJECT INFORMATION
Project Identification: Ingersoll Commons Homeownership.
1.
B.
Project information.
Work covered by Contract Documents.
Access to site.
Work restrictions.
Specification and drawing conventions.
Miscellaneous provisions.
Project Location:
Philadelphia, PA.
1301-1319 N. Smedley Street (16th and Master Streets),
Owner: Community Ventures, Inc., 1501 Cherry Street, Philadelphia, PA 19102.
1.
Owner's Representative: David La Fontaine, Executive Director, 215-564-6004,
[email protected]
C.
Architect: John R. Gibbons, KSK Architects Planners Historians, Inc., 123 South Broad
Street, Suite 2250, Philadelphia, PA 19109-1029, 215-790-1050, [email protected]
D.
Contractor:
Project.
1.3
A.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:
1.
B.
has been engaged as Contractor for this
Construction of 10, 2-story attached sales homes, including site improvements.
Type of Contract
1.
Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SUMMARY
011000 - 1
C.
Energy Star Rating
1.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the contract construction documents
(drawings and specifications) the project must be constructed in compliance with
the requirements of Energy Star Version 3 and qualify for Energy Star Certification.
The contractor will fully cooperate with the Energy Star rater hired under a separate
contract with the owner.
ACCESS TO SITE
General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during
construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to
perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
WORK RESTRICTIONS
Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
1.
Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours
of 7:30 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on
Project site is not permitted.
1.6
A.
SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of
language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in
particular situations. These conventions are as follows:
1.
2.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the
Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on
the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically
stated otherwise.
B.
Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the
Work of all Sections in the Specifications.
C.
Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings
are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on
Drawings to identify materials and products:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SUMMARY
011000 - 2
1.
2.
3.
Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms
used in the individual Specifications Sections.
Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as
part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.
Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing
Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SUMMARY
011000 - 3
SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.
B.
Types of allowances include the following:
1.
1.2
Lump-sum allowances.
SELECTION AND PURCHASE
A.
At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when
final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must
be completed to avoid delaying the Work.
B.
At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final
selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
C.
Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.
1.3
A.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the
form specified for Change Orders.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the
site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.
B.
Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation
of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.
C.
Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other
portions of the Work.
1.5
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as
required to coordinate installation.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ALLOWANCES
012100 - 1
1.6
LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES
A.
Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by
Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and
delivery to Project site.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site,
labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials
under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the
allowance.
C.
Unused Materials: Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to
manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and
accepted.
1.
1.7
If requested by Architect, retain and prepare unused material for storage by Owner.
Deliver unused material to Owner's storage space as directed.
CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES
A.
Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and
only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance.
B.
Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by
Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of
the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation, taxes, insurance, equipment
rental, and similar costs.
C.
Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include
Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins.
D.
At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to
Owner by Change Order.
1.8
A.
ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES
Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal
based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final
measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable
allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections,
and similar margins.
1.
2.
3.
Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the
allowance.
If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of
overhead costs and other margins claimed.
Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change
Orders related to unit-cost allowances.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ALLOWANCES
012100 - 2
4.
B.
Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent
quantity survey, measure, or count.
Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the
allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount
or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit.
1.
2.
Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change
Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has
changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract
Documents.
No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or
lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally
indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects.
Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
PREPARATION
Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and
installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced
with related work.
SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
Allowance No. 1: Lump-Sum Allowance: Include the sum of Fifteen Thousand Dollars
($15,000): Include allowance to cover purchase and installation of plant materials within
the individual home lots, including rear yard areas, side yard areas and front planting
beds. Street trees with the public right-of-way are not part of the allowance, and are
provided within the contract price. Planting soil and planting bed preparation is not part
of the allowance, and is provided within the contract price. Planting in accordance with
Section 329300.
1.
This allowance includes material cost, receiving, handling, and installation, and
Contractor overhead and profit.
END OF SECTION 012100
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ALLOWANCES
012100 - 3
SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
DEFINITIONS
Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work
defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid
amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of
construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or
installation methods described in the Contract Documents.
1.
2.
1.3
A.
Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the
Agreement.
The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the
Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are
made to the Contract Sum.
PROCEDURES
Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely
integrate work of the alternate into Project.
1.
Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and
similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not
indicated as part of alternate.
B.
Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in
writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted,
rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated
revisions to alternates.
C.
Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D.
Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification
Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve
the work described under each alternate.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ALTERNATES
012300 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
Alternate No. 1: Bath and Tub/Shower Surround:
1.
2.
B.
Alternate No. 2: Ceiling Fans:
1.
2.
C.
Base Bid: Provide and install ceiling fans as specified and indicated on the
drawings.
Deduct Alternate: Delete ceiling fans. Provide rough-in wiring and structural
support for ceiling fans to be installed by owner.
Deduct Alternate No. 3: Stair Treads:
1.
2.
D.
Base Bid: White vitreous enameled cast iron bath; Kohler Villager or approved
equal. 4” white ceramic wall tile; American Olean or approved equal.
Deduct Alternate: Fiberglass tub; Sterling or approved equal. 3-piece fiberglass
tub/shower surround; Sterling or approved equal.
Base Bid: Solid wood Red Oak treads, painted pine risers.
Deduct Alternate: Spine treads and risers with carpet on pad; Shaw Design Series
V.30 oz. sq.yd. or approved equal.
Deduct Alternate No. 4: A Unit bathroom 203
1.
Base Bid: bathroom 203 as shown and scheduled in drawings
2.
Deduct Alternate: Walk in closet with carpet floor, painted gwb walls, rod and
shelves as shown. Install all rough plumbing for bathroom and cap behind walls.
END OF SECTION 012300
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ALTERNATES
012300 - 2
SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
DEFINITIONS
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction
from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section
number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
2.
Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the
following, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation
cannot be provided, if applicable.
Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and
separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed
substitution.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with
those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable
Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design
characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and
fabrication and installation procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and
interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.
Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
012500 - 1
j.
k.
l.
m.
3.
Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven (7) days of receipt of a request for
substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed
substitution within fifteen (15) days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days of
receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a.
b.
1.4
A.
Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the
overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot
be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on
manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of
availability, or delays in delivery.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with
requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution
request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for
applications indicated.
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may
subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution
to produce indicated results.
Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a
proposed substitution within time allocated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed
substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to
perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
SUBSTITUTIONS
Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of
need for change, but not later than fifteen (15) days prior to time required for preparation
and review of related submittals.
1.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied:
a.
b.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will
produce indicated results.
Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that
specified product provided.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
012500 - 2
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
B.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction
schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities
having jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested
substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform
and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all
contractors involved.
Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received
within sixty (60) days after commencement of the Work.
1.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time,
energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional
responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may
include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services,
increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will
produce indicated results.
Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that
specified product provided.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction
schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities
having jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested
substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform
and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all
contractors involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012500
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
012500 - 3
SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710,
"Architect's Supplemental Instructions."
PROPOSAL REQUESTS
Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of
proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised
Drawings and Specifications.
1.
2.
Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to
stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified,
after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments
to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs,
with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish
survey data to substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts
of trade discounts.
Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the
effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration,
start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before
requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect.
Contractor-Initiated Work Change Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require
modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for
a change to Architect.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012600 - 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change
Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on
AIA Document G714 Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with
a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1.
B.
Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change
on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the
effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey
data to substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the
proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or
system specified.
Work Change Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.
Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the
Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the
Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required
by the Construction Change Directive.
1.
After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data
necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012600
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012600 - 2
SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures
for handling changes to the Contract.
Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative
requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's
construction schedule.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of
Contractor's construction schedule.
1.
Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative
forms and schedules, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
B.
Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.
Submittal schedule.
Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's
construction schedule.
Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than
seven (7) days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for
Payment.
Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases
requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values
coordinated with each phase of payment.
Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line
items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification
Section.
1.
Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a.
b.
c.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Project name and location.
Name of Architect.
Architect's project number.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900 - 1
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with
Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal
subcontract amounts in excess of five (5) percent of the Contract Sum.
Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work
where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or
fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.
Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for
each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of
the Work.
Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be
complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and
profit for each item.
a.
8.
1.3
A.
Contractor's name and address.
Date of submittal.
Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of
actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the
schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at
Contractor's option.
Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives
result in a change in the Contract Sum.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and
payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1.
Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B.
Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the
Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by
each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C.
Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the fifteenth
(15th) of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month,
ending on the last day of the month.
D.
Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as
form for Applications for Payment.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900 - 2
E.
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a
person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return
incomplete applications without action.
1.
2.
F.
Transmittal: Submit three (3) signed and notarized original copies of each Application for
Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall
include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.
1.
G.
2.
3.
4.
Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application,
after deduction for retainage, on each item.
When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full
waivers.
Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must
submit waivers.
Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.
Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede
or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
I.
Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording
appropriate information about application.
Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of
mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the
Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.
1.
H.
Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction
schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued
before last day of construction period covered by application.
List of subcontractors.
Schedule of values.
Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).
Schedule of unit prices.
Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
List of Contractor's staff assignments.
List of Contractor's principal consultants.
Copies of building permits.
Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for
performance of the Work.
Initial progress report.
Report of preconstruction conference.
Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate
of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent
completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900 - 3
1.
2.
J.
Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete
and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final
Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously
submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and
proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
Evidence that claims have been settled.
Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data
as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and
assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
Final liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012900
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900 - 4
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or
clarifications of the Contract Documents.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for
each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment
fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
2.
3.
A.
Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and
field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control
points.
DEFINITIONS
1.
1.4
Coordination drawings.
Requests for Information (RFIs).
Project Web site.
Project meetings.
Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or
supplying products.
Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.
Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each
other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 1
1.
2.
3.
B.
Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of
attendees at meetings.
1.
C.
A.
1.6
A.
Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of
their Work is required.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly
progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.5
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results
where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other
components, before or after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance
and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
Preparation of the schedule of values.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Preinstallation conferences.
Project closeout activities.
Startup and adjustment of systems.
COORDINATION DRAWINGS
Coordination Drawings, General:
Prepare coordination drawings according to
requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop
Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is
required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more
than one entity.
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation
of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form
specified.
1.
2.
Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by
Contractor with no response.
Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in
Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 2
B.
Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Project name.
Project number.
Date.
Name of Contractor.
Name of Architect.
RFI number, numbered sequentially.
RFI subject.
Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract
Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
Contractor's signature.
Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product
Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to
fully describe items needing interpretation.
C.
RFI Forms: AIA Document G716.
D.
Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.
Allow seven (7) working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by
Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1.
The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according
to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."
a.
E.
Requests for approval of submittals.
Requests for approval of substitutions.
Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time
or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within ten (10) days of receipt
of the RFI response.
RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI
number. Submit log weekly. Software log with not less than the following:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI
response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven (7) days
if Contractor disagrees with response.
1.
2.
1.7
A.
Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive,
and Proposal Request, as appropriate.
Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request,
as appropriate.
PROJECT MEETINGS
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Project name.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of Architect.
RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
RFI description.
Date the RFI was submitted.
Date Architect's response was received.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose
presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect
of scheduled meeting dates and times.
Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited
attendees.
Minutes:
Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant
discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone
concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three (3) days of the meeting.
Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before
starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than fifteen
(15) days after execution of the Agreement.
1.
2.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other
concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall
be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Tentative construction schedule.
Phasing.
Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
Designation of key personnel and their duties.
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
Procedures for RFIs.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 4
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
3.
C.
Procedures for testing and inspecting.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
Distribution of the Contract Documents.
Submittal procedures.
Preparation of record documents.
Work restrictions.
Working hours.
Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
Procedures for moisture and mold control.
Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
Construction waste management and recycling.
Parking availability.
Office, work, and storage areas.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
First aid.
Security.
Progress cleaning.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute
meeting minutes.
Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before
each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1.
2.
Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved
in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other
materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the
meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.
Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Contract Documents.
Options.
Related RFIs.
Related Change Orders.
Purchases.
Deliveries.
Submittals.
Review of mockups.
Possible conflicts.
Compatibility problems.
Time schedules.
Weather limitations.
Manufacturer's written instructions.
Warranty requirements.
Compatibility of materials.
Acceptability of substrates.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Space and access limitations.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 5
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
Testing and inspecting requirements.
Installation procedures.
Coordination with other work.
Required performance results.
Protection of adjacent work.
Protection of construction and personnel.
Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements,
including required corrective measures and actions.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other
parties requiring information.
Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully
concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to
performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals.
1.
2.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or
involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be
represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with
Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for
discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind
schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how
construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from
parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to
ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the
Contract Time.
1)
b.
Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the
following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Review schedule for next period.
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Progress cleaning.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 6
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
3.
Quality and work standards.
Status of correction of deficient items.
Field observations.
Status of RFIs.
Status of proposal requests.
Pending changes.
Status of Change Orders.
Pending claims and disputes.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute
the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.
a.
Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each
progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or
recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each
meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 013100
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 7
SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the
progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
A.
Contractor's construction schedule.
Construction schedule updating reports.
Daily construction reports.
Site condition reports.
DEFINITIONS
Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling,
monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction
schedule consume time and resources.
1.
2.
3.
Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the
planned early start and finish times.
Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B.
CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction
project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships.
Network
calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
C.
Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the
network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no
float.
D.
Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1.3
A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.
PDF electronic file.
Two (2) paper copies.
Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire
construction period. Show logic ties for activities.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 1
C.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire
schedule for entire construction period.
1.
D.
Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and
labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial
or updated) and date on label.
CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports.
Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description,
original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late
finish date, and total float in calendar days.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start
date, or actual start date if known.
Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in
ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if
known.
Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from commencement
of the Work until most recent Application for Payment.
E.
Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
F.
Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.
G.
Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
1.4
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of
subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other
required schedules and reports.
1.
2.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities
involved.
Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and
schedule them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to
date of Substantial Completion.
1.
Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that
shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 2
B.
Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each
main element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1.
Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than twenty (20) days,
unless specifically allowed by Architect.
2.
Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in
Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review
times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.
Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than fifteen (15) days for startup and
testing.
Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than thirty (30) days for
completion of punch list items and final completion.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract
Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is
affected.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed
by Owner.
Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
5.
Coordination with existing construction.
Limitations of continued occupancies.
Uninterruptible services.
Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
Use of premises restrictions.
Provisions for future construction.
Seasonal variations.
Environmental control.
Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of
the Work.
D.
Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule,
including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final
completion.
E.
Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to
occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following
issues:
1.
2.
Unresolved issues.
Unanswered Requests for Information.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 3
3.
4.
5.
Rejected or unreturned submittals.
Notations on returned submittals.
Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.
F.
Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is fourteen (14) or more
calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery
schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the
schedule.
G.
Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program
that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
2.2
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
A.
Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-charttype, Contractor's construction schedule within thirty (30) days of date established for
Commencement of the Work.
B.
Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately.
workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.
1.
2.3
Identify first
For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate
an estimated completion percentage in ten (10) percent increments within time bar.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)
A.
General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.
B.
Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within fourteen (14) days of date established
for commencement of the Work. Outline significant construction activities for the first
ninety (90) days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work
and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
C.
CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM
network analysis diagram for the Work.
1.
Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be
accepted for use no later than sixty (60) days after date established for
commencement of the Work.
a.
2.
Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract
shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable
completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.
Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting
progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request
dates.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 4
3.
D.
Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking
days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the
Contract Time.
CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work.
Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable
critical paths.
1.
Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and
relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time
frames for the following activities:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.
3.
4.
Preparation and processing of submittals.
Mobilization and demobilization.
Purchase of materials.
Delivery.
Fabrication.
Utility interruptions.
Installation.
Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.
Testing and commissioning.
Punch list and final completion.
Activities occurring following final completion.
Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim
completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with
Contract milestone dates.
Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, timescaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as
often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the
Contract Time.
Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network;
locate paths with most float near the edges.
a.
Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the
critical path.
E.
Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the
effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.
F.
Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list
indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated
reports showing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.
Description of activity.
Main events of activity.
Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 5
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
G.
Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated
reports showing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.4
A.
Identification of activities that have changed.
Changes in early and late start dates.
Changes in early and late finish dates.
Changes in activity durations in workdays.
Changes in the critical path.
Changes in total float or slack time.
Changes in the Contract Time.
REPORTS
Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
B.
Early and late start dates.
Early and late finish dates.
Activity duration in workdays.
Total float or slack time.
Average size of workforce.
Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).
List of subcontractors at Project site.
List of separate contractors at Project site.
Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
Equipment at Project site.
Material deliveries.
High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of
rain or snow.
Accidents.
Meetings and significant decisions.
Unusual events.
Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
Meter readings and similar recordings.
Emergency procedures.
Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
Change Orders received and implemented.
Construction Change Directives received and implemented.
Services connected and disconnected.
Equipment or system tests and startups.
Partial completions and occupancies.
Substantial Completions authorized.
Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions
and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a
Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions,
together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to
reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each
regularly scheduled progress meeting.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions
have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the
report of each such meeting.
Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but
not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity
durations.
As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate
contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor
with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.
1.
2.
Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and
post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have
completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in
performance of construction activities.
END OF SECTION 013200
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 7
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and
procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and
other submittals.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules
and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.
Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings,
record Specifications, and record Product Data.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Architect's responsive action.
B.
Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do
not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying
with requirements.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by
dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time
required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and
additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract
Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1.
Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract
Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 1
a.
b.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1.
2.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work
so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals
concurrently for coordination.
a.
C.
Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension
of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in
advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of
digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of
AIA Document C106, Digital Data Licensing Agreement.
Initial Review: Allow fifteen (15) days for initial review of each submittal. Allow
additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will
advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for
coordination.
Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same
manner as initial submittal.
Resubmittal Review: Allow fifteen (15) days for review of each resubmittal.
Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for
identification.
1.
2.
3.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside
title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by
Architect.
Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Project name.
Date.
Name of Architect.
Name of Construction Manager.
Name of Contractor.
Name of subcontractor.
Name of supplier.
Name of manufacturer.
Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 2
1)
j.
k.
l.
m.
4.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
Other necessary identification.
Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal,
and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract
Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.
a.
5.
Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified
number of copies to Architect and Construction Manager.
Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and
appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a
transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than
Contractor.
a.
b.
Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use AIA Document G810.
Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the
following information:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
E.
Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01).
Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal
point (e.g., 061000.01.A).
Project name.
Date.
Destination (To:).
Source (From:).
Name and address of Architect.
Name of Construction Manager.
Name of Contractor.
Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
Category and type of submittal.
Submittal purpose and description.
Specification Section number and title.
Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic
name for each of multiple items.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Indication of full or partial submittal.
Transmittal number.
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
Remarks.
Signature of transmitter.
Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal
file as follows:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 3
1.
2.
Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating
submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with
links enabling navigation to each item.
Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision
identifier.
a.
3.
4.
Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Architect.
Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to
Owner, containing the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
5.
File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number
followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another
decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).
Project name.
Date.
Name and address of Architect.
Name of Construction Manager.
Name of Contractor.
Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
Category and type of submittal.
Submittal purpose and description.
Specification Section number and title.
Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name
for each of multiple items.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
Related physical samples submitted directly.
Indication of full or partial submittal.
Transmittal number.
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
Other necessary identification.
Remarks.
Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal
file metadata:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Project name.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Manufacturer name.
Product name.
F.
Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
G.
Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 4
H.
Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1.
2.
3.
Note date and content of previous submittal.
Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's
action stamp.
I.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors,
suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary
for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J.
Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final
action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
General Submittal Procedure Requirements:
1.
Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
a.
2.
3.
4.
Action Submittals: Submit three (3) paper copies of each submittal unless
otherwise indicated. Architect will return two (2) copies.
Informational Submittals: Submit two (2) paper copies of each submittal unless
otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.
Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes
signature of entity responsible for preparing certification.
Certificates and
certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign
documents on behalf of that entity.
a.
b.
B.
Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an
electronic Project record document file.
Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted
certificates and certifications where indicated.
Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and
certifications where indicated.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction
and type of product or equipment.
1.
2.
3.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published
data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are
applicable.
Include the following information, as applicable:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 5
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
4.
For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
6.
PDF electronic file.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not
base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed
data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise
permitted.
1.
Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
Identification of products.
Schedules.
Compliance with specified standards.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit
Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no
larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm).
Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a.
b.
D.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
Printed performance curves.
Operational range diagrams.
Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying
Shop Drawings.
Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
Submit Product Data in the following format:
a.
C.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
Manufacturer's product specifications.
Standard color charts.
Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
Testing by recognized testing agency.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Availability and delivery time information.
PDF electronic file.
Two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return one (1)
copy.
Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of
these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics
between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 6
1.
2.
Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories
together in one submittal package.
Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding
electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample
characteristics, and identification information for record.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for
quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample
sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with
each set.
a.
b.
5.
Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition
at time of use.
Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units
or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns
available.
a.
6.
Generic description of Sample.
Product name and name of manufacturer.
Sample source.
Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
Number of Samples: Submit one (1) full set(s) of available choices where
color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected
from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options
selected.
Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated,
prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in
manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for
use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples
include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or
fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of
repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color
range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.
a.
Number of Samples: Submit three (3) sets of Samples. Architect will retain
two (2) Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one
returned Sample set as a project record sample.
1)
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three (3)
sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 7
E.
Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written
summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.
Include the following information in tabular form:
1.
Submit product schedule in the following format:
a.
b.
PDF electronic file.
Three (3) paper copies of product schedule or list unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two (2) copies.
F.
Coordination Drawings Submittals:
Comply with
Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
requirements
specified
in
G.
Contractor's Construction Schedule:
Comply with
Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation."
requirements
specified
in
H.
Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in
Section 012900 "Payment Procedures.
I.
Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply
with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."
J.
Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements
specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
K.
Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation
and Maintenance Data."
L.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and
experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
M.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding
Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include
names of firms and personnel certified.
N.
Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required,
is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
O.
Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead
certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
P.
Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q.
Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 8
R.
Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance
with requirements in the Contract Documents.
S.
Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing
agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
T.
Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for
Project.
U.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections:
Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."
V.
Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on
testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed
before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the
Contract Documents.
W.
Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on
testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests
performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers
and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
X.
Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final
location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Y.
Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not
limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and
calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a
summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of
software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
2.2
A.
DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by
a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents,
provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria
indicated.
1.
B.
Comply with requirements specified in
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required,
submit a written request for additional information to Architect.
Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data,
and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three (3)
paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 9
each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified
by a design professional.
1.
Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in
the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in
performing these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination
with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note
corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to
Architect .
B.
Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals:
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
C.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project
name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of
reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been
reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
See requirements in
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp
and will return them without action.
B.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate
corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an
action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.
C.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
D.
Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be
returned for resubmittal without review.
E.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be
discarded.
END OF SECTION 013300
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 10
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.2
A.
1.3
Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility
interruptions.
USE CHARGES
General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be
included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use
temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to Architect,
testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
B.
Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA
Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more
stringent.
C.
Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities
having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire
prevention program.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 1
1.5
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to
assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent
service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of
previously assigned responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick, galvanizedsteel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized-steel pipe
posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner
and pull posts.
B.
Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.8-mm-) thick,
galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanizedsteel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-)
OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide
bases for supporting posts.
2.2
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
Field Offices, General:
Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes,
temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B.
Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect,
and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings
specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly.
C.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to
accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.
2.3
EQUIPMENT
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B.
HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide
vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space
thermostatic control.
1.
Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type
heating units is prohibited.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 2
2.
3.
Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended location and application.
Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of eight (8) at each
return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC
system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum
interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by
progress of the Work.
1.
B.
3.2
A.
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until
facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed
permanent facilities.
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1.
B.
Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary."
Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can
be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
1.
Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C.
Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures
adequate for construction.
D.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for
type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
E.
Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or
drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse
effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 3
F.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed
construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate
ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy
consumption.
G.
Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of
sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1.
2.
H.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate
illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1.
I.
Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated.
Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by
Owner.
Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection
requirements without operating entire system.
Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use
by all construction personnel. Install one (1) telephone line for each field office.
1.
Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a.
2.
At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.
J.
3.3
A.
Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field
office.
Police and fire departments.
Ambulance service.
Contractor's home office.
Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number.
Architect's office.
Engineers' offices.
Owner's office.
Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use
when away from field office.
Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field office
adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access project electronic documents and
maintain electronic communications.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
General: Comply with the following:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 4
1.
2.
B.
Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within
construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible
according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.
Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion
inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after
Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under
conditions acceptable to Owner.
Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved
areas adequate for construction operations.
1.
Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking.
treatment as required to minimize dust.
Reapply
C.
Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and
paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and
maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend
temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for
construction operations.
D.
Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and
utilities.
Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
E.
Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.
F.
Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1.
2.
G.
Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1.
2.
Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.
Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform
public and individuals seeking entrance to Project.
a.
3.
Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
H.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
I.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to
handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 5
having jurisdiction.
"Execution."
J.
Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300
Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1.
Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools
and equipment" and not temporary facilities.
K.
Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where
ladders are not adequate.
L.
Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be
permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of
Substantial Completion.
3.4
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures,
utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those
indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
B.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize
possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects.
C.
Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements of 2003 EPA
Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent
and requirements specified in Section 311000 "Site Clearing."
D.
Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by
runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.
E.
Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Section 015639
"Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."
F.
Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the
drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations.
Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
G.
Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction
and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and
control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at
Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe
materials.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 6
H.
Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site
enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site
except by entrance gates.
1.
2.
Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined
sufficient to accommodate construction operations.
Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to
authorized personnel.
I.
Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed
areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work
day.
J.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and
lighting.
K.
Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as
indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
L.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and
similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1.
M.
3.5
Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete,
insulate temporary enclosures.
Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply
with NFPA 241; manage fire prevention program.
MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL
A.
Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document
visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.
B.
Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are
subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials from
water damage and keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged
contact with concrete.
C.
Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full
enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to
infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:
1.
2.
Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items
with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.
Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 7
3.
4.
5.
D.
Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the
building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as
follows:
1.
2.
3.6
Discard or replace water-damaged and wet material.
Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.
Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry
before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.
Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in
conditions.
Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured
moisture level within forty-eight (48) hours.
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste
and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1.
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve
indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later
than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction
that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair
damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
1.
2.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used
during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 015000
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 8
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution
of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Construction layout.
Field engineering and surveying.
Installation of the Work.
Cutting and patching.
Coordination of Owner-installed products.
Progress cleaning.
Starting and adjusting.
Protection of installed construction.
Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with
Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated
lines and levels, and final cleaning.
Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated
construction.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and
elevation of improvements comply with requirements.
B.
Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept
hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
C.
Certified Surveys: Submit two (2) copies signed by land surveyor.
D.
Final Property Survey: Submit ten (10) copies showing the Work performed and record
survey data.
1.3
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing landsurveying services of the kind indicated.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXECUTION
017300 - 1
B.
Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and
patching of construction elements.
1.
Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify
Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect
before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting
and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could
change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection
2.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related
components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as
intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety.
3.
Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or
components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that
results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
4.
Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in
visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed
construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and
patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS
In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For
exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the
fullest extent possible.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional
performance of in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework,
investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other
construction affecting the Work.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXECUTION
017300 - 2
1.
2.
B.
Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of
the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present
where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1.
2.
3.
C.
3.2
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection
of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical
services, and other utilities.
Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations
of connections before equipment and fixture installation.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and
systems are to be installed.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust,
move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly.
Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are
indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field
measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
C.
Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the
need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions
outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according
to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
3.3
A.
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies
are discovered, notify Architect promptly.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXECUTION
017300 - 3
B.
General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
Establish limits on use of Project site.
Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work
progresses.
Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard
established by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements,
grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures,
building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for
mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with
control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E.
Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines
and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather
conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and
tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.
3.4
FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar
reference points before beginning the Work.
Preserve and protect permanent
benchmarks and control points during construction operations.
B.
Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two (2) permanent benchmarks on
Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with
authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1.
Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
C.
Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other
work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions,
locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.
D.
Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing
significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed
by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately
positioned as shown on the survey.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXECUTION
017300 - 4
1.
3.5
A.
Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by
or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."
INSTALLATION
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment
and elevation, as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for
maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing
products in applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging
operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of
construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
G.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to
be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm
that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with
indicated requirements.
H.
Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of
adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately
located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments
are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.
1.
2.
3.
I.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components
at heights directed by Architect.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not
indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to
form hairline joints.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXECUTION
017300 - 5
J.
3.6
A.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not
considered hazardous.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without
delay.
1.
Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or
performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore
surfaces to their original condition.
B.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with
materials so as not to void existing warranties.
C.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
D.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
E.
Adjacent Occupied Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption
of free passage to adjoining areas.
F.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and
similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements
retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original
Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
G.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required,
and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings
when not in use.
Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed
surfaces.
Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where
required by cutting and patching operations.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to
be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to
prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar
operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXECUTION
017300 - 6
invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements
specified in other Sections, where applicable.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
3.7
A.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize
evidence of patching and refinishing.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished
area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space.
Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove
in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to
achieve uniform color and appearance.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an
even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores
enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of
building enclosure.
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove
paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
PROGRESS CLEANING
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
2.
3.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials
and debris.
Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three
days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other
waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to
regulations.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary
for proper execution of the Work.
1.
2.
D.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning
materials specifically recommended.
If specific cleaning materials are not
recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and
that will not damage exposed surfaces.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXECUTION
017300 - 7
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary
to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste
materials down sewers or into waterways.
H.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection
from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary
through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable
components to ensure operability without damaging effects.
J.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.8
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation.
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B.
Adjust equipment for proper operation.
operation without binding.
C.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and
safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements"
3.9
Remove
Adjust operating components for proper
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
END OF SECTION 017300
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXECUTION
017300 - 8
SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.2
Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial
demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.
Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing
and removal of above- and below-grade improvements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste
resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction
waste includes packaging.
B.
Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C.
Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
D.
Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in
preparation for reuse.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for recycling of fifteen (15%) percent by weight of
total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within seven (7) days of date established for
commencement of the Work.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 1
1.5
A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment,
submit report. Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Material category.
Generation point of waste.
Total quantity of waste in tons.
Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.
B.
Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit
calculated end-of-Project rates for recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste
generated by the Work.
C.
Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of
recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include
manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.
D.
Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by
landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight
tickets, receipts, and invoices.
E.
Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator.
1.6
A.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A.
General:
Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and
requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction
work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use
same units of measure throughout waste management plan.
B.
Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition, site-clearing,
and construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and
assumptions for estimates.
C.
Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be recycled, or
disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of
each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation
procedures.
1.
Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of
recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone
numbers.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 2
2.
3.
Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include
name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.
Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for
separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and
designated location where materials separation will be performed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A.
General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers,
storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste
management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.
B.
Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be
responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management
work plan.
C.
Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management
procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.
1.
D.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied
and used facilities.
1.
2.
3.2
Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site.
Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and
disposal.
Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating
materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust
and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
RECYCLING, DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION, WASTE, GENERAL
A.
General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B.
Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris.
Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical
according to approved construction waste management plan.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 3
1.
Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste
until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and
unacceptable materials at each container and bin.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.3
Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated
materials if found.
Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent
windblown dust.
Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver
or processor.
RECYCLING, DEMOLITION, AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A.
Asphalt Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility.
B.
Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other
metals.
1.
C.
Pulverize concrete to maximum 1-1/2-inch size.
Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with
other metals.
1.
2.
Pulverize masonry to maximum 1-1/2-inch size.
Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.
D.
Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate
lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.
E.
Metals: Separate metals by type.
F.
Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a
dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of
fasteners.
G.
Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports,
hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.
H.
Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.
3.4
A.
RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
Packaging:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Wood Materials:
1.
2.
C.
A.
Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a
dry location.
1.
3.5
Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store
in a dry location.
Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets
from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into
component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with
requirements for recycling wood.
Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile
chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.
DISPOSAL OF WASTE
General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused,
remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or
incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed
of accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
surfaces and areas.
B.
Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C.
Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.6
SAMPLE FORMS
END OF SECTION 017419
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017419 - 5
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.2
Substantial Completion procedures.
Final completion procedures.
Warranties.
Final cleaning.
Repair of the Work.
Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings,
record Specifications, and record Product Data.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For cleaning agents.
B.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
C.
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
C.
Field Report: For pest control inspection.
1.4
A.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
Schedule of Maintenance Material Items:
specified in other Sections.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
For maintenance material submittal items
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 1
1.5
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed
and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and
reasons why the Work is incomplete.
B.
Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of ten (10)
days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List
items below that are incomplete at time of request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having
jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services
and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project
record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion
construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property
surveys, and similar final record information.
Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific
warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including
tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location
designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number
where applicable.
a.
5.
6.
C.
Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of
maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each
item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain
Architect's signature for receipt of submittals.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of ten
(10) days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion.
List items below that are incomplete at time of request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise
Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial
Completion.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings
specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."
Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 2
7.
8.
9.
10.
D.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a
minimum of ten (10) days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final
inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection
or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of
Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on
Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or
corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
2.
1.6
A.
Reinspection:
Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous
inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final
completion.
FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
Preliminary Procedures:
Before requesting final inspection for determining final
completion, complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local
emergency responders.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate
visual defects.
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment
Procedures."
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list),
endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each
item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On
receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after
inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected
before certificate will be issued.
1.
Reinspection:
Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous
inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 3
1.7
A.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
2.
3.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for
ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:
a.
1.8
PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated copy.
SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A.
Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated
portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial
Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's
rights under warranty.
B.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of
the Project Manual.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf
binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 81/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty.
Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the
product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address,
and telephone number of Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete
warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with
links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at
beginning of document.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance
manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 4
1.
Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not
applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations
maximum allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to
comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and
antipollution regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean
each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning
and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for
certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion
of Project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction
activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material,
litter, and other foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and
other foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free
condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid
disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces
to their original condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar
spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains
remain.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and
windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, visionobscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged
transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch
surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 5
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
C.
3.2
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment,
and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar
droppings, and other foreign substances.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full
efficiency.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary
Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.
REPAIR OF THE WORK
A.
Complete repair and restoration operations
determination of Substantial Completion.
B.
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing
defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and
properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be
repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used
during construction to specified condition.
1.
2.
4.
requesting
inspection
for
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces,
and other damaged transparent materials.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and
surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair
or restoration.
a.
3.
before
Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required
labels and identification.
Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective
and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with
requirements for new fixtures.
END OF SECTION 017700
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 6
SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual
Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed
manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.
1.
2.
B.
Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
Emergency manuals.
Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Product maintenance manuals.
Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance
submittals are acceptable.
Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to
revisions and field conditions.
Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:
1.
PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed
file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.
a.
b.
2.
C.
Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with
applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and
maintenance directory.
Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.
Three (3) paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory.
Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return two
(2) copies.
Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for
Substantial Completion and at least fifteen (15) days before commencing demonstration
and training. Architect will return copy with comments.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 1
1.
Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies
of each corrected manual within fifteen (15) days of receipt of Architect's comments
and prior to commencing demonstration and training.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and
maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access
to desired information.
B.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section
for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not
part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Title page.
Table of contents.
Manual contents.
Title Page: Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Subject matter included in manual.
Name and address of Project.
Name and address of Owner.
Date of submittal.
Name and contact information for Contractor.
Name and contact information for Construction Manager.
Name and contact information for Architect.
Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.
Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed
the systems contained in the manuals.
Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
D.
Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name,
indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section
number in Project Manual.
E.
Manual Contents:
Organize into sets of manageable size.
Arrange contents
alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions
for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
F.
Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite
electronic PDF file for each manual type required.
1.
Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available.
Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for
minimum readable file size.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 2
2.
G.
File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based
on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and
equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group
documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked
files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system,
subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure
electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.
Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled
volumes.
1.
Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, post-type binders, in thickness
necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and
with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.
a.
2.
3.
4.
Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the
manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and
major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, crossreferenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.
Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose
diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.
Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a.
b.
2.2
A.
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages
and use as foldouts.
If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in
labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate
locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles,
descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.
EMERGENCY MANUALS
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of
contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
Type of emergency.
Emergency instructions.
Emergency procedures.
Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below,
include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment,
and component:
1.
2.
Fire.
Flood.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 3
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Gas leak.
Water leak.
Power failure.
Water outage.
System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
Chemical release or spill.
C.
Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error
messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating
personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D.
Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
A.
OPERATION MANUALS
Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Instructions on stopping.
Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems
and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
Operating standards.
Operating procedures.
Operating logs.
Wiring diagrams.
Control diagrams.
Piped system diagrams.
Precautions against improper use.
License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
Descriptions: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on
Contract Documents.
Manufacturer's name.
Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
Equipment function.
Operating characteristics.
Limiting conditions.
Performance curves.
Engineering data and tests.
Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 4
C.
Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Startup procedures.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
Regulation and control procedures.
Instructions on stopping.
Normal shutdown instructions.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
D.
Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram
controls as installed.
E.
Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.4
PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair
materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name
and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address,
and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and crossreference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Maintenance Procedures:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Product name and model number.
Manufacturer's name.
Color, pattern, and texture.
Material and chemical composition.
Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the
Inspection procedures.
Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
Repair instructions.
Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials
and related services.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 5
F.
2.5
Warranties and Bonds:
Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of
circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system,
include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance
procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information,
maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in
manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents.
For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and
maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in
Project Manual.
C.
Manufacturers'
Maintenance
Documentation:
Manufacturers'
maintenance
documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of
equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.
Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including
disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Test and inspection instructions.
Troubleshooting guide.
Precautions against improper maintenance.
Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
E.
Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
F.
Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts,
with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation
and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G.
Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name
and telephone number of service agent.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 6
H.
Warranties and Bonds:
Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of
circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUAL PREPARATION
A.
Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating
procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for
types of emergencies indicated.
B.
Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating
care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and
maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and
piece of equipment not part of a system.
D.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data,
include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to
identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than
one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the
Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to
information not applicable.
E.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control
sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in
record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1.
F.
Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and
maintenance manuals.
Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation
and maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 017823
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017823 - 7
SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record
documents, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.2
A.
Record Drawings.
Record Specifications.
Record Product Data.
Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1.
Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:
a.
Initial Submittal:
1)
b.
Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one (1) set of
file prints.
Final Submittal:
1)
2)
Submit record digital data files and three (3) set(s) of record digital
data file plots.
Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional
information were recorded.
B.
Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications,
including addenda and contract modifications.
C.
Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each
submittal.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017839 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
RECORD DRAWINGS
Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings
and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are
issued.
1.
Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation
varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record
data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to
provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use
personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up
record prints.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial
Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a
full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the
original Contract Drawings.
Format: DWG, Version, Microsoft Windows operating system.
Format: Annotated PDF electronic file.
Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.
Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.
Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings
for use in recording information.
Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT
RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1.
2.
Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include
identification on cover sheets.
Format: Annotated PDF electronic file.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017839 - 2
3.
4.
Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic
files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with
the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.
Identification: As follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.2
A.
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where
installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract
modifications.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.3
A.
RECORD PRODUCT DATA
Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where
installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
2.
3.
2.4
A.
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials,
and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information
necessary to provide a record of selections made.
Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.
Format: Submit record Specifications as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up
paper copy of Specifications.
1.
B.
Project name.
Date.
Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where
applicable.
Format: Submit record Product Data as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up
paper copy of Product Data.
MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for
miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017839 - 3
Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and
reference.
B.
Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of
marked-up miscellaneous record submittals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A.
Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for
project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record
documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.
B.
Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples
in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use
project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in
good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss.
Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal
working hours.
END OF SECTION 017839
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017839 - 4
SECTION 024116 - STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
A.
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to,
cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of
interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property
of Owner.
1.
1.3
Demolition and removal of buildings and site improvements.
Abandoning in-place below-grade construction.
Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning in-place site utilities.
Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Proposed Protection Measures: Submit informational report, including Drawings, that
indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property. Indicate
proposed locations and construction of barriers.
B.
Schedule of building demolition with starting and ending dates for each activity.
C.
Inventory of items to be removed and salvaged.
D.
Predemolition photographs.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 1
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Buildings to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of the
Work.
B.
Owner assumes no responsibility for buildings and structures to be demolished.
1.
C.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in
the Work.
1.
2.
D.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by
Owner as far as practical.
Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not
disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be
removed by Owner under a separate contract.
On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
SOIL MATERIALS
Satisfactory Soils: Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition
operations.
B.
Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing
any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of
structure or adjacent structures during building demolition operations.
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities
serving buildings and structures to be demolished.
1.
2.
3.
Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
If removal, relocation, or abandonment of utility services will affect adjacent
occupied buildings, then provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 2
4.
5.
B.
3.3
structures to be demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other
buildings and structures.
Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below grade. Cap, valve,
or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been
completed.
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or
structural support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of
construction being demolished.
PROTECTION
A.
Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other
building facilities during demolition operations. Maintain exits from existing buildings.
B.
Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage during
demolition operations. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or
operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having
jurisdiction.
C.
Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings,
canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction
and as indicated. Comply with requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and
Controls."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
3.4
A.
Protect adjacent buildings and facilities from damage due to demolition activities.
Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter
drip line of groups of trees to remain.
Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to
people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around building demolition
area and to and from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures.
Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open
excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and
protections in place.
DEMOLITION
General: Demolish indicated buildings and site improvements completely. Use methods
required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations.
1.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials.
Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 3
2.
3.
4.
B.
Maintain fire watch during and for at least four (4) hours after flame cutting
operations.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not
to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and
other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
2.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or
used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by
authorities having jurisdiction.
Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply
with governing environmental-protection regulations.
C.
Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.
D.
Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to
lower level. Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before
disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.
E.
Remove debris from elevated portions of the building by chute, hoist, or other device that
will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
F.
Abandon foundation walls and other below-grade construction.
1.
Remove below-grade construction, including basements, foundation walls, and
footings, to at least 12 inches (300 mm) below grade.
G.
Existing Utilities: Abandon existing utilities and below-grade utility structures. Cut utilities
flush with grade.
H.
Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from building
demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in
Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
I.
Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth
surface, free from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between
adjacent existing grades and new grades.
J.
Promptly repair damage to adjacent buildings caused by demolition operations.
3.5
A.
CLEANING
Remove demolition waste materials from Project site. See Section 017419 "Construction
Waste Management and Disposal" for recycling and disposal of demolition waste.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 4
B.
Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building
demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION 024116
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024116 - 5
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete
materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.2
Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
C.
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending,
and placement.
D.
Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified
professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Welding certificates.
B.
Material certificates.
C.
Material test reports.
D.
Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements.
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities
and equipment.
1.
Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed
Concrete Production Facilities."
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 1
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications:
An independent agency, qualified according to
ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
C.
Welding Qualifications:
Qualify procedures and personnel
AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."
D.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the
Contract Documents:
1.
2.
E.
according
to
ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete.”
ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform
material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
FORM-FACING MATERIALS
Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous,
true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize
number of joints.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than twenty-five (25) percent.
B.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
1.
2.
Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, zinc coated after fabrication
and bending.
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M, epoxy coated, with less
than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch (300-mm) bar length.
C.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from asdrawn steel wire into flat sheets.
D.
Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.
E.
Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement:
from galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets.
ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated
F.
Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Reinforcement:
Type 1, plain steel.
ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated,
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 2
G.
2.3
A.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar
supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of
Standard Practice.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand,
and source, throughout Project:
1.
B.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded.
1.
2.
C.
2.4
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II.
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal.
Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.
ADMIXTURES
A.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B.
Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible
with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding
those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures
containing calcium chloride.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type G.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
VAPOR RETARDERS
Sheet Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25
mm) thick.
CURING MATERIALS
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for
application to fresh concrete.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 3
B.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.
C.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
sheet.
D.
Water: Potable.
E.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:
Class B, dissipating.
ASTM C 309, Type 1,
F.
Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming
ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.
Sealing
1.
G.
A.
2.8
and
Compound:
VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L
or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315,
Type 1, Class A.
1.
2.7
Curing
VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L
or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
RELATED MATERIALS
Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic
fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
CONCRETE MIXTURES
A.
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the
basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
B.
Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and
silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of Portland cement, which would
otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent.
C.
Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Use water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for
placement and workability.
Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures,
low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use
industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and
concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.9
A.
2.10
A.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2inch (38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
CONCRETE MIXING
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is
above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK
A.
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support
vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied,
until structure can support such loads.
B.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C.
Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
EMBEDDED ITEMS
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining
work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings,
templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
VAPOR RETARDERS
Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 5
3.4
A.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1.
3.5
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder
before placing concrete.
JOINTS
A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
concrete.
B.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
C.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade:
Form weakened-plane contraction joints,
sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth
equal to at least one-fourth (1/4) of concrete thickness as follows:
1.
2.
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and
finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of
contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on
concrete surfaces.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into
concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface
and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
D.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at
slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade
beams, and other locations, as indicated.
E.
Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and
embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B.
Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that
no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams
or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction
joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to
ACI 301.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 6
C.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.
D.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.
3.7
A.
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie
holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed
specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1.
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B.
Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material,
arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and
patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified
limits on formed-surface irregularities.
C.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed
surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching
adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly
across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.8
FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A.
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B.
Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by
hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is
free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface
defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1.
2.
C.
3.9
A.
Apply a trowel finish to surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet,
ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-filmfinish coating system.
Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high
spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).
Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated.
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for
hot-weather protection during curing.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 7
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot,
dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x
h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written
instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before
float finishing.
C.
Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1.
2.
3.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining
cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends
lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.
Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during
curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or
roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to
heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of
coating and repair damage during curing period.
a.
4.
3.10
A.
3.11
A.
Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without
damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound
manufacturer.
Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain
continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect.
Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's
approval.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
END OF SECTION 033000
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000 - 8
034102 - PREMIUM PRECAST FOUNDATION WALL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. This section includes the insulated precast concrete foundation wall system.
1.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: The wall system shall be designed to accommodate all
design loads imposed by the structure depicted in the project documents, and
shall transmit those loads to the supporting soils.
B. Panels have been evaluated and are capable of carrying axial compressive
load of 5,500 lb/lf.
C. Support ledges have been evaluated and are capable of carrying a load of
2,900 lb/lf.
D. Wall system has been evaluated as an alternative method of providing
foundation wall dampproofing therefore no additional dampproofing is required.
E. Wall system’s interior finish has been evaluated to ANSI / UL 1715 and an
independent thermal barrier is not required.
F. Wall system has been evaluated to withstand a backfill force of 100 lb/ft3.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s pertinent product literature including
International Code Council Evaluation Service Report.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Shop
drawings shall indicate dimensions, window and door placements, beam
pocket locations, brick ledge and support ledge requirements and all other
special dimensioning requirements. Drawings shall also include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
1.4
Design Loading
Footing Design & Material
Concentrated loads and their points of application
Soil Bearing Capacity
Maximum allowable total uniform load
Seismic Design Category
Basic Wind Speed
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Manufacturing plant shall be a certified by the
products licensor.
B. Quality Control Standard: Comply with written quality control procedures in
accordance with ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria AC10.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PREMIUM PRECAST FOUNDATION WALL
034102-1
C. Third Party Inspection: Independent third party inspections of the manufacturing
facility shall be provided by an approved inspection agency. Wall sections shall
bear a certificate of inspection label issued by the approved agency.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver wall panels on trucks with specially designed racks to prevent cracking
and damage.
B. Wall panels shall be stored in a manner to minimize potential damage.
C. Lift and place wall sections utilizing cast-in lift pins and appropriate spreader
bar.
1.6
WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall warrant its foundation for 15 years from the date of
installation to be free of defects in workmanship and materials, as well as
sidewall groundwater penetration.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER
A.
2.2
Products shall be manufactured by Superior Walls XI, or approved equal.
WALL SYSTEM
A. The wall system shall be an insulated, steel-reinforced, precast concrete wall
system.
B. Panel Height: 9’-0” or as noted on shop drawings.
C. Overall Wall Panel Thickness: 10 ¼”
D. Insulation: Integral 2½” thickness of DOW STYROFOAM insulation providing an
R-12.5 insulating value. Foam shall be labeled in accordance with ICC-ES ESR
and shall not require installation of a thermal barrier on the interior of the wall
panels.
E. Concrete Mix: 5000psi minimum compressive strength at 28 days; reinforced
with polypropylene fiber; maximum water/cementitious materials ratio of 0.40
and minimum air entrainment of 4%.
F. Concrete Studs: 24” o. c. maximum spacing, insulated with 1” of EPS foam,
and faced with 24 gauge galvanized stud facings for future interior finishing.
G. Wiring Allowance: Concrete studs and panel ends shall have pre-formed 1”
diameter holes to allow for electrical wiring installation.
H. Steel Reinforcement: Concrete studs reinforced with one (1) #4, Grade 60
deformed rebar. Each upper bond beam and footer beam shall be reinforced
with two (2) continuous #3, Grade 40 deformed rebars.
I. Sealants: All sealants used on the wall system shall be one part polyurethane
approved by licensor.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PREMIUM PRECAST FOUNDATION WALL
034102-2
2.3
EXTERIOR FINISH
A. Broom finish exterior wall surface during manufacture.
B. Optional brick/stone support ledge and wall ties.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
SITE PREPARATION
A. The jobsite shall be prepared according to manufacturer’s detailed instructions
per their latest edition. Unless otherwise noted in the project documents, the
building contractor is responsible to prepare the jobsite.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be conducted by an installation crew that is certified by the
licensor.
B. Installation Crews shall comply with published Installation Manual latest edition.
END OF SECTION 034102
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PREMIUM PRECAST FOUNDATION WALL
034102-3
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels for unit masonry.
Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for furnishing manufactured reglets
installed in masonry joints.
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing
agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that
fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Concrete masonry units (CMU's).
Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 67 for
compressive strength.
Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to
ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength.
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to
ASTM C 780 for compressive strength.
Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to
ASTM C 1019.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry
reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement."
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type and color of exposed masonry unit and colored
mortar.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 1
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units
include data on material properties and material test reports substantiating compliance
with requirements.
B.
Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout.
proportions of ingredients.
1.
2.
1.5
Include description of type and
Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification.
Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for
water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.
Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply
with compressive strength requirement.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Masonry Standard:
Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by
requirements in the Contract Documents.
B.
Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals
and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements" for mockups.
1.
1.6
Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes
approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) by 48 inches (1200 mm).
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated
with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry
damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
B.
Hot-Weather Requirements:
Comply with hot-weather construction requirements
contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of
units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard.
Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 2
B.
2.2
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements
for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119,
by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.
Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement
joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.
B.
Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water
repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength for exposed units.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
C.
CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1.
2.
2.3
Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block.
Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area
compressive strength of 3050 psi (21.0 MPa).
Density Classification: Normal weight.
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
B.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C.
Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of Portland cement and hydrated lime
containing no other ingredients.
D.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
E.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1.
2.
3.
F.
For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent
passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.
White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to
produce required mortar color.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 3
G.
Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying
with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in
masonry mortar of composition indicated.
H.
Water: Potable.
2.4
REINFORCEMENT
A.
Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars:
Grade 60 (Grade 420).
B.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
2.5
A.
ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M,
Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon or stainless steel.
Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187-inch (4.76-mm) diameter.
Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.187-inch (4.76-mm) diameter.
Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.187-inch (4.76-mm) diameter.
Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm)
o.c.
Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee
units.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with
single pair of side rods.
TIES AND ANCHORS
Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials
that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Hot-Dip
Galvanized,
Carbon-Steel
Wire:
ASTM A 82/A 82M;
with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.
Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial
Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway
through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. Outer ends of
wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches (50 mm) parallel to face of veneer.
C.
Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches (100
mm) wide.
1.
Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 4
D.
Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:
1.
General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and
compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing
to wood or metal studs, and as follows:
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 1.05-inch(2.66-mm-) thick steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.
Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.25inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.
Contractor's Option: Unless otherwise indicated, provide any of the following types
of anchors:
Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a
metal anchor section.
a.
E.
2.6
A.
Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and
bottom, having slotted holes for inserting wire tie.
Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A
(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and,
where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class C; of dimensions indicated.
EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual" and Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf
(445-N) load in both tension and compression without deforming or
developing play in excess of 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).
Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm)
into wall and 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30
degrees.
Metal Sealant Stop: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76
mm) into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal
back on itself for 3/4 inch (19 mm) and down into joint 1/4 inch (6 mm) to form a
stop for retaining sealant backer rod.
Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated.
Flexible Flashing: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Copper-Laminated Flashing: 7-oz./sq. ft. (2-kg/sq. m) copper sheet bonded
between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in
masonry.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 5
2.
Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable,
adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, crosslaminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040
inch (1.02 mm).
3.
Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a
polyester-reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy.
4.
EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene
terpolymer, complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick.
C.
Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet
Metal Flashing and Trim."
D.
Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard
products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing
sheets to each other and to substrates.
2.7
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A.
Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC.
B.
Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound,
complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with
ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain
lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
C.
Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
D.
Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant
polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3
mm) less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's
standard.
2.
Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height
and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe;
in color selected from manufacturer's standard.
3.
Vinyl Weep Hole/Vent: T-shaped units made from flexible PVC, consisting of a
louvered vertical leg, flexible wings to seal against ends of masonry units, and a top
flap to keep mortar out of the head joint; in color selected by Architect.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 6
2.8
A.
2.9
A.
MASONRY CLEANERS
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for
removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new
masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly
approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units
being cleaned.
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless
otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
Use Portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.
For exterior masonry, use Portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar.
For reinforced masonry, use Portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar.
Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be
exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is
consistent.
B.
Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend
ingredients before delivering to Project site.
C.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270. Provide the following types of mortar
for applications stated unless another type is indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S.
For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
For mortar parge coats, use Type S.
For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet
walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for
other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. Match color of face brick.
1.
2.
3.
Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse)
that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of
grout spaces and pour height.
Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for
specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi (14
MPa).
Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (203 to 279 mm) as measured
according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean,
sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is
specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
B.
Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors
and textures.
3.2
A.
TOLERANCES
Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Lines and Levels:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch
(12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus
or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm).
For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than
plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.
For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than
1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not
vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6
mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10
feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm)
maximum.
For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10
feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm)
maximum.
For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6
mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
Joints:
1.
2.
3.
For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8
inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm).
For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus
3/8 inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 8
3.3
LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A.
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and
offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where
possible, at other locations.
B.
Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in
running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs.
C.
Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other
Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
D.
Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams,
lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Provide vertical expansion joints in masonry walls as shown on the drawings, and at
intervals not exceeding 25 feet.
3.4
A.
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
Lay hollow CMUs as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed
joints.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting
course on footings where cells are not grouted.
B.
Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints
or slush head joints.
C.
Lay structural-clay tile as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Lay vertical-cell units with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. Provide bed
joints with full mortar coverage on face shells and webs.
Lay horizontal-cell units with full bed joints unless otherwise indicated. Keep
drainage channels, if any, free of mortar. Form head joints with sufficient mortar so
excess will be squeezed out as units are placed in position. Butter both sides of
units to be placed, or butter one side of unit already in place and one side of unit to
be placed.
Maintain joint thicknesses indicated except for minor variations required to maintain
bond alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6- to 10-mm-) thick
joints.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 9
4.
Where epoxy-mortar pointed joints are indicated, rake out setting mortar to a
uniform depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) and point with epoxy mortar to comply with
epoxy-mortar manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than
joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other
than paint) unless otherwise indicated.
3.5
A.
MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of
5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap
reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
1.
2.
3.
Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and
parapet walls.
Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall
openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings.
B.
Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D.
Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
3.6
A.
ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS
Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the
following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal
fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one
fastener.
Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches (50 mm) of air
space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.
Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up
and down.
Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically
and 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67
sq. ft. (0.25 sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305
mm) of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches (914 mm), around
perimeter.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 10
3.7
FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS
A.
General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels,
ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
B.
Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing
on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by
flashing manufacturer.
At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into
masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at
ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.
Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible
flashing to top of metal drip edge.
Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall.
Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere
flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination.
Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately
above embedded flashing and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.
Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated
with loose-fill insulation.
D.
Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for
cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.
E.
Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated.
weep/vent product to form vents.
1.
3.8
A.
Use specified
Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated.
Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1.
Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry
as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout.
Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction
and curing of reinforced masonry.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 11
2.
Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them
during construction.
B.
Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C.
Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained
enough strength to resist grout pressure.
1.
2.
3.9
Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for
grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing and Inspecting: Engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and
prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to
perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified
requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B.
Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code."
1.
2.
3.
Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of siteprepared mortar.
Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of
grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
C.
Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
D.
Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or
portion thereof.
E.
Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for
compressive strength.
F.
Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140
for compressive strength.
G.
Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification):
according to ASTM C 780.
H.
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.
Test mortar for compressive strength.
I.
Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
UNIT MASONRY
For each mix provided,
042000 - 12
3.10
PARGING
A.
Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to
a total thickness of 3/4 inch (19 mm).
B.
Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface. Form a wash at top of
parging and a cove at bottom.
C.
Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.
3.11
REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
B.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.12
A.
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or
soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing
with fill material as fill is placed.
1.
B.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes.
Protect surfaces from contact with cleaner.
Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly
by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical
Notes 20.
Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A
applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.
Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished
grade.
Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as
fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's
property.
END OF SECTION 042000
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 13
SECTION 047200 - CAST STONE MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Cast stone trim.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include
dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished
faces.
C.
Samples:
1.
2.
For each color and texture of cast stone required.
For colored mortar.
D.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
E.
Material Test Reports: For each mix required to produce cast stone, based on testing
according to ASTM C 1364, including test for resistance to freezing and thawing.
1.3
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast stone units similar to those
indicated for this Project that has sufficient production capacity to manufacture required
units, and is a plant certified by the Cast Stone Institute.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
CAST STONE UNITS
Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using either the vibrant dry tamp or
wet-cast method.
1.
Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory
testing according to ASTM C 666/C 666M, Procedure A, as modified by
ASTM C 1364.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #-00085
CAST STONE MASONRY
047200 - 1
2.
3.
4.
B.
Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12 to drain unless otherwise indicated.
Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs.
Provide drips on projecting elements unless otherwise indicated.
Cure units as follows:
1.
2.
Cure units in enclosed moist curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity and
temperature of 100 deg F (38 deg C) for 12 hours or 70 deg F (21 deg C) for 16
hours.
Keep units damp and continue curing to comply with one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
No fewer than five days at mean daily temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) or
above.
No fewer than six days at mean daily temperature of 60 deg F (16 deg C) or
above.
No fewer than seven days at mean daily temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C)
or above.
No fewer than eight days at mean daily temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C) or
above.
C.
Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view.
D.
Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Match
Brownstone color of other buildings fronting Norris Square.
2.2
ACCESSORIES
A.
Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from Type 304 stainless steel complying
with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666.
B.
Dowels: 1/2-inch- (12-mm-) diameter, round bars, fabricated from Type 304 stainless
steel complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666.
C.
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner complying with
requirements in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry", and expressly approved for intended
use by cast stone manufacturer and cleaner manufacturer.
2.3
A.
MORTAR
Comply with requirements in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for mortar materials and
mixes.
1.
2.
3.
B.
For setting mortar, use Type N.
For pointing mortar, use Type N.
Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product.
Mortar to match cast stone “Brownstone” color.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #-00085
CAST STONE MASONRY
047200 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR
A.
Install cast stone units to comply with requirements in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry."
B.
Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar.
Fill collar joints solid as units are set.
Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set.
Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open
to receive sealant.
Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant.
C.
Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm). Rake
joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to
remove excess mortar as joints are raked.
D.
Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch
(10 mm). Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before
applying next layer.
E.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than
joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Provide sealant joints at copings and other horizontal surfaces, at expansion, control, and
pressure-relieving joints, and at locations indicated.
1.
2.
3.2
A.
SETTING ANCHORED CAST STONE WITH SEALANT-FILLED JOINTS
Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned.
1.
2.
B.
Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments to secure units in place.
Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories.
Fill anchor holes with sealant.
1.
C.
Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.
Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with
applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
Where dowel holes occur at pressure-relieving joints, provide compressible material
at ends of dowels.
Set cast stone supported on clip or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Hold
shims back from face of cast stone a distance at least equal to width of joint.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #-00085
CAST STONE MASONRY
047200 - 3
D.
Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. Remove temporary shims and
spacers from joints after anchors and supports are secured in place and cast stone units
are anchored.
E.
Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable
requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.3
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet
(6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
B.
Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet
(6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
C.
Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches (3
mm in 900 mm) or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.
D.
Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment
with adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1/16
inch (1.5 mm), except where variation is due to warpage of units within tolerances
specified.
3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching
approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by
Architect.
B.
Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples,
complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses.
1.
2.
D.
Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone to
comply with requirements in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry."
END OF SECTION 047200
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #-00085
CAST STONE MASONRY
047200 - 4
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:
1.
1.2
A.
Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.
Metal bollards.
Loose steel lintels.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
METALS, GENERAL
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.
FERROUS METALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
C.
Steel Pipe:
indicated.
D.
Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 1
2.3
FASTENERS
A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 or Type 316 stainless-steel
fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls.
B.
Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise
indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or
ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip
galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
C.
Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1.
2.4
Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply
with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless
otherwise indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Shop Primers:
Coatings."
B.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
C.
Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
D.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20
and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
E.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
F.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout:
Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107.
Provide grout specifically
recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
G.
Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for
normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of
3000 psi (20 MPa).
2.5
Provide primers that comply with Section 099600 "High-Performance
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible.
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges.
Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
METAL FABRICATIONS
Use
055000 - 2
C.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
D.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
E.
Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
F.
Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B.
Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary
to receive adjacent construction.
C.
Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes
indicated.
1.
D.
2.7
Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill or punch
holes at 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with
steel base plates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch base plates and top plates
for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds
the same size as pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated.
LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A.
Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings
and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B.
Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 3
2.8
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A.
Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for
steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
B.
Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be
embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
C.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning."
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.
Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial
Blast Cleaning."
Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance
Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;
with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from
established lines and levels.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping
size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hotdip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where
metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 4
E.
3.2
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for
shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 055000
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 5
SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Steel and iron decorative railings.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
B.
Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Infill of Guards:
a.
b.
C.
1.3
A.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq.
ft. (0.093 sq. m).
Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating
metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
METALS, GENERAL
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors:
otherwise indicated.
Same metal and finish as supported rails unless
STEEL AND IRON
A.
Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
B.
Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.
C.
Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D.
Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.3
A.
FASTENERS
Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1.
2.
3.
Uncoated Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating where concealed; Type 304
stainless-steel fasteners where exposed.
Galvanized-Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating.
Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.
B.
Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six
times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed
when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
C.
Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
D.
Shop Primers:
Coatings."
E.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
F.
Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
G.
Epoxy Intermediate Coat:
topcoat.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Provide primers that comply with Section 099600 "High-Performance
Complying with MPI#77 and compatible with primer and
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300 - 2
H.
Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI#72 and compatible with undercoat.
I.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
J.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout:
Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107.
Provide grout specifically
recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
General:
Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than
that required to support structural loads.
B.
Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use
fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary
Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint.
D.
Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and
fittings.
E.
Form changes in direction by bending.
F.
Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting,
cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
G.
Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
H.
Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous
fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise
indicated.
2.5
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A.
Preparing Nongalvanized Items for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal
surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
B.
Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300 - 3
C.
High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to
prime-coated surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and with
requirements in SSPC-PA 1.
1.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately
in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free
of rack.
1.
2.
Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).
Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from
parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch
in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m).
B.
Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts
have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with grout.
C.
Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm)
larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material,
insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with grout.
D.
Anchor posts to metal surfaces as indicated using fittings designed and engineered for
this purpose.
E.
Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with brackets on underside of rails
connected to railing ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts.
F.
Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets.
1.
2.
G.
Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support
structural loads.
Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and
hanger or lag bolts.
For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between
studs.
For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-treated
wood backing between studs.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300 - 4
5.
6.
H.
For steel-framed partitions, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed
steel reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support
structural loads.
For steel-framed partitions, fasten brackets with toggle bolts installed through
flanges of steel framing or through concealed steel reinforcements.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for
shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
END OF SECTION 057300
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057300 - 5
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.2
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
1.
2.
1.3
Framing with dimension lumber.
Framing with engineered wood products.
Shear wall panels.
Wood blocking and nailers.
Wood furring.
Plywood backing panels.
Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment
manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with
requirements
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable
unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values
approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
B.
Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Wood-preservative-treated wood.
Fire-retardant-treated wood.
Engineered wood products.
Shear panels.
Power-driven fasteners.
Powder-actuated fasteners.
Expansion anchors.
Metal framing anchors.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
Certified Wood: Materials shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified by
an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles
and Criteria for Forest Stewardship for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Dimension lumber framing.
Laminated-veneer lumber.
Parallel-strand lumber.
Rim boards.
Miscellaneous lumber.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading
agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any ruleswriting agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an
agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the
rules indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade
stamp on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates
of grade compliance issued by grading agency.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Engineered Wood Products:
Provide engineered wood products acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation
reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project.
1.
2.2
A.
Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable
design stresses, as published by manufacturer that meet or exceed those
indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical
data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive
testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction
not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the
ground.
1.
Preservative Chemicals:
Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and
containing no arsenic or chromium.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 2
B.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC
Board of Review.
D.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and
similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and
waterproofing.
Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in
crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.
Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying
with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical
products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame
spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of
significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes,
and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline
of the burners at any time during the test.
1.
2.
Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for
fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being
subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior
locations and where indicated.
Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or
less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use
where exterior type is not indicated.
C.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
D.
Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified
testing agency.
E.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 3
2.4
A.
DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade.
1.
2.
Application: Interior partitions not indicated as load-bearing.
Species:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade.
1.
2.
Application: Framing other than interior partitions not indicated as load-bearing.
Species:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.5
Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
Northern species; NLGA.
Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.
Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
Hem-fir (north); NLGA.
Southern pine; SPIB.
Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
Douglas fir-south; WWPA.
Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA.
Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A.
Engineered Wood Products, General: Products shall contain no urea formaldehyde.
B.
Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with
grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to
ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with
ASTM D 2559.
1.
2.
C.
Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 3100 psi (21.3 MPa) for 12-inch
nominal- (286-mm actual-) depth members.
Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi (13 700 MPa).
Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood
I-joists at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I-joists.
1.
2.
3.
Material: product made from any combination solid lumber, wood strands, and
veneers.
Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).
Provide performance-rated product complying with APA PRR-401, rim board grade,
factory marked with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance
with APA standard.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 4
2.6
SHEAR WALL PANELS
A.
Wood-Framed Shear Wall Panels: Prefabricated assembly consisting of wood perimeter
framing, tie downs, and Exposure I, Structural I plywood or OSB sheathing.
B.
Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall
be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated
by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
2.7
A.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment
of other construction, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Blocking.
Nailers.
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
Cants.
Furring.
Grounds.
B.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any
species.
C.
For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and
any of the following species and grades:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.8
A.
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC in thickness indicated or, if not
indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.
1.
2.9
A.
Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB.
Eastern softwoods; No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA.
Northern species; No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.
Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
Plywood shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
FASTENERS
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this article for material and manufacture.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 5
1.
Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressurepreservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hotdip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or Type 304 stainless steel.
B.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
C.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property
Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
2.10
A.
METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
Galvanized-Steel Sheet:
Hot-dip, zinc-coated
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.
1.
B.
sheet
complying
with
Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), highstrength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B
(HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm)
thick.
1.
2.11
steel
Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a
sill sealer; 1-inch (25-mm) nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm);
selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
B.
Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
C.
Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable,
butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene
film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less
than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut,
and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for
accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply
with requirements for attaching other construction.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 6
B.
Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply
with manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing
agency exposed to view.
E.
Shear Wall Panels:
instructions.
F.
Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.
G.
Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
I.
Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install
continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
J.
Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated, complying with the following:
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and TwoFamily Dwellings.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate
treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
B.
Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes
sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate
treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION 061000
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 7
SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
Wall sheathing.
Roof sheathing.
Subflooring.
Underlayment.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate
component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Evaluation Reports: For following products, from ICC-ES:
1.
2.
Preservative-treated plywood.
Fire-retardant-treated plywood.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide
materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per
ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.
Fire-Resistance Ratings:
Resistance Directory."
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire
SHEATHING
061600 - 1
2.2
WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS
A.
Emissions: Products shall meet the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
B.
Certified Wood: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood
obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with
FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship":
1.
C.
2.3
Plywood.
Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2 unless otherwise indicated.
PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD
A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction.
B.
Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Application: Plywood in contact with masonry or concrete or used with roofing, flashing,
vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2.4
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD
A.
General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying
with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and
with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical
products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread
index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of
significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes,
and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline
of the burners at any time during the test.
1.
2.
3.
Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for
fire-retardant-treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to
accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and
where indicated.
Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or
less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use
where exterior type is not indicated.
Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber plywood shall be tested
according ASTM D 5516 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHEATHING
061600 - 2
according to ASTM D 6305. Span ratings after treatment shall be not less than
span ratings specified.
C.
Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
D.
Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified
testing agency.
E.
Application: Treat plywood indicated on Drawings.
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
2.7
WALL SHEATHING
Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior, Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.
ROOF SHEATHING
Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior or Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.
SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT
A.
Plywood Combination Subfloor-Underlayment:
Underlayment single-floor panels.
B.
Plywood Subflooring: Exposure 1, Structural I single-floor panels or sheathing.
C.
Plywood Underlayment for Resilient Flooring: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1 Underlayment with
fully sanded face.
D.
Plywood Underlayment for Ceramic Tile: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged, not less than
5/8-inch (15.9-mm) nominal thickness, for ceramic tile set in organic adhesive or epoxy
adhesive.
E.
Plywood Underlayment for Carpet: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, Underlayment.
2.8
A.
DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, Structural I,
FASTENERS
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this article for material and manufacture.
1.
For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying
with ASTM A 153/A 153M or of Type 304 stainless steel.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHEATHING
061600 - 3
2.9
A.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01
that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of
both adhesives and panels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too
small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints
so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.
B.
Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against
abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1.
2.
3.
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's "International Residential Code for One- and TwoFamily Dwellings."
D.
Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation
so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture
from passing through completed assembly.
E.
Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing
of structural support elements.
3.2
WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered
Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.
B.
Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1.
Combination Subfloor-Underlayment:
a.
b.
c.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Glue and screw to wood framing.
Screw to cold-formed metal framing.
Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.
SHEATHING
061600 - 4
2.
Subflooring:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Wall and Roof Sheathing:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Glue and screw to wood framing.
Screw to cold-formed metal framing.
Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.
Nail to wood framing. Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members
at edges of wall sheathing panels.
Screw to cold-formed metal framing.
Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.
Underlayment:
a.
b.
c.
Nail to subflooring.
Space panels 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) apart at edges and ends.
Fill and sand edge joints of underlayment receiving resilient flooring
immediately before installing flooring.
END OF SECTION 061600
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHEATHING
061600 - 5
SECTION 061753 - SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Wood roof trusses.
Wood floor trusses.
Wood girder trusses.
Wood truss bracing.
Metal truss accessories.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For metal-plate connectors, metal truss accessories, and fasteners.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for trusses.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
1.3
Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of
truss required.
Indicate sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber.
Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual
truss members due to design loads.
Indicate locations, sizes, and materials for permanent bracing required to prevent
buckling of individual truss members due to design loads.
Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal
connector plates.
Show splice details and bearing details.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses indicated to
comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product certificates.
B.
Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1.
2.
Metal-plate connectors.
Metal truss accessories.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
061753 - 1
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of
TPI and that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of
connector plates.
1.
2.
B.
1.5
A.
Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services
needed to assume engineering responsibility.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance
program that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves thirdparty inspection by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
Architect and authorities having jurisdiction and is certified for chain of custody by an
FSC-accredited certification body.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations in TPI BCSI, "Building
Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing,
Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design:
Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in
Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design metal-plate-connected wood trusses.
B.
Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of
withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with
requirements in TPI 1 unless more stringent requirements are specified below.
2.2
DIMENSION LUMBER
A.
Certified Wood: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses, provide materials produced
from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to
comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
B.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading
agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules
writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an
agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the
rules indicated.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
061753 - 2
1.
C.
2.3
Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for
miscellaneous lumber in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."
METAL CONNECTOR PLATES
A.
General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1.
B.
Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), highstrength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B
(HSLAS Type B); G60 (Z180) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm)
thick.
2.4
A.
FASTENERS
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this article for material and manufacture.
1.
2.
B.
2.5
Provide fasteners for use with metal framing anchors that comply with written
recommendations of metal framing manufacturer.
Where trusses are exposed to weather, in ground contact, made from pressurepreservative treated wood, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners
with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or of Type 304
stainless steel.
Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
METAL FRAMING ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall
be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated
by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
B.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet:
Hot-dip, zinc-coated
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.
2.6
A.
steel
sheet
complying
with
FABRICATION
Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to
ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with
tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated.
1.
Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
061753 - 3
B.
Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded
simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and
secured.
B.
If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before
installing.
C.
Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required,
exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other
causes.
D.
Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated.
E.
Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss
hangers as applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing
anchors according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions.
F.
Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses.
G.
Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads
are applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.
1.
2.
Install bracing to comply with Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."
Install and fasten strong-back bracing vertically against vertical web of parallelchord floor trusses at centers indicated.
H.
Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1.
I.
Do not alter trusses in field. Do not cut, drill, notch, or remove truss members.
J.
Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements.
END OF SECTION 061753
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
061753 - 4
SECTION 061800 - GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes framing using structural glued-laminated timber.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Certificates of Conformance: Issued by a qualified testing and inspecting agency indicating that
structural glued-laminated timber complies with requirements in AITC A190.1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Manufacturer Qualifications: Certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification
body.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
General: Comply with provisions in AITC 111.
B.
Individually wrap members using plastic-coated paper covering with water-resistant seams.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
2.2
STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
A.
General: Provide structural glued-laminated timber that complies with AITC A190.1 and
AITC 117 or research/evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Factory mark each piece of structural glued-laminated timber with AITC Quality Mark or
APA-EWS trademark. Place mark on surfaces that are not exposed in the completed
Work.
Provide structural glued-laminated timber made with wet-use adhesive complying with
AITC A190.1.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
061800 - 1
3.
4.
Adhesive shall not contain urea-formaldehyde resins.
Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services')
"Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
B.
Certified Wood: Glued-laminated timber shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed
Credit" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship,"
and to FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification."
C.
Species and Grades for Structural Glued-Laminated Timber: Any species that complies with
structural properties indicated.
D.
Species and Grades for Beams and Purlins:
1.
2.
E.
2.3
Species and Beam Stress Classification: Any species, 24F-1.7E.
Lay-up: Either balanced or unbalanced.
Appearance Grade: Framing, complying with AITC 110.
TIMBER CONNECTORS
A.
Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Finish steel assemblies and fasteners with rust-inhibitive primer, 2-mil (0.05-mm) dry film
thickness.
1.
C.
2.4
Structural-steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Round steel bars complying with ASTM A 575, Grade M 1020.
Hot-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel,
Type SS, Grade 33.
Primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services')
"Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
Hot-dip galvanize steel assemblies and fasteners after fabrication to comply with
ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in
retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts and is compatible with indicated
finish.
B.
Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that is
compatible with indicated finish.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
061800 - 2
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
Shop fabricate for connections to greatest extent possible, including cutting to length and
drilling bolt holes.
B.
Camber: Fabricate horizontal and inclined members of less than 1:1 slope with either circular
or parabolic camber equal to 1/500 of span.
C.
End-Cut Sealing: Immediately after end cutting each member to final length, apply a saturation
coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces, keeping surfaces flood coated for not
less than 10 minutes.
D.
Seal Coat: After fabricating, sanding, and end-coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation coat of
penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Erect structural glued-laminated timber true and plumb and with uniform, close-fitting
joints. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting
members are in place.
1.
Handle and temporarily support glued-laminated timber to prevent surface damage,
compression, and other effects that might interfere with indicated finish.
B.
Cutting: Avoid extra cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with
requirements for shop fabrication.
C.
Fit structural glued-laminated timber by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match
specified surfacing.
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Predrill for fasteners using timber connectors as templates.
Finish exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks.
Coat cross cuts with end sealer.
ADJUSTING
A.
Repair damaged surfaces after completing erection. Replace damaged structural gluedlaminated timber if repairs are not approved by Architect.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
061800 - 3
3.3
PROTECTION
A.
Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer serve a useful
purpose, including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, and damage from work of other
trades.
1.
Slit underside of wrapping to prevent accumulation of moisture inside the wrapping.
END OF SECTION 061800
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
061800 - 4
SECTION 062013 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Exterior wood trim.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
B.
Samples: For each type of product involving selection of colors, profiles, or textures.
1.3
A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Compliance Certificates:
1.
2.
B.
For lumber that is not marked with grade stamp.
For preservative-treated wood that is not marked with treatment-quality mark.
Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1.
Wood-preservative-treated wood.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS, GENERAL
Certified Wood: The following wood products shall be produced from wood obtained
from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship":
1.
B.
Lumber: DOC PS 20.
1.
C.
Exterior trim.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency
indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062013 - 1
2.2
A.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
A.
EXTERIOR TRIM
Lumber Trim:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
A.
Species: Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or sugar pine.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to
penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into wood substrate.
1.
2.
B.
Species and Grade: Southern pine, pressure-preservative treated; B & B; SPIB.
Species and Grade: Eastern white pine, D Select (Quality); NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB,
or WWPA.
Maximum Moisture Content: nineteen (19) percent.
Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth).
Moldings: WMMPA WM 4, N-grade wood moldings, without finger jointing. Made from
kiln-dried stock to patterns included in WMMPA WM 12.
1.
2.4
Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19
and 18 percent respectively.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Application: All exterior lumber and plywood.
For prefinished items, provide matching prefinished aluminum fasteners where face
fastening is required.
For applications not otherwise indicated, provide stainless-steel or hot-dip
galvanized-steel fasteners.
Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834 Type OP, Grade NF and with applicable
requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," recommended by sealant manufacturer
and manufacturer of substrates for intended application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PREPARATION
Prime lumber and moldings to be painted, including both faces and edges, unless factory
primed. Cut to required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in
Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062013 - 2
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials.
Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1.
3.3
Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts
as recommended by manufacturer.
STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A.
Install flat-grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather.
B.
Install trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from
maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm)
long except where necessary.
1.
2.
C.
Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members.
Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at corners.
END OF SECTION 062013
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062013 - 3
SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
A.
Interior trim.
Shelving and clothes rods.
Interior stairs and railings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS, GENERAL
Certified Wood: The following wood products shall be produced from wood obtained
from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship":
1.
2.
3.
Interior trim.
Shelving and clothes rods.
Interior stairs and railings.
B.
Low-Emitting Materials: Composite wood products shall comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice
for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
C.
Lumber: DOC PS 20.
1.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency
indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
D.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
E.
MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 1
2.2
A.
INTERIOR TRIM
Softwood Lumber Trim:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Hardwood Lumber Trim:
1.
2.
C.
Species and Grade: Red oak; Clear; A Finish; NHLA.
Maximum Moisture Content: 13 percent.
Hardwood Moldings for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): WMMPA HWM 2, Ngrade wood moldings made to patterns included in WMMPA HWM 1.
1.
2.
D.
Species and Grade: Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or
sugar pine; D Select (Quality); NeLMA, NLGA, or WWPA.
Species and Grade: Southern pine, B & B finish; SPIB.
Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent.
Species: Red oak.
Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent.
Moldings for Opaque Finish (Painted Finish):
WMMPA WM 12.
1.
Softwood Moldings: WMMPA WM 4, P grade.
a.
b.
E.
3.
4.
A.
Species: Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or sugar
pine.
Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent.
Molding Patterns:
1.
2.
2.3
Made to patterns included in
Base Pattern: WM 750, 9/16-by-4-1/4-inch (14-by-108-mm) beaded-edge base.
Shoe-Mold Pattern: WM 126, 1/2-by-3/4-inch (13-by-19-mm) quarter-round shoe
mold.
Casing Pattern: WM 376, 11/16-by-2-1/4-inch (17-by-57-mm) beaded-edge casing.
Stop Pattern: WM 886, 3/8-by-1-3/8-inch (9.5-by-35-mm) bullnose stop.
SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS
Shelving: Made from one of the following materials, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick.
1.
2.
MDO softwood plywood with solid-wood edge.
Softwood Boards: Eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, radiata, or
sugar pine; D Select (Quality); NeLMA, NLGA, or WWPA; kiln dried.
B.
Shelf Cleats: 3/4-by-5-1/2-inch (19-by-140-mm) boards with hole and notch to receive
clothes rods, as specified above for shelving.
C.
Shelf Brackets with Rod Support: BHMA A156.16, B04051; prime-painted formed steel.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 2
D.
Shelf Brackets without Rod Support:
steel.
E.
Clothes Rods: 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) diameter, clear, kiln-dried hardwood.
2.4
BHMA A156.16, B04041; prime-painted formed
STAIRS AND RAILINGS
A.
Treads: 1-1/16-inch (27-mm), clear, kiln-dried, edge-glued, oak or hard maple stepping
with half-round nosing.
B.
Risers: 13/16-inch (21-mm), clear, kiln-dried, edge-glued red oak or hard maple stock.
C.
Interior Railings: Clear, kiln-dried red oak or hard maple.
D.
Balusters: Clear, kiln-dried, red oak or hard maple.
E.
Newel Posts: Clear, kiln-dried, red oak or hard maple.
2.5
A.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Glue:
Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by
manufacturer for general carpentry use.
1.
Wood glue shall have a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing
humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1.
2.
3.
Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts
as recommended by manufacturer.
Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless otherwise indicated.
Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb.
Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for
flush installation and 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 3
4.
3.3
A.
3.4
Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch (4.7-mm) variation between adjacent
treads and risers and with no more than 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) variation between
largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight.
STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum
lengths of lumber available. Cope at returns, miter at outside corners, and cope at inside
corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint.
Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
SHELVING AND CLOTHES ROD INSTALLATION
A.
Cut shelf cleats at ends of shelves about 1/2 inch (13 mm) less than width of shelves and
sand exposed ends smooth.
B.
Install shelf cleats by fastening to framing or backing with finish nails or trim screws, set
below face and filled. Space fasteners not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
C.
Install shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions, spaced not more
than 36 inches (900 mm) o.c. Fasten to framing members, blocking, or metal backing, or
use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors.
D.
Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed
and reinstalled. Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and supports.
3.5
A.
STAIR AND RAILING INSTALLATION
Treads and Risers at Interior Stairs: Secure treads and risers by gluing and nailing to
rough carriages.
1.
2.
Closed Stringers: Cope wall stringers to fit tightly over treads and risers.
Open Stringers: Miter risers and stringer at open stringers. Extend tread over open
stringers and finish with bullnose edge.
B.
Balusters: Dovetail or mortise balusters into treads, glue, and nail in place. Let into
railings and glue in place.
C.
Newel Posts: Secure newel posts to stringers, rough carriages, and risers with
countersunk-head wood screws and glue.
D.
Railings: Secure wall rails with metal brackets. Fasten freestanding railings to newel
posts and to trim at walls with countersunk-head wood screws or rail bolts, and glue.
Assemble railings at goosenecks, easements, and splices with rail bolts and glue.
END OF SECTION 062023
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
062023 - 4
SECTION 064300 - WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Wood stairs and railings.
1.2
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates:
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications:
B.
Installer Qualifications:
1.5
A.
FIELD CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood stairs and railings until building
is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining
temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1.
Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that
woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS
064300 - 1
B.
Grade: Custom.
C.
Certified Wood: Stair work and rails shall be produced from wood certified as "FSC
Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria
for Forest Stewardship," and FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody
Certification."
D.
Wood for Transparent Finish: Red oak, quarter sawn.
E.
Wood for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood except that eastern white pine,
sugar pine, or western white pine may be used for risers, stringers, and moldings.
F.
Finishes for Stair Parts: As follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.2
A.
WOOD MATERIALS
Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality
standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.3
Treads: Transparent.
Risers: Transparent.
Stringers: Opaque.
Balusters: Transparent.
Handrails: Transparent.
Scotia, Cove, and Other Moldings: Opaque.
Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried
to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B.
Rough Carriages for Stairs: Laminated veneer lumber, made with an exterior-type
adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559, and with the following allowable design values as
determined according to ASTM D 5456:
C.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed
anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face
of exterior walls and at floors.
D.
Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS
064300 - 2
E.
VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Sealants: Use products that comply with the
following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
1.
2.
3.
2.4
A.
Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L.
FABRICATION
Fabricate wood stairs and railings to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease
edges to radius indicated for the following:
1.
Corners of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent
possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
C.
Cut carriages to accurately fit treads and risers. Glue treads to risers, and glue and nail
treads and risers to carriages.
1.
2.5
Fabricate stairs with treads and risers no more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from indicated
position and no more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) out of relative position for adjacent
treads and risers.
SHOP FINISHING
A.
General: Finish wood stairs and railings at fabrication shop as specified in this Section.
Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
B.
Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1.
C.
Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork.
Transparent Finish:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Grade: Custom.
Finish: System - 12, water-based polyurethane.
Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made
from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing.
Staining: None required.
Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS
064300 - 3
6.
D.
Sheen: Semi-gloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per
ASTM D 523.
Opaque Finish:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Grade: Custom.
Finish: System - 4, water-based latex acrylic.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Sheen: Gloss, 61-100 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per
ASTM D 523.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
PREPARATION
Before installation, condition wood stairs and railings to average prevailing humidity
conditions in installation areas.
INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install wood stairs and railings to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B.
Stairs: Securely anchor carriages to supporting substrates. Install stairs with treads and
risers no more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from indicated position.
C.
Railings:
1.
2.
3.
D.
General: Install rails with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm)
variation from a straight line.
Stair Rails: Glue and dowel or pin balusters to treads and railings, and railings to
newel posts.
Wall Rails: Support rails on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall
framing.
Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of wood stairs and
railings. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.
END OF SECTION 064300
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WOOD STAIRS AND RAILINGS
064300 - 4
SECTION 071353 - ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
EPDM rubber sheet waterproofing.
Butyl rubber sheet waterproofing.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing and details of substrate joints and
cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining
waterproofing, and other termination conditions.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by waterproofing manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SHEET WATERPROOFING
A.
EPDM Rubber Sheet: ASTM D 6134, Type I, 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick flexible sheet,
unreinforced, formed from EPDM.
B.
Butyl Rubber Sheet: ASTM D 6134, Type II, 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick flexible sheet,
unreinforced, formed from isobutylene-isoprene rubber.
2.2
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended
use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.
1.
B.
Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Concealed Sheet Flashing: Same material, construction, and thickness as sheet waterproofing
or 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick, uncured EPDM, as required by manufacturer.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
071353 - 1
C.
Exposed Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick EPDM, cured or uncured, as required by
manufacturer.
D.
Bonding Adhesives: For bonding waterproofing sheets and sheet flashings to substrates and
projections.
E.
Splicing Cement and Cleaner: Single-component butyl splicing cement and solvent-based
splice cleaner.
1.
Butyl Gum Tape: 30-mil- (0.76-mm-) thick-by-6-1/4-inch- (160-mm-) wide, uncured
butyl with polyethylene release film.
F.
Lap Sealant: Single-component sealant.
G.
In-Seam Sealant: Single-component sealant.
H.
Water-Cutoff Mastic: Butyl mastic sealant.
I.
Waterproofing and Sheet-Flashing Accessories: Provide sealants, pourable sealers, cone and
vent flashings, inside and outside corner flashings, termination reglets, and other accessories
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use.
J.
Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard aluminum bars, approximately 1 inch (25
mm) wide, prepunched, with fasteners.
K.
Protection Course: Semirigid sheets of asphalt-impregnated organic mat, mineral surface, with
a nominal thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm).
L.
Protection Course: Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation, a nominal
thickness of 1/4 inch (6 mm), and a compressive strength of not less than 8 psi (55 kPa).
2.3
MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS
A.
Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Comply with Section 334600 "Subdrainage."
B.
Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Composite subsurface drainage
panel consisting of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core; with a
nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding
No. 70 (0.21-mm) sieve laminated to one side of the core; and with a vertical flow rate of 9 to
15 gpm per ft. (112 to 188 L/min. per m).
C.
Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Composite subsurface drainage
panels consisting of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core; with a
woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve
laminated to one side of the core; and with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm per ft.
(35 L/min. per m).
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
071353 - 2
2.4
INSULATION DRAINAGE PANELS
A.
Unfaced Wall-Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying
with ASTM C 578, Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa) minimum compressive strength; unfaced;
fabricated with shiplap or channel edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels.
B.
Geotextile-Faced, Wall-Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation
complying with ASTM C 578, Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa) minimum compressive strength;
fabricated with tongue-and-groove edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels
faced with nonwoven geotextile filter fabric.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FULLY ADHERED SHEET INSTALLATION
A.
Prepare surfaces and install fully adhered sheets over entire area to receive waterproofing
according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in ASTM D 5843.
B.
Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions
required. Stagger end laps.
C.
Apply bonding adhesive to substrates at required rate and allow it to partially dry.
D.
Apply bonding adhesive to sheets and firmly adhere sheets to substrates. Do not apply bonding
adhesive to splice area of sheet.
E.
Install fully adhered sheets and auxiliary materials to tie into existing waterproofing.
F.
Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing that do not comply with requirements.
Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending beyond
repaired areas in all directions.
3.2
SEAM INSTALLATION
A.
Cement Splice: Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement and in-seam sealant, and firmly roll
side and end laps of overlapping sheets according to manufacturer's written instructions to
produce a splice not less than 6 inches (150 mm) wide and to ensure a watertight seam
installation. Apply lap sealant and seal edges of sheet terminations.
B.
Cement and Tape Splice: Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement and butyl gum tape, and
firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets according to manufacturer's written
instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal edges of sheet
terminations.
3.3
SHEET FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to
waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
071353 - 3
B.
Form wall flashings using exposed sheet flashing.
C.
Extend deck sheet waterproofing to form wall flashings.
1.
2.
Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with uncured sheet
flashing.
Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of
overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight installation. Apply lap sealant and seal edges of
sheet flashing terminations.
D.
Cover expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall or deck-to-deck joints by extending
deck sheet waterproofing over joints.
E.
Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings.
3.4
PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION
A.
Install protection course over waterproofing membrane according to manufacturer's written
instructions and before beginning subsequent construction operations. Minimize exposure of
membrane.
1.
3.5
Molded-sheet drainage panels or Insulation drainage panels may be used in place of a
separate protection course for vertical applications when approved by waterproofing
manufacturer.
MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE-PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck
substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives or other methods that
do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity.
Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction.
1.
3.6
For vertical applications, install protection course before installing drainage panels.
INSULATION DRAINAGE-PANEL INSTALLATION
A.
Install insulation drainage panels over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch (19
mm) of projections and penetrations.
B.
Ensure that drainage channels are aligned and free of obstructions.
C.
On vertical surfaces, set insulation drainage panels in adhesive or tape applied according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation drainage panels according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
071353 - 4
3.7
PROTECTION, REPAIR, AND CLEANING
A.
Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.
B.
Protect installed insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful weather
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is
subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately
after installation.
C.
Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair
substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.
D.
Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 071353
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING
071353 - 5
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
1.3
Foam-plastic board insulation.
Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product test reports.
B.
Research/evaluation reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
Type IV, 25 psi (173 kPa).
POLYISOCYANURATE BOARD INSULATION
ASTM C 1289, Class 2. 25 psi foil-faced.
GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flamespread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84;
passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 1
B.
Polypropylene-Scrim-Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II
(non-reflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less);
Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier).
C.
Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II (non-reflective faced),
Class C (faced surface not rated for flame propagation); Category 1 (membrane is a
vapor barrier).
D.
Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and
sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between
insulated attic spaces and vented eaves.
2.4
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils (0.15 mm) thick, with maximum
permeance rating of 0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).
B.
Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed
to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C.
Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around
obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
D.
Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce
thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up
total thickness.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION
On vertical surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation 24 inches (610 mm) to basement floor.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 2
B.
On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
1.
3.3
If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) in
from exterior walls.
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's
written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with
adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of
units.
B.
Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic,
or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill
voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by
insulation manufacturer.
C.
Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing
members according to the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members.
If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will
produce a snug fit between ends.
Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit
between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures
not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.
Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic
spaces at vented eaves.
For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm),
support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping
flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.
For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as
follows:
a.
b.
7.
With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset,
stapling flanges to sides of framing members.
With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of
adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material
is installed over it.
Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings,
and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.
a.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward interior of construction.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 3
3.4
A.
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR CONCRETE SUBSTRATES
Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type
insulation anchors as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive
according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according
to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and
application indicated.
Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between
concrete substrate and insulation.
After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position
over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers,
taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness.
Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped
washers to tips of spindles.
INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor
retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor
retarders in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor
retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with
loose-fiber insulation.
B.
Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs.
1.
2.
3.
Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at
perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (406 mm)
o.c.
Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing
including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window
openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape
according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with
vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid
substrates.
Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vaporretarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
C.
Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating
vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating
objects and vapor retarders.
D.
Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other
work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.
END OF SECTION 072100
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 4
SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
Building wrap.
Flexible flashing.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier and flexible flashing, from ICC-ES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER
Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV
stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
2.
DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek HomeWrap and
Stucco Wrap.
Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than fifty (50) g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24
hours per ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method (Procedure A).
B.
Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.
C.
Use stucco wrap with drainage plane under stucco finishes.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WEATHER BARRIERS
072500 - 1
2.2
A.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density
polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall
thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); DuPont Flashing Tape.
Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor
Butyl Self Adhered Flashing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION
Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.2
A.
Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting
members at expansion- or control-joint locations.
Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch (100-mm) overlap
unless otherwise indicated.
Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.
Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.
FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches (100 mm) except
that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings.
Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings.
END OF SECTION 072500
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WEATHER BARRIERS
072500 - 2
SECTION 074213.13 - FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
A.
1.3
Concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of
edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim,
flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.
C.
Samples: For each type of metal panel indicated.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
1.6
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Product test reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained
and approved by manufacturer.
B.
UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment:
UL-certified, portable roll-forming
equipment capable of producing metal panels warranted by manufacturer to be the same
as factory-formed products. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment
for duration of work.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
074213.13 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) when
tested according to ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:
1.
B.
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:
1.
C.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100
deg C), material surfaces.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.2
Test-Pressure Difference: 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. (137 Pa).
Thermal Movements:
Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
D.
Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the
listings of another qualified testing agency.
CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS
A.
General: Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping
and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through
panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required
for weathertight installation.
B.
Flush-Profile, Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with vertical panel edges
and a flat pan between panel edges; with flush joint between panels.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
2.
Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloycoated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
074213.13 - 2
(Class AZM150) coating designation; structural quality.
coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
2.3
A.
Prepainted by the coil-
Nominal Thickness: 24 gauge.
Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Panel Coverage: 7 inches.
Panel Height: 1.0 inch (25 mm).
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel
system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings,
sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of
metal panels unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal
panels.
Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from
material recommended by manufacturer.
Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or cross-linked, polyolefinfoam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick,
flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide
closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
B.
Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels
as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations
include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, end-walls, framed
openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and
trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.
C.
Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide
exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps
or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.
D.
Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible
with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.
1.
2.
3.
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene
compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8
inch (3 mm) thick.
Joint Sealant:
ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal panel
manufacturer.
Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
074213.13 - 3
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated
performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated
profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B.
On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal
panels may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if
panels are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-formed
panels. Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to
comply with details shown.
C.
Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full
length of panel.
D.
Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that
provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise
from movements.
E.
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item
indicated.
2.5
A.
FINISHES
Panels and Accessories:
1.
2.
Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.
Concealed Finish: White or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
METAL PANEL INSTALLATION
Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped
joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure.
Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to
compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels.
Install screws in predrilled holes.
Flash and seal panels with weather closures at perimeter of all openings.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
074213.13 - 4
B.
Watertight Installation:
1.
2.
3.
Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels,
using sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting-type
panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight.
Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and
accessories.
At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152-mm) end lap, sealed with
sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
C.
Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and
weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with
flashings and other components.
D.
Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written
installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide
concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated.
Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.
3.2
A.
CLEANING
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are
installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal
panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION 074213.13
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS
074213.13 - 5
SECTION 074600 – FIBER-CEMENT SIDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
Section includes fiber-cement siding.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For siding including related accessories.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product certificates.
B.
Product test reports.
C.
Research/evaluation reports.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.6
Furnish full lengths of siding including related accessories, in a quantity equal to 2
percent of amount installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Labeling:
Provide fiber-cement siding that is tested and labeled according to
ASTM C 1186 by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, texture, and pattern of siding, including
related accessories, from single source from single manufacturer.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SIDING
074600 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
FIBER-CEMENT SIDING
General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when
tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested
according to ASTM E 84.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
2.
Horizontal Pattern: Boards 5-1/4 inches (133 mm) and 8-1/4 to 8-1/2 inches (210 to
216 mm) wide in plain style.
a.
3.
2.2
A.
Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner
caps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building
configuration.
Provide accessories made from same material as and texture of adjacent siding
unless otherwise indicated.
Flashing: Provide aluminum flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads.
1.
C.
Texture: Smooth.
ACCESSORIES
1.
B.
James Hardie.
Finish for Aluminum Flashing: High-performance organic finish, same color as
siding.
Fasteners:
1.
2.
For fastening to wood, use siding nails of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum
of 1 inch (25 mm) into substrate.
For fastening fiber cement, use hot-dip galvanized and stainless-steel fasteners.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SIDING
074600 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of siding and related accessories.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
1.
2.
B.
Do not install damaged components.
Center nails in elongated nailing slots without binding siding to allow for thermal
movement.
Install fiber-cement siding and related accessories.
1.
Install fasteners no more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
C.
Install joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and to produce
weathertight installation.
D.
Where aluminum siding will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with
new materials complying with specified requirements.
B.
Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a
clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION 074600
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SIDING
074600 - 3
SECTION 074633 - PLASTIC SIDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes vinyl siding.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
1.3
For vinyl siding, include VSI's official certification logo printed on Product Data.
Samples: For vinyl siding including related accessories.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For vinyl siding Installer.
B.
Product certificates.
C.
Research/evaluation reports.
D.
Sample warranty.
1.4
A.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Vinyl Siding Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs a VSI-certified
Installer on Project.
B.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1.
2.
Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of
the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLASTIC SIDING
074633 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
VINYL SIDING
Vinyl Siding: Integrally colored product complying with ASTM D 3679.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable
product by the following:
a.
CertainTeed Corporation. Wolverine Restoration Smooth. Colors to be
selected from manufacturer’s full range. Provide 4” edge trim in contrasting
color to body.
B.
Vinyl Siding Certification Program: Provide products that are listed in VSI's list of certified
products.
C.
Horizontal Pattern: 4-1/2 inch exposure in plain, double board style.
D.
Texture: Smooth.
E.
Nominal Thickness: 0.044 inch (1.1 mm).
F.
Minimum Profile Depth (Butt Thickness): 5/8 inch (16 mm).
G.
Nailing Hem: Double thickness.
2.2
A.
ACCESSORIES
Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner
caps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building
configuration.
1.
B.
Provide accessories from same material and texture of adjacent siding unless
otherwise indicated.
Vinyl Accessories: Integrally colored vinyl accessories complying with ASTM D 3679
except for wind-load resistance.
1.
Texture: Smooth.
C.
Colors for Decorative Accessories: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range of colors.
D.
Flashing: Provide aluminum flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated.
1.
Finish for Aluminum Flashing: High-performance organic finish, same color as
siding.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLASTIC SIDING
074633 - 2
E.
Fasteners:
1.
2.
For fastening to wood, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to
penetrate a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) into substrate.
For fastening vinyl, use stainless-steel fasteners. Where fasteners are exposed to
view, use prefinished aluminum fasteners in color to match item being fastened.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
1.
B.
Install vinyl siding and related accessories according to ASTM D 4756.
1.
C.
3.2
Center nails in elongated nailing slots without binding siding to allow for thermal
movement.
Install fasteners for horizontal vinyl siding no more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
Install joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and to produce a
weathertight installation.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with
new materials complying with specified requirements.
B.
Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a
clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION 074633
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLASTIC SIDING
074633 - 3
SECTION 075323 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
A.
1.3
Adhered ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer (EPDM) roofing system, Energy Star
rated.
DEFINITIONS
Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA
Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
C.
Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1.
2.
1.4
Sheet roofing, of color required.
Walkway pads or rolls, of color required.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.
B.
Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by
roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to
receive manufacturer's special warranty.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENEMONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
075323 - 1
1.7
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing
system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Fifteen (15) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when
tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.
B.
Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to
ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.
C.
Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than seventy-eight (78) when calculated according to
ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.
D.
Energy Star Listing: Roofing system shall be listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof
Products Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products.
E.
Energy Performance: Roofing system shall have an initial solar reflectance index of not
less than 0.70 and an emissivity of not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.
F.
Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof
slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate
markings of applicable testing agency.
G.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
2.2
A.
EPDM ROOFING
EPDM: ASTM D 4637, Type I, nonreinforced, uniform, flexible EPDM sheet.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
Firestone Building Products.
GAF Materials Corporation.
Johns Manville.
Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENEMONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
075323 - 2
3.
2.3
A.
Exposed Face Color: White on black.
AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended
use and compatible with roofing.
1.
2.
Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall
comply with the following limits for VOC content:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesives: 250 g/L.
Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.
Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
Other Adhesives and Sealants: 250 g/L.
B.
Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to
application.
C.
Protection Sheet: Epichlorohydrin or neoprene nonreinforced flexible sheet, 55- to 60-mil(1.4- to 1.5-mm-) thick, recommended by EPDM manufacturer for resistance to
hydrocarbons, non-aromatic solvents, grease, and oil.
D.
Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, water based.
E.
Seaming Material: Single-component, butyl splicing adhesive and splice cleaner.
F.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening membrane to
substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
G.
Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide lap sealant, water cutoff mastic, metal termination
bars, metal battens, pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, molded
pipe boot flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced
EPDM securement strips, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover
strips, and other accessories.
2.4
A.
SUBSTRATE BOARDS
Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate,
1/2 inch (13 mm).
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENEMONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
075323 - 3
B.
2.5
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening substrate
panel to roof deck.
ASPHALT MATERIALS
A.
Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or Type IV.
B.
Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M.
2.6
A.
WALKWAYS
Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting,
surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick and
acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water
from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when
rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on
adjoining roofing.
3.2
A.
SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION
Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof
slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.
1.
3.3
Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at
corners, perimeter, and field of roof according to roofing system manufacturers'
written instructions.
ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION
A.
Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax before
installing.
B.
Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions
required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENEMONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
075323 - 4
C.
Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by
manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice
area of roofing.
D.
In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations,
penetrations, and perimeters.
E.
Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and
firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing according to manufacturer's written
instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed
edges of roofing terminations.
1.
Apply a continuous bead of in-seam sealant before closing splice if required by
roofing system manufacturer.
F.
Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape,
and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing according to manufacturer's
written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal
exposed edges of roofing terminations.
G.
Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements.
H.
Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal
membrane roofing in place with clamping ring.
3.4
BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate,
and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C.
Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured
sheet flashing.
D.
Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of
overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal
exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations.
E.
Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
3.5
A.
WALKWAY INSTALLATION
Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkway
products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENEMONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
075323 - 5
3.6
PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A.
Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of
construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing,
inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written
report, with copies to Architect and Owner.
B.
Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a
condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and
according to warranty requirements.
C.
Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 075323
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENEMONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
075323 - 6
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Manufactured reglets with counterflashing.
Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications.
Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
1.3
Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.
Include identification of finish for each item.
Include pattern of seams and details of termination points, expansion joints and
expansion-joint covers, direction of expansion, roof-penetration flashing, and
connections to adjoining work.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product certificates.
B.
Product test reports.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal
flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a
record of successful in-service performance.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 1
1.
For copings and roof edge flashings that are SPRI ES-1 tested, shop shall be listed
as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural
movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain
watertight.
B.
Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions
and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C.
Thermal Movements:
temperature changes.
1.
2.2
Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient.
SHEET METALS
A.
General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by
applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for
finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance
required.
1.
Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a.
2.
C.
Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not
less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat,
and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and
resin manufacturers' written instructions.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; 2D (dull,
cold rolled) finish.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 2
2.3
UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A.
Felt:
ASTM D 226/D 226M,
nonperforated.
B.
Synthetic Underlayment: Laminated or reinforced, woven polyethylene or polypropylene,
synthetic roofing underlayment; bitumen free; slip resistant; suitable for high temperatures
over 220 deg F (111 deg C); and complying with physical requirements of
ASTM D 226/D 226M for Type I and Type II felts.
C.
Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m) minimum.
2.4
Type II
(No. 30),
asphalt-saturated
organic
felt;
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants,
and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim
installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets
and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and
recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal.
1.
General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a.
b.
2.
3.
C.
Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps
or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing
washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.
Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for
metal being fastened.
Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
Solder:
1.
For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended
by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
D.
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant
tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,
nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
E.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type,
grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and
trim and remain watertight.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 3
F.
Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
G.
Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted
joints.
H.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.
I.
Asphalt Roofing Cement:
application.
2.5
A.
MANUFACTURED REGLETS
Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure
interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing
indicated with factory-mitered and -welded corners and junctions and with interlocking
counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet.
1.
2.
2.6
A.
General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown
and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions,
geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet
metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
3.
Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges
folded back to form hems.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed
fasteners on faces exposed to view.
Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
1.
2.
C.
Material: Stainless steel, 0.019 inch (0.48 mm) thick. Aluminum, 0.024 inch (0.61
mm) thick.
Finish: Mill.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
1.
2.
B.
ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for
Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25
mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to
provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal
standard.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 4
D.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
E.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal
standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
F.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed,
form seams, and solder.
G.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended
use.
H.
Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams
and seal with epoxy seam sealer.
2.7
ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet
tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-)
long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter brackets and gutter spacers and straps fabricated
from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with
thickness not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansionjoint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters.
B.
Downspouts: Fabricate round downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with
mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and
anchors.
1.
Fabricate from the following materials:
a.
2.8
A.
LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long sections. Furnish with 6-inch- (150mm-) wide, joint cover plates.
1.
Fabricate from the Following Materials:
a.
B.
Aluminum: 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick.
Aluminum: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) thick.
Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot(3.6-m-) long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with
continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners, fasten
and seal watertight.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 5
1.
Fabricate from the Following Materials:
a.
C.
Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
D.
A.
Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.
WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-)
long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long, sections, under copings, and at shelf
angles. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches (150
mm) beyond each side of wall openings; and form with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end dams.
Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
B.
Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch (0.48 mm) thick.
Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
2.9
Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
F.
Aluminum: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) thick.
Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
E.
Aluminum: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) thick.
Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.
Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, and similar flashings to
extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch(50-mm-) high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
2.
Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.
Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use
of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to
shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).
B.
Synthetic Underlayment: Install synthetic underlayment, wrinkle free, according to
manufacturers' written instructions, and using adhesive where possible to minimize use of
mechanical fasteners under sheet metal.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 6
C.
3.2
A.
Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free.
Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
Comply with
temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for
installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with
end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between
courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps and edges
with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work
securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners,
solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as
required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts
pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent
separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
1.
2.
C.
Coat concealed side of stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with
bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or
cementitious construction.
Underlayment:
Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on
cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints within 24 inches (600
mm) of corner or intersection.
1.
2.
D.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide
uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before
fabricating sheet metal.
Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Attach each cleat with at
least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of
buckling and tool marks.
Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25
mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.
Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 11/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 7
E.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate
to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for
a tight installation.
F.
Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Prepare joints and apply sealants to
comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
G.
Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin
edges of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm); however, reduce pretinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
H.
3.3
Do not solder aluminum sheet.
Do not use torches for soldering.
Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely.
Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for stainless
steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and
soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning
and neutralization.
Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.
ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage
system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate
installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.
B.
Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints. Provide for thermal
expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide end
closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.
1.
2.
Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet
(15.24 m) apart. Install expansion-joint caps.
Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, removable
for cleaning gutters.
C.
Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide hangers
with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and
bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c.
D.
Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low-slope roofs. Set in asphalt
roofing cement or elastomeric sealant compatible with the substrate.
E.
Parapet Scuppers: Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal
flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing
membrane.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 8
F.
Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall, with elevation of conductor head rim at
minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) below scupper discharge.
G.
Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration
indicated. Lap joints minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) in direction of water flow.
3.4
ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements,
sheet metal manufacturer’s written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal
standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels,
and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and
weather resistant.
B.
Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to
recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock
bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate.
C.
Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in
cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with
top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over
base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
E.
Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base
flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing.
Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints
minimum of 4 inches (100 mm).
F.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with
installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and
clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.
3.5
WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate
installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows,
doors, and louvers.
B.
Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Section 042000
"Unit Masonry."
C.
Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."
D.
Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, and similar
flashings to extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 9
3.6
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B.
Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
C.
Clean off excess sealants.
D.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and
trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
END OF SECTION 076200
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 10
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Roof hatches.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For roof accessories.
C.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.3
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
METAL MATERIALS
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet:
designation.
1.
B.
Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish; AAMA 621; system
consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70
percent PVDF resin by weight.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), manufacturer's standard alloy for finish
required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.
1.
C.
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish; AAMA 620; system
consisting of primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70
percent PVDF resin by weight.
Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), manufacturer's standard
alloy and temper for type of use, finished to match assembly where used, otherwise mill
finished.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 1
D.
Stainless-Steel Sheet and Shapes: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
E.
Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M
unless otherwise indicated.
2.2
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and
other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
B.
Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for
aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or
chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.
C.
Fasteners:
Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for
application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of
material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed
fasteners.
D.
Sealants: As recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated.
2.3
ROOF HATCH
A.
Roof Hatches: Metal roof-hatch units with lids and insulated double-walled curbs, welded
or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing
and weathertight perimeter gasketing, integral metal cant, and integrally formed deckmounting flange at perimeter bottom.
B.
Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 30 by 36 inches (750 by 900 mm).
C.
Loads: Minimum 40-lbf/sq. ft. (1.9-kPa) external live load and 20-lbf/sq. ft. (0.95-kPa)
internal uplift load.
D.
Hatch Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.079 inch (2.01 mm) thick.
1.
2.
E.
Hatch Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.090 inch (2.28 mm) thick.
1.
2.
F.
Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Construction:
1.
2.
Insulation: Cellulosic-fiber, glass-fiber or polyisocyanurate board.
Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard
metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 2
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
Hatch Lid: Glazed, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard
metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid.
Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as metal curb.
On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof
profile.
Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches (300 mm) unless otherwise
indicated.
Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with
perimeter curb height that is tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top
surfaces of perimeter curb are level. Equip hatch with water diverter or cricket on
side that obstructs water flow.
Hardware: Galvanized-steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge
system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.
1.
2.
Provide two-point latch on lids larger than 84 inches (2130 mm).
Provide remote-control operation.
PART 3 PART 4 - EXECUTION
4.1
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. Install roof accessories
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping,
jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated
loads.
Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling,
leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals.
Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals
from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces
with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer.
1.
2.
Coat concealed side of roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact
with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or
install a course of polyethylene sheet.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 3
C.
4.2
Seal joints with sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.
REPAIR AND CLEANING
A.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing according to ASTM A 780.
B.
Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting
according to Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
C.
Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully
repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 077200
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 4
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Silicone joint sealants.
Latex joint sealants.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.
C.
Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
Joint-sealant formulation.
Joint-sealant color.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product test reports.
B.
Preconstruction compatibility and adhesion test reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS, GENERAL
VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the
weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1.
2.
3.
B.
Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
Low-Emitting Interior Sealants:
Sealants and sealant primers used inside the
weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 1
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C.
Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements
indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing
ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint
substrates.
1.
Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints
that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone
testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized
water, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to
porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to
ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
E.
Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in
repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
2.2
A.
SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
Mildew-Resistant, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
A.
Type: Single component (S).
Grade: Nonsag (NS).
Class: 25.
Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic (NT).
LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
Latex Joint Sealant:
Grade NF.
1.
2.
Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one
of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
[product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or
designation> or comparable product by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
BASF Building Systems.
Bostik, Inc.
May National Associates, Inc.
Pecora Corporation.
Schnee-Morehead, Inc.
Tremco Incorporated.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 2
2.4
JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any
of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint
application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise
contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
B.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
2.5
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for
adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PREPARATION
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means
that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with
adhesion of joint sealants.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer
or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to
areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer
with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by
such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 3
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of
joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
B.
Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1.
2.
3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application and replace them with dry materials.
C.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.
D.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same
time backings are installed:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below
to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to
ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1.
2.
3.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that
do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
F.
Acoustical Sealant Installation: Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written
recommendations.
G.
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint
sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.3
A.
JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic
surfaces.
1.
Joint Locations:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 4
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Joint Sealant: Silicone.
Joint Sealant: Urethane.
Joint Sealant: Preformed foam.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
Joint-Sealant Application:
surfaces.
1.
f.
2.
3.
Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic
Joint Locations:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
Joints between metal panels.
Joints between different materials listed above.
Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and
windows.
Control and expansion joints in ceilings.
Other joints as indicated.
Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
Tile control and expansion joints.
Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of walls and partitions.
Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors
and windows.
Other joints as indicated.
Joint Sealant: Latex.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and
horizontal non-traffic surfaces.
1.
Joint Sealant Location:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.
Other joints as indicated.
Joint Sealant: Silicone.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
END OF SECTION 079200
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 5
SECTION 081114 – FIBERGLASS ENTRY DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Four-panel fiberglass factory primed smooth finish exterior entry doors with wood
frames for field painting.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, thicknesses,
preparations for hardware, and other details.
C.
Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference
numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
MATERIALS
Insulation: Foamed in-place polyurethane insulation CFC free, density 2-0 pcf minor, K
factor of 0.15. Therma-True Smooth Start entry door, 4-panel square top S960, or
approved equal.
FIBERGLASS ENTRY DOORS
General:
1.
2.
Design: Embossed four-panel, as indicated.
Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard polyurethane core.
a.
3.
B.
Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: R-value of not less than 6.0 deg F x h x sq.
ft./Btu (1.057 K x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363.
Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Machinable kiln dried pine or hardwood.
Exterior Doors: Face sheets, 1/16” minimum thickness fiberglass reinforced thermoset
composite wood grained, paintable and stainable.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
FIBERGLASS ENTRY DOORS
081114 - 1
a.
Width: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm).
C.
Hardware Reinforcement: Lock edge reinforced with engineered lumber core. Lockset
reinforced with solid blocking for hardware backup.
D.
Gasketing and Weatherstripping: Jacketed thermoset closed cell foam, press fit inkerfs
at frame.
2.3
A.
FABRICATION
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare fiberglass door to receive templated mortised
hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as
specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
1.
2.
2.4
A.
Locate hardware as indicated.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surfacemounted door hardware.
FINISHES
Factory-Applied Finish: Prime finish for field painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Fiberglass Doors: Fit fiberglass entry doors accurately in wood frames, within clearances
specified below. Shim as necessary.
a.
b.
c.
3.2
Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum
3/4 inch (19 mm).
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before
final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and
replace defective work, including work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Finish-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas
of finish coat and apply touchup.
END OF SECTION 081114
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
FIBERGLASS ENTRY DOORS
081114 - 2
SECTION 081115 – METAL SECURITY STORM DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Decorative glazed metal storm doors for rear entry door.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include elevations, hardware and other details.
C.
Schedule: Prepared the supplier, using same reference numbers as the drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL SECURITY STORM DOORS
A.
Frame: Heavy duty 2” steel frame, all welded.
B.
Jamb Frame: 2-bar heavy gauge metal frame with weatherstripping.
C.
Glass: Tempered safety glass.
D.
Decorative Details: Cast aluminum with powder coat finish.
E.
Hardware: Heavy duty mortise lock with 1” throw, Antique Brass. Solid brass strike plate.
F.
Closer: Heavy duty premature closer with adjustable closing speed.
2.2
A.
PRODUCTS
Guardian Security Storm Door #559 “Philadelphian,” or approved equal.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
METAL SECURITY STORM DOORS
081115 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
INSTALLATION
Fit doors accurately in wood door jamb. Shim as necessary.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before
final inspection.
B.
Touchup: Apply touch-up of compatible paint to any damaged or abraded areas.
END OF SECTION 081115
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
METAL SECURITY STORM DOORS
081115 - 2
SECTION 081416 - INTERIOR WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.2
Six-panel hollow-core doors with hardboard or MDF faces.
Shop priming flush wood doors.
Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of
door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware
blocking; and other pertinent data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
1.3
Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
Samples: For factory-finished doors.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody
by an FSC-accredited certification body.
B.
Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural
Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."
C.
Forest Certification: Provide doors made with not less than 70 percent of wood products
obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with
FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
INTERIOR WOOD DOORS
081416 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A.
Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood
products that do not contain urea formaldehyde.
B.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:
1.
C.
Hollow-Core Doors:
1.
2.2
A.
A.
Interior Hollow-Core Doors:
A.
Grade: Custom.
Faces: Medium-density overlay.
Construction: Three plies.
LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES
Metal Louvers:
1.
2.4
Construction: Institutional hollow core. Six-panel face.
DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, factory
primed for paint finish.
FABRICATION
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance
requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
B.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
C.
Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
1.
2.
Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply
with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
INTERIOR WOOD DOORS
081416 - 2
3.
2.5
A.
2.6
Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
SHOP PRIMING
Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime doors with one coat of wood primer specified in
Division 09 Section. Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with primer.
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete
fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not
surface applied, before finishing.
B.
Field finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
B.
Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions
and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1.
C.
Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do
not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated
doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and
mortises after fitting and machining.
1.
Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of
doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor
finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or
scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold
unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E.
Factory-Finished Doors:
required at Project site.
Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is
END OF SECTION 081416
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
INTERIOR WOOD DOORS
081416 - 3
SECTION 085313 - VINYL WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
Section includes vinyl-framed windows.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect
screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing,
and sealant installation.
C.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified, 2 by 4 inches (50 by
100 mm) in size.
D.
Product Schedule: For vinyl windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Product test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
JELD-WEN, Inc. Premium Vinyl Atlantic.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
VINYL WINDOWS
085313 - 1
2.2
A.
WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Product Standard: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
1.
2.
Minimum Performance Class: LC.
Minimum Performance Grade: 35.
B.
Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole-window U-factor of 0.32 Btu/sq. ft.
x h x deg F (1.83 W/sq. m x K).
C.
Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum whole-window SHGC of 0.40.
2.3
VINYL WINDOWS
A.
Operating Types: As indicated on Drawings.
B.
Frames and Sashes:
Impact-resistant,
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
1.
2.
C.
PVC
complying
with
Finish: Integral color, sandstone.
Gypsum Board Returns: Provide at interior face of frame.
Glass: Clear annealed glass, ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.
1.
D.
UV-stabilized
Kind: Fully tempered where indicated on Drawings or required by Code.
Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190.
1.
Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
Tint: Clear.
Kind: Fully tempered where indicated on Drawings or required by Code.
Lites: Two.
Filling: Fill space between glass lites with argon.
Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface.
E.
Glazing System:
weathertight seal.
F.
Hardware, General: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant material sized to
accommodate sash weight and dimensions.
1.
G.
Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces
Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's
full range.
Projected Window Hardware:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
VINYL WINDOWS
085313 - 2
1.
Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Complying with AAMA 901 when tested according to
ASTM E 405, Method A. Provide operators that function without requiring the
removal of interior screens or using screen wickets.
a.
2.
3.
Type and Style: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
types and styles.
Hinges: Manufacturer's standard type for sash weight and size indicated. Provide
egress hinges on windows, where required to meet Code egress.
Single-Handle Locking System: Operates positive-acting arms that pull sash into
locked position. Provide one arm on sashes up to 29 inches (735 mm) tall and two
arms on taller sashes.
H.
Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash
unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware,
anchors, and other components.
1.
Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible.
For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being
fastened.
2.4
ACCESSORIES
2.5
INSECT SCREENS
A.
General: Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Provide screen
for each operable exterior sash. Screen wickets are not permitted.
1.
B.
Aluminum Frames: Complying with SMA 1004 or SMA 1201.
1.
C.
A.
Finish for Interior Screens: Baked-on organic coating in color selected by Architect
from manufacturer's full range.
Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric:
ASTM D 3656.
1.
2.6
Type and Location: Full, inside for project-out sashes.
20-by-20 (0.85-by-0.85-mm) mesh complying with
Mesh Color: Manufacturer's standard.
FABRICATION
Fabricate vinyl windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling
components and anchoring windows. Provide windows that meet Code egress
requirements.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
VINYL WINDOWS
085313 - 3
B.
Glaze vinyl windows in the factory.
C.
Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation.
D.
Provide mullions and cover plates, compatible with window units, complete with anchors
for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and
provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections.
Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window
units. Provide manufacturer's standard finish to match window units.
E.
Mount hardware through double walls of vinyl extrusions or provide corrosion-resistant
reinforcement.
F.
Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the
factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware,
accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not
addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in
ASTM E 2112.
B.
Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, anchored securely in
place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent
construction to produce weathertight construction.
C.
Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather
stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.
D.
Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Remove excess sealants,
glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
E.
Remove and replace sashes if glass has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or
damaged during construction period.
END OF SECTION 085313
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
VINYL WINDOWS
085313 - 4
SECTION 086200 - UNIT SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Manually-operated unit skylights mounted on site-erected curbs.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of unit skylight.
B.
Shop Drawings: For unit skylight work. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
connections to supporting structure and other adjoining work.
C.
Samples: For each type of exposed finish required and each type of glazing.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification data.
B.
Product test reports.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
D.
Sample warranty.
1.4
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
VELUX America Inc.
operation.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
VCM manually-operated skylight with manual gear-driven
UNIT SKYLIGHTS
086200 - 1
2.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Unit Skylight Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions
and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and
fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
B.
Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum U-factor of 0.32 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F
(1.83 W/sq. m x K).
2.3
UNIT SKYLIGHTS
A.
Unit Shape and Size: Rectangular, 22-by-34-inch (1016-by-1220-mm) inside curb.
B.
Insulating Glass: Clear, sealed units that comply with Section 088000 "Glazing," in
manufacturer's standard overall thickness.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Exterior Lite: 6-mm clear, fully tempered glass.
Interior Lite: Laminated glass; two plies of 3-mm clear heat-strengthened glass
with 0.030-inch (0.762-mm) clear polyvinyl butyral interlayer.
Interspace Content: Argon.
Low-Emissivity Coating: Manufacturer's standard.
C.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard.
D.
Condensation Control: Fabricate unit skylights with integral internal gutters and
nonclogging weeps to collect and drain condensation to the exterior.
E.
Thermal Break: Fabricate unit skylights with thermal barrier separating exterior and
interior metal framing.
F.
Fasteners: Same metal as metal being fastened, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other
noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Finish exposed fasteners to
match material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads.
2.4
A.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish:
thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm).
1.
AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
UNIT SKYLIGHTS
086200 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate installation of unit skylight with installation of substrates, vapor retarders, roof
insulation, roofing membrane, and flashing as required to ensure that each element of the
Work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight.
B.
Comply with recommendations in AAMA 1607 and with manufacturer's written instructions
for installing unit skylights.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
After completion of installation and nominal curing of sealant and glazing compounds but
before installation of interior finishes, test for water leaks according to AAMA 501.2.
B.
Perform test for total area of each unit skylight.
C.
Work will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Additional testing and inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.3
A.
CLEANING
Clean exposed unit skylight surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Touch up damaged metal coatings and finishes.
END OF SECTION 086200
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
UNIT SKYLIGHTS
086200 - 3
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section includes:
1.
Mechanical door hardware for the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
1.2
Swinging doors.
Sliding doors.
Folding doors.
Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware.
C.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
D.
Other Action Submittals:
1.
Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer,
detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation
procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors,
frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and
finish of door hardware.
a.
b.
Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door
numbers as in the Contract Documents.
Content: Include the following information:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of
each door and frame.
Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on
floor plans and to door and frame schedule.
Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style,
function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware
product.
Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and
interfaces with other building control systems.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 1
2.
1.3
Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing
Owner's final keying instructions for locks.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and
approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is
available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner
about door hardware and keying.
B.
Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in
providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified
by DHI:
C.
Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply
with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA
Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1.
2.
Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of
the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).
Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
a.
b.
3.
4.
1.4
A.
Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular
to door.
Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch.
Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not
more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.
Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the
door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the
latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package
service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
Provide door hardware for each door as scheduled on Drawings to comply with
requirements in this Section.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 2
1.
2.
B.
Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Schedule"
Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
1.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and
products complying with BHMA designations referenced.
Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
References to BHMA Designations: Provide products complying with these
designations and requirements for description, quality, and function.
HINGES
Hinges: BHMA A156.1.
MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying
with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip
extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.
1.
2.
Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended
by manufacturer.
Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
B.
Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000.
C.
Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Operational Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or
brass parts; Series 1000.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS
Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) throw; designed for
mortising into door edge.
LOCK CYLINDERS
Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel
silver.
1.
B.
Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locking devices.
Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of
construction keys without cylinder removal.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 3
C.
2.6
A.
2.7
A.
2.8
A.
2.9
A.
2.10
A.
2.11
A.
2.12
A.
2.13
A.
Construction Cores:
cores.
Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent
OPERATING TRIM
Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; nickel, unless otherwise indicated.
MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS
Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16; polished cast brass, base metal.
DOOR GASKETING
Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; air leakage not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774
cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested
according to ASTM E 283; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable
and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
THRESHOLDS
Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.
SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE
Sliding Door Hardware: BHMA A156.14; consisting of complete sets including rails,
hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated.
FOLDING DOOR HARDWARE
General: BHMA A156.14; complete sets including overhead rails, hangers, supports,
bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated.
METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick
brass; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners.
FABRICATION
Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with
commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 4
fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to
match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
2.14
Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is
closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use
through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed
unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through
bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each
through bolt.
Fasteners for Wood Doors:
Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2,
"Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors."
Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and
elsewhere as indicated.
FINISHES
A.
Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Steel Door: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors according to
ANSI/SDI A250.6.
B.
Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement
Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."
C.
Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following
unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1.
2.
D.
Standard Steel Doors: ANSI/SDI A250.8.
Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware
for Wood Flush Doors."
Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later
to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of
surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not
install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1.
Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce
attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 5
2.
Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners.
Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
E.
Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer
than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge
for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other
equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.
F.
Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during
construction period.
1.
2.
Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner.
Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.
G.
Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control
system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.
H.
Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of
sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
I.
Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door
hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.
J.
Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
K.
Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.
L.
Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
M.
Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted
to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of
heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility
requirements.
3.2
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Contractor to engage a qualified
independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare
inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 087100
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DOOR HARDWARE
087100 - 6
SECTION 092116.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes: Gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each component of gypsum board shaft wall assembly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies:
For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of
assemblies tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a
testing and inspecting agency.
C.
Low-Emitting Materials: Gypsum shaft wall assemblies shall comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice
for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
2.2
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
A.
Fire-Resistance Rating: 2 hours.
B.
STC Rating: 51, minimum.
C.
Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members,
and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.
1.
2.
D.
Depth: As indicated.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm).
Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with manufacturer's standard
long-leg length, but at least 2 inches (51 mm) long and matching studs in depth.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
092116.23 - 1
1.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs, 0.021 inch (0.53 mm).
E.
Firestop Tracks: Provide firestop track at head of shaft wall on each floor level.
F.
Room-Side Finish: Gypsum board.
G.
Shaft-Side Finish: Gypsum shaftliner board, Type X.
H.
Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets.
2.3
PANEL PRODUCTS
A.
Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in
each area and that correspond with support system indicated.
B.
Gypsum Shaftliner Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; manufacturer's proprietary
fire-resistive liner panels with paper faces.
1.
2.
C.
2.4
Thickness: 1 inch (25.4 mm).
Long Edges: Double bevel.
Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board."
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
A.
Recycled Content of Steel: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
recycled content not less than twenty-five (25) percent.
B.
Steel Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal.
C.
Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and
contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistancerated assembly indicated.
2.5
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
Trim Accessories: Material and shapes as specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board"
that comply with gypsum board shaft wall assembly manufacturer's written
recommendations for application indicated.
B.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand
loading conditions.
D.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: As specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board."
E.
Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board."
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
092116.23 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated,
manufacturer's written installation instructions, and ASTM C 754 other than stud-spacing
requirements.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or
mold damaged.
C.
Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Patch or replace sprayed fire-resistive materials
removed or damaged during installation of shaft wall assemblies. After application,
remove only to extent necessary for installation of gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.
D.
Building Expansion Joints: Frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other
support.
E.
Install supplementary framing around openings and as required for blocking, bracing,
and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, handrails, and similar
items.
F.
Penetrations: Install supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration behind
boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and
similar items.
G.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure, while maintaining continuity of
fire-rated construction.
H.
Firestop Tracks: Install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.
I.
Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaft wall
assemblies.
J.
Sound-Rated Shaft Wall Assemblies: Seal with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each
assembly and at joints and penetrations.
K.
Cant Panels: At projections into shaft exceeding 4 inches (102 mm), install 1/2- or 5/8inch- (13- or 16-mm-) thick gypsum board cants covering tops of projections.
L.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more
than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
M.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
END OF SECTION 092116.23
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
092116.23 - 3
SECTION 092400 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Exterior Portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath and unit masonry.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints and
accessories including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and
attachments to other work.
C.
Samples: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide Portland cement plaster assemblies
identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
B.
Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) in surface
area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1.
1.4
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
of Substantial Completion.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.
B.
Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for
environmental conditions for applying finishes.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
METAL LATH
Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip
galvanized zinc coating.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Paper Backing: FS UU-B-790, Type I, Grade D, Style 2 vapor-permeable paper.
1.
2.2
Recycled Content: Provide steel products with average recycled content such that
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is
not less than twenty-five (25) percent.
Diamond-Mesh Lath: Flat, 2.5 lb/sq. yd. (1.4 kg/sq. m).
Flat Rib Lath: Rib depth of not more than 1/8 inch (3.1 mm), 2.75 lb/sq. yd. (1.5
kg/sq. m).
Provide paper-backed lath unless otherwise indicated.
ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with
thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
B.
Metal Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.3
Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet,
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) zinc coating.
Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hotdip galvanized zinc coating.
External-Corner Reinforcement:
Fabricated from metal lath with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.
Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; squareedged style; with expanded flanges.
Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piecetype, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with
perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.
Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; folded
pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of
damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.
B.
Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm)
long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in Portland cement plaster.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400 - 2
C.
Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.
D.
Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as
required by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for
application; in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of no
fewer than three exposed threads.
E.
Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063.
F.
Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch
(1.21-mm) diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4
PLASTER MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
B.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type N.
C.
Plastic Cement: ASTM C 1328.
D.
Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S.
E.
Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.
F.
Perlite Aggregate: ASTM C 35.
G.
Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings:
Factory-mixed acrylic-emulsion coating systems,
formulated with colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over Portland
cement plaster base coats. Senergy “Senerflex” stucco wall systems or approved equal.
Include manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylic-based
finishes.
1.
2.5
A.
PLASTER MIXES
General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.
1.
B.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. (Four (4) different
color combinations of two (2) colors each).
Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least
two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber
quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. (0.6 kg of fiber/cu. m) of
cementitious materials.
Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath:
plasterwork as follows:
1.
Scratch and brown coats for three-coat
Portland Cement Mixes:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400 - 3
a.
b.
2.
Masonry Cement Mixes:
a.
b.
3.
b.
b.
Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1 part
Portland cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious
material.
Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1 part
Portland cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious
material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat.
Base-Coat Mixes: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Scratch Coat: 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
Brown Coat: 1 part plastic cement and 3 to 5 parts aggregate, but not less
than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat.
Portland and Plastic Cement Mixes:
a.
C.
Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and 1
part masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of
cementitious material.
Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and 1
part masonry cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious
material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat.
Plastic Cement Mixes:
a.
b.
5.
Scratch Coat: 1 part masonry cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
Brown Coat: 1 part masonry cement and 3 to 5 parts aggregate, but not less
than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat.
Portland and Masonry Cement Mixes:
a.
4.
Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and 3/4
to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious
material
Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and 3/4
to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious
material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat.
Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and 0
to 3/4 part lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland
cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of
cementitious material.
Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
Base-Coat Mixes: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400 - 4
1.
2.
3.
E.
Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part Portland cement and
3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious
material.
Masonry Cement Mix: Use 1 part masonry cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes:
manufacturer's written instructions.
For acrylic-based finish coatings, comply with
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful
effects caused by plastering.
B.
Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction
capability required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for
design designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.
INSTALLING METAL LATH
Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.
Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.
Curved-Ceiling Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.
On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring, diamond-mesh lath.
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
A.
Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.
B.
Reinforcement for External Corners:
1.
C.
Install lath-type, external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations.
Control Joints: Install control joints in specific locations approved by Architect for visual
effect as follows:
1.
As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum
sizes:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400 - 5
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.5
Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft. (13.4 sq. m).
Horizontal and other Non-vertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m).
At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet (5.5 m) o.c.
As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios
of not greater than 2-1/2:1.
Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster.
Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped
areas (panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the
dimension change.
PLASTER APPLICATION
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 926.
B.
Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry plaster bases.
C.
Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat
plasterwork, on masonry; 3/4-inch (19-mm) thickness.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Ceilings; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for threecoat plasterwork; 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Portland cement mixes.
Masonry cement mixes.
Portland and masonry cement mixes.
Plastic cement mixes.
Portland and plastic cement mixes.
Walls; Base-Coat Mix: Scratch coat for two-coat plasterwork, 3/8 inch (10 mm) thick on
concrete masonry.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Portland cement mixes.
Masonry cement mixes.
Portland and masonry cement mixes.
Plastic cement mixes.
Portland and plastic cement mixes.
Portland cement mixes.
Masonry cement mixes.
Portland and masonry cement mixes.
Plastic cement mixes.
Portland and plastic cement mixes.
Ceilings; Base-Coat Mix: Scratch coat for two-coat plasterwork, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick on
concrete.
1.
2.
Portland cement mixes.
Masonry cement mixes.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400 - 6
3.
4.
5.
Portland and masonry cement mixes.
Plastic cement mixes.
Portland and plastic cement mixes.
G.
Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide float (fine) finish to match Architect's sample.
H.
Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, and
sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6
A.
PLASTER REPAIRS
Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check
cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to
substrate has failed.
END OF SECTION 092400
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092400 - 7
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
Interior gypsum board.
Tile backing panels.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies:
For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified
according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2
A.
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
B.
Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
C.
Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
Long Edges: Tapered.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
Long Edges: Tapered.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moistureand mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.
1.
2.
Core: 5/8 inch (12.7 mm), regular type or 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 1
3.
D.
Glass-Mat Interior Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1658/C 1658M.
laminated to both sides. Specifically designed for interior use.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
A.
A.
2.5
Core: 5/8 inch (12.7 mm), regular type or 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.
Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's
standard edges.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (12.7 mm).
Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
B.
Core: 5/8 inch (12.7 mm), regular type.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's
standard edges.
1.
2.
2.4
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paperfaced galvanized steel sheet.
Aluminum Trim: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
With fiberglass mat
TILE BACKING PANELS
1.
2.
B.
Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 2
2.6
A.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering
gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
1.
2.
Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of fifty (50) g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Laminating adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
B.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).
D.
Acoustical Joint Sealant: ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound
transmission through perimeter joints and openings as demonstrated by testing
according to ASTM E 90.
E.
Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
F.
Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and
mold damaged.
C.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at
these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal
joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
D.
Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners
used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific
locations approved by Architect for visual effect.
E.
Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
F.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated
as not intended to receive tape.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 3
G.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
1.
2.
3.
Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
a.
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior
Painting."
H.
Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly
remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or
otherwise damaged during drywall application.
I.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
END OF SECTION 092900
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 4
SECTION 093000 – CERAMIC TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Ceramic tile floor and wall tile in kitchens and bathrooms.
Stone thresholds.
Tile backing panels.
Metal edge strips.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
A.
Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
Assembled samples, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and
for each color and finish required.
Stone thresholds in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
2.
3.
Build mockup of floor tile installation.
Build mockup of wall tile installation.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time
of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TILE PRODUCTS
A.
ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1
for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
B.
FloorScore Compliance: Tile for floors shall comply with requirements of FloorScore
Standard.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CERAMIC TILING
093000 - 1
C.
Tile Type CT-1: Factory-mounted glazed ceramic mosaic tile for bathroom floors, and
kitchen counter backsplash.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
D.
Composition: Porcelain.
Module Size: 2 by 2 inches (50.8 by 50.8 mm).
Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm).
Face: Plain with cushion edges.
Surface: Smooth, without abrasive admixture.
Finish: Mat, opaque glaze.
Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where
applicable. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard
shapes:
Tile Type CT-2: Glazed wall tile in bathrooms.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.
Module Size: 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches (108 by 108 mm).
Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm).
Face: Plain with modified square edges or cushion edges.
Finish: Bright, opaque glaze.
Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where
applicable. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard
shapes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
E.
American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.
Base: Coved, module size 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches (108 by 108 mm).
Wainscot Cap: Bullnose cap, module size 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches (108 by 108
mm).
External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Bullnose shape, same size
as adjoining flat tile.
Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners.
Ceramic Tile Type CT-3: Unglazed porcelain tile for kitchen floor.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Daltile Cliff Point
Color Body Porcelain tile, 12”x12”x3/8”.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CERAMIC TILING
093000 - 2
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
F.
Accessories: Provide vitreous china accessories of type and size indicated, suitable for
installing by same method as adjoining wall tile.
1.
2.
3.
2.2
A.
General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition
between adjacent floor finishes.
A.
Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch
(1.5 mm) above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of
threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less above adjacent
floor surface.
Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503, with a minimum abrasion resistance of ten (10) per
ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish.
1.
2.3
One soap holder for each shower and tub indicated.
One paper holder at each water closet.
Color and Finish: Match adjoining glazed wall tile.
THRESHOLDS
1.
B.
Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency.
Face Size: 18”x18”.
Face Size Variation: Rectified.
Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.5mm).
Face: Plain with square edges.
Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42.
Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full
range.
Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where
applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as
follows, selected from manufacturer’s standard shapes.
Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining.
TILE BACKING PANELS
Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
2.
USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CERAMIC TILING
093000 - 3
B.
Fiber-Cement Underlayment: ASTM C 1288.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
2.
2.4
A.
Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
SETTING MATERIALS
Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1.
1.
B.
CertainTeed Corp. James Hardie; Hardiebacker.
For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.
1.
2.
3.
Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added.
Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive.
For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
C.
Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3.
D.
Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I.
2.5
GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10.
B.
Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.
C.
Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.
1.
2.
D.
2.6
A.
Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.
Polymer Type: Liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.
Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3.
ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;
Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated
with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous
substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme
temperatures.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CERAMIC TILING
093000 - 4
B.
2.7
Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P;
Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cementbased formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for
installations indicated.
B.
Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, stainless steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposededge material.
C.
Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints and that
does not change color or appearance of grout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of installed tile.
1.
3.2
Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other
substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness
tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
PREPARATION
A.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with
adhesives or thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically
recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.
B.
Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced
mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward
drains.
C.
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at
Project site before installing.
D.
Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to
prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with
continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile
surfaces.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CERAMIC TILING
093000 - 5
3.3
A.
INSTALLATION
Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods
specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series
"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation
methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and
grouting materials used.
1.
For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile
installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:
a.
b.
Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger.
Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.
B.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form
complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work
neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in
items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and
other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D.
Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile
edges.
E.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and
center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to
minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths
unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:
1.
2.
Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
G.
Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions
indicated.
H.
Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including
control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation
of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1.
2.
Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly
above them.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200
"Joint Sealants."
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CERAMIC TILING
093000 - 6
I.
Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor
unless otherwise indicated.
1.
At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above
adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-Portland cement mortar (thin set).
J.
Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or
other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile or where exposed edge of tile flooring
meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no
threshold is indicated.
K.
Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer
manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints,
remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
L.
Install cementitious backer units and fiber-cement underlayment and treat joints
according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application
indicated. Use latex-Portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise
directed in manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4
A.
INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:
1.
Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F115; thinset mortar; epoxy grout.
a.
b.
B.
Interior Floor Installations, Wood Subfloor:
1.
Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F144; thinset mortar on cementitious backer units
or fiber-cement backer board.
a.
b.
C.
Thinset Mortar: Latex Portland cement mortar.
Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.
Interior Wall Installations, Wood Studs or Furring:
1.
Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F thinset mortar on
cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board.
a.
b.
D.
Thinset Mortar: Latex Portland cement mortar
Grout: Standard unsanded cement.
Thinset Mortar: Latex Portland cement mortar.
Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.
Bathtub Wall Installations, Wood Studs or Furring:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CERAMIC TILING
093000 - 7
1.
Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA B412; thinset mortar on cemetitious backer units or
fiber-cement backer board.
a.
b.
Thinset Mortar: Latex Portland cement mortar.
Grout: Standard unsanded cement grout.
END OF SECTION 093000
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CERAMIC TILING
093000 - 8
SECTION 096400 - WOOD FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
Section includes solid wood strip flooring in living areas, as indicated in drawings and
schedules.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each type of wood flooring and accessory.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Hardwood Flooring: Comply with NOFMA's "Official Flooring Grading Rules" for species,
grade, and cut.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Conditioning period begins not less than seven days before wood flooring installation, is
continuous through installation, and continues not less than seven days after wood
flooring installation.
1.
2.
Environmental Conditioning: Maintain an ambient temperature between 65 and 75
deg F (18 and 24 deg C) and relative humidity planned for building occupants in
spaces to receive wood flooring during the conditioning period.
Wood Flooring Conditioning: Move wood flooring into spaces where it will be
installed, no later than the beginning of the conditioning period.
a.
b.
Do not install flooring until it adjusts to relative humidity of, and is at same
temperature as, space where it is to be installed.
Open sealed packages to allow wood flooring to acclimatize immediately on
moving flooring into spaces in which it will be installed.
B.
After conditioning period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for
building occupants.
C.
Install factory-finished wood flooring after other finishing operations, including painting,
have been completed.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WOOD FLOORING
096400 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
FloorScore Compliance:
Standard.
Wood floors shall comply with requirements of FloorScore
WOOD FLOORING
A.
Certified Wood: Provide wood flooring produced from wood obtained from forests
certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC
Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
B.
Solid-Wood Flooring: Kiln dried to 6 to 9 percent maximum moisture content, tongue and
groove and end matched, and with backs channeled.
1.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.3
A.
Species and Grade: No. 1 Common red oak or No. 2 Common red oak.
Cut: Plain sawn.
Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
Face Width: 3-1/4 inches.
Lengths: Manufacturer’s standard.
Finishing: Factory.
FACTORY FINISHING
Finish: UV urethane.
1.
2.4
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Color: As selected by Architect in manufacturer's full range.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, polyethylene sheet not less than 6.0 mils (0.15 mm) thick.
B.
Asphalt-Saturated Felt: ASTM D 4869, Type II.
C.
Wood Flooring Adhesive: Mastic recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers
for application indicated.
1.
Adhesive shall have a VOC content of not more than 100 g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WOOD FLOORING
096400 - 2
D.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation approved by wood flooring manufacturer.
E.
Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer, but not less than that recommended in
NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring."
F.
Thresholds and Saddles: To match wood flooring. Tapered on each side.
G.
Reducer Strips: To match wood flooring. 2 inches (51 mm) wide, tapered, and in
thickness required to match height of flooring.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PREPARATION
Concrete Slabs: Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions
are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft.,
and perform no fewer than two tests in each installation area and with test areas
evenly spaced in installation areas.
a.
B.
Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only
after substrates pass testing.
Concrete Slabs: Grind high spots and fill low spots to produce a maximum 1/8-inch (3mm) deviation in any direction when checked with a 10-foot (3-m) straight edge.
1.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's
written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
C.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances on substrates that
are incompatible with installation adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone,
using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D.
Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation.
After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with flooring manufacturer's written installation instructions, but not less than
applicable recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring."
B.
Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of flooring of
not less than 1/2 inch.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WOOD FLOORING
096400 - 3
C.
Vapor Retarder: Comply with NOFMA's "Installing Hardwood Flooring" for vapor retarder
installation and the following:
1.
2.
3.3
A.
Wood Flooring Nailed to Wood Subfloor: Install flooring over a layer of asphaltsaturated felt.
Wood Flooring Installed Directly on Concrete: Install a layer of polyethylene sheet
according to flooring manufacturer's written instructions.
PROTECTION
Protect installed wood flooring during remainder of construction period with covering of
heavy kraft paper or other suitable material. Do not use plastic sheet or film that might
cause condensation.
END OF SECTION 096400
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WOOD FLOORING
096400 - 4
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Resilient base.
Resilient molding accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples
but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and
pattern required.
1.3
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to
receive resilient products.
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended
by manufacturer.
C.
Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
RESILIENT BASE
Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber,
thermoplastic).
Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous).
Style: Cove (base with toe).
Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096513 - 1
C.
Height: 4 inches (102 mm).
D.
Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
E.
Outside Corners: Job formed.
F.
Inside Corners: Job formed.
G.
Finish: Satin.
H.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
2.2
RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
A.
Description: Carpet bar for tackless installation, carpet edge for glue-down applications,
nosing for carpet, nosing for resilient floor covering, reducer strip for resilient floor
covering, joiner for tile and carpet, and transition strips.
B.
Material: Vinyl.
C.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.3
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based
or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer
for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products
and substrate conditions indicated.
1.
Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a.
b.
C.
Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required
to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running
joints.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096513 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C.
Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they
are to be installed.
1.
D.
3.2
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be
installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately
before installation.
RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B.
Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces,
and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C.
Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with
tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
D.
Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E.
Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
3.3
RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B.
Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet resilient floor
covering that would otherwise be exposed.
3.4
A.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient
products.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096513 - 3
B.
Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair
treads before applying liquid floor polish.
1.
C.
Apply two coat(s).
Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096513
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096513 - 4
SECTION 096516 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Vinyl sheet floor covering, without backing.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch (150-by-230mm) sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required.
1.3
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
As determined by testing identical products
according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
1.4
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to
receive floor coverings.
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended
by manufacturer.
C.
Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
D.
Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
E.
Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
096516 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VINYL SHEET FLOOR COVERING
A.
Unbacked Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering: ASTM F 1913, 0.080 inch (2.0 mm) thick.
Mannington “Lifelines” II, or approved equal.
B.
Wearing Surface: Smooth.
C.
Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer.
D.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.2
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based
or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer
for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor covering
and substrate conditions indicated.
1.
C.
Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of
floor coverings.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with
installation only after substrates pass testing.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
096516 - 2
C.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D.
Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to
be installed.
1.
E.
3.2
Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be
installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before
installation.
FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings.
B.
Unroll floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
C.
Lay out floor coverings as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction.
Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at
least 6 inches (152 mm) away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates.
Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.
Avoid cross seams.
D.
Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent
fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E.
Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent marking device.
G.
Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate
to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at
joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.3
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor
covering.
B.
Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor covering
before applying liquid floor polish.
1.
Apply one coat.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
096516 - 3
C.
Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096516
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
096516 - 4
SECTION 096516.01 – VINYL PLANK FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
Section includes vinyl wood grain plank flooring.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified in
manufacturer's standard size, but not less than a full strip sections.
1.3
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient flooring, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
2.2
A.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
VINYL PLANK FLOORING
Products:
1.
Mannington Mills “Natures Path”.
Lock Solid, Plank.
B.
Product Standard: ASTM F 1913.
C.
Thickness: .100 inch. Wear layer .020 inches.
D.
Wearing Surface: Smooth.
E.
Plank Width: 3”.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
VINYL PLANK FLOORING
096516.01 - 1
F.
2.3
Colors and Patterns: Wood grain appearance. As selected by Architect from full range of
industry colors.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based
or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by vinyl plank
flooring manufacturer for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers
to suit vinyl plank flooring and substrate conditions indicated.
C.
Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient
sheet flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to vinyl plank flooring manufacturer's written instructions to
ensure adhesion of resilient sheet flooring. Install on underlayment as recommended by
the manufacturer.
B.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C.
Do not install vinyl plank flooring until it is the same temperature as the space where it is
to be installed.
D.
Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by
vinyl plank flooring.
3.2
VINYL PLANK FLOORING INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient sheet flooring.
B.
Layout vinyl plank flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
C.
Layout vinyl plank flooring as follows:
1.
Maintain uniformity of flooring direction.
D.
Scribe and cut vinyl plank flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent
fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E.
Extend vinyl plank flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
VINYL PLANK FLOORING
096516.01 - 2
F.
3.3
Adhere vinyl plank flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to
substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and
puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface
imperfections.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting vinyl plank
flooring.
B.
Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from flooring surfaces before
applying liquid floor polish.
1.
C.
Apply one (1) coat.
Cover resilient sheet flooring until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096516.01
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
VINYL PLANK FLOORING
096516.01 - 3
SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Vinyl composition floor tile.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
LEED Submittals:
1.
Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC
content.
C.
Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns,
doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
D.
Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.
E.
Maintenance data.
1.3
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
As determined by testing identical products
according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
1.4
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to
receive floor tile.
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended
by manufacturer.
C.
Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D.
Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
096519 - 1
E.
Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.;
Congoleum Corporation;
Mannington Mills, Inc.
B.
Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.
C.
Wearing Surface: Smooth.
D.
Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
E.
Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).
F.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.2
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based
or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer
for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and
substrate conditions indicated.
1.
Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a.
b.
C.
VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PREPARATION
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
096519 - 2
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
C.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D.
Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be
installed.
1.
E.
3.2
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be
installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately
before installation.
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B.
Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to
avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1.
C.
Lay tiles square with room axis in pattern indicated.
Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same
sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked,
chipped, or deformed tiles.
1.
Lay tiles with grain running in one direction in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.
D.
Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent
fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E.
Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend
floor tiles to center of door openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
096519 - 3
G.
3.3
Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to
substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and
puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface
imperfections.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.
B.
Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile
surfaces before applying liquid floor polish.
1.
C.
Apply one (1) coat.
Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096519
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
096519 - 4
SECTION 096816 - SHEET CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
This Section includes tufted carpet and carpet cushion.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each color and texture required.
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
Carpet: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample.
Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long
Samples.
Carpet Cushion: 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Sample.
Product Schedule: For carpet and carpet cushion. Use same designations indicated on
Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering
Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program
requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and
Section 7.12, "Ventilation."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
TUFTED CARPET
Manufacturer/Product: Shaw Contract Design Series V.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHEET CARPETING
096816 - 1
B.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C.
Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6, 6.
D.
Pile Characteristic: Tufted.
E.
Face Weight: 30 oz./sq. yd.
F.
Total Weight: 64 oz./sq. yd. for finished carpet.
G.
Primary Backing: Manufacturer's standard material.
H.
Secondary Backing: Manufacturer's standard material.
I.
Backcoating: Manufacturer's standard material.
J.
Width: 12 feet (3.7 m).
K.
Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.
L.
Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.
M.
Performance Characteristics: As follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.2
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf (445 N) per ASTM D 2646.
Tuft Bind: Not less than 5 lbf (22 N) per ASTM D 1335.
Delamination: Not less than 3.5 lbf/in. (15 N/mm) per ASTM D 3936.
Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC 24.
Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC 165.
Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 AFU (AATCC fading units) per
AATCC 16, Option E.
Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive
bacteria; not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria; no fungal
growth; per AATCC 174.
Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV per AATCC 134.
Environmental Requirements: Provide carpet that complies with testing and
product requirements of Carpet and Rug Institute's "Green Label Plus" program.
CARPET CUSHION
A.
Traffic Classification: CCC Class I, moderate traffic.
B.
Fiber Cushion: Rubberized jute, mothproofed and sterilized.
1.
C.
Thickness: 1/2 inches (mm) plus 5 percent maximum.
Performance Characteristics: As follows:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHEET CARPETING
096816 - 2
1.
2.
2.3
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
Environmental Requirements: Provide carpet cushion that complies with testing
and product requirements of Carpet and Rug Institute's "Green Label" program.
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided or recommended by carpet and carpet cushion manufacturer
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and
subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed
carpet and is recommended or provided by [carpet manufacturer] [carpet and carpet
cushion manufacturers].
1.
VOC Limits: Provide adhesives with VOC content not more than 50g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24).
C.
Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood, in strips as required to match
cushion thickness and that comply with CRI 104, Section 12.2.
D.
Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet
manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form
secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with CRI 104 and carpet and carpet cushion manufacturers' written installation
instructions for the following:
1.
Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down
Installation." (handicap accessible units only)
2.
Stretch-in Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Stretch-in Installation."
3.
Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 13, "Carpet on Stairs" for stretch-in
installation.
B.
Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and
direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways,
center seams under the door in closed position.
C.
Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,
removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
D.
Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
END OF SECTION 096816
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHEET CARPETING
096816 - 3
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SHEET CARPETING
096816 - 4
SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the
following exterior substrates:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.2
Concrete masonry units (CMU).
Steel.
Galvanized metal.
Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
Wood.
Plastic trim fabrications.
Exterior Portland cement (stucco).
Fiber cement siding.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.
C.
Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
1.3
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
MPI Standards:
1.
2.
B.
Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved
Products List."
Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and
finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application
of each paint system specified in Part 3.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 1
a.
b.
2.
Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9
sq. m).
Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
a.
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark
samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to
Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PAINT, GENERAL
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
B.
2.2
A.
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
BLOCK FILLERS
Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.
1.
2.3
A.
Bonding Primer (Water Based): MPI #17.
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
Bonding Primer (Solvent Based): MPI #69.
1.
C.
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
PRIMERS/SEALERS
1.
B.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in
paint system indicated.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 2
2.4
A.
METAL PRIMERS
Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.
1.
B.
Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134.
1.
2.
C.
A.
Exterior Latex Wood Primer: MPI #6.
A.
A.
Exterior Latex (Gloss): MPI #119 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60
deg).
A.
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
EXTERIOR ALKYD PAINTS
Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Gloss): MPI #9 (Gloss Level 6).
1.
2.8
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS
1.
2.7
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
Exterior Alkyd Wood Primer: MPI #5.
1.
2.6
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
WOOD PRIMERS
1.
B.
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 1.
Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95.
1.
2.5
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
VOC Content: E Range of E1.
TEXTURED AND HIGH-BUILD COATINGS
Latex Stucco and Masonry Textured Coating: MPI #42.
1.
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance
of work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture
meter as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Concrete: 12 percent.
Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
Wood: 15 percent.
Plaster: 12 percent.
Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D.
Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
1.
3.2
Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates
and conditions.
PREPARATION AND APPLICATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems
indicated.
B.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil,
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as
required to produce paint systems indicated.
C.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp
lines and color breaks.
D.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
E.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 4
3.3
A.
EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
Steel Substrates:
1.
Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.
a.
b.
c.
B.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1.
C.
Latex System: MPI EXT 5.3A.
Aluminum Substrates:
1.
Latex System: MPI EXT 5.4H.
a.
b.
c.
D.
Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum.
Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Exterior latex (gloss).
Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork doors.
1.
Latex System: MPI EXT 6.3L.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer.
Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Exterior latex (gloss).
Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI EXT 6.3A.
a.
b.
c.
E.
Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (gloss).
Prime Coat: Exterior alkyd wood primer.
Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Exterior latex (gloss).
Wood Panel Substrates: Including siding fascias soffits.
1.
Latex System: MPI EXT 6.4K.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer.
Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Exterior latex (flat) (gloss) as indicated.
Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI EXT 6.4G.
a.
b.
c.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Prime Coat: Exterior alkyd wood primer.
Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Exterior latex (flat) (gloss) as indicated.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 5
F.
Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates:
1.
Latex System: MPI EXT 6.8A.
a.
b.
c.
G.
Prime Coat: Bonding primer (water based).
Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Exterior latex (gloss).
Stucco Substrates:
1.
Latex System: MPI EXT 9.1A.
a.
b.
c.
Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Exterior latex (flat).
END OF SECTION 099113
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXTERIOR PAINTING
099113 - 6
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the
following interior substrates:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.2
Concrete.
Concrete masonry units (CMU).
Steel.
Galvanized metal.
Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
Wood.
Gypsum board.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.
C.
Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
1.3
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
MPI Standards:
1.
2.
B.
Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved
Products List."
Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and
finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application
of each paint system specified in Part 3.
a.
b.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 1
2.
3.
Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental
services have been activated.
Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
a.
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark
samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to
Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PAINT, GENERAL
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
B.
VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply
with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do
not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
C.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than
250 g/L.
Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
Flat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than
250 g/L.
Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.
Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.
Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L.
Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC content of not more than 400 g/L.
Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC content of not more than 340 g/L.
Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: VOC content of not more than 420 g/L.
Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat
paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with
the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and
coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 2
1.
2.
Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent
by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one
or more benzene rings).
Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
2.2
A.
BLOCK FILLERS
Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.
1.
2.3
A.
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
PRIMERS/SEALERS
Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.
1.
2.
B.
Acrolein.
Acrylonitrile.
Antimony.
Benzene.
Butyl benzyl phthalate.
Cadmium.
Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
Di-n-butyl phthalate.
Di-n-octyl phthalate.
1,2-dichlorobenzene.
Diethyl phthalate.
Dimethyl phthalate.
Ethylbenzene.
Formaldehyde.
Hexavalent chromium.
Isophorone.
Lead.
Mercury.
Methyl ethyl ketone.
Methyl isobutyl ketone.
Methylene chloride.
Naphthalene.
Toluene (methylbenzene).
1,1,1-trichloroethane.
Vinyl chloride.
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.
Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in
paint systems indicated.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 3
2.4
A.
METAL PRIMERS
Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.
1.
B.
Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134.
1.
2.
C.
A.
A.
Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.
Interior Latex (Flat): MPI #53 (Gloss Level 1).
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.
Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5).
1.
2.
D.
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.
Interior Latex (Satin): MPI #43 (Gloss Level 4).
1.
2.
C.
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.
LATEX PAINTS
1.
2.
B.
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
WOOD PRIMERS
1.
2.
2.6
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95.
1.
2.5
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.
Vinyl Wash Primer: MPI #80.
1.
D.
VOC Content: E Range of [E1] [E2].
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.
Interior Latex (Gloss): MPI #114 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60
deg).
1.
2.
VOC Content: E Range of E2.
Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance
of work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture
meter as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Concrete: 12 percent.
Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
Wood: 15 percent.
Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
Plaster: 12 percent.
C.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D.
Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
1.
3.2
Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates
and conditions.
PREPARATION AND APPLICATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil,
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as
required to produce paint systems indicated.
C.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp
lines and color breaks.
D.
Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and
occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Mechanical Work:
a.
b.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Uninsulated metal piping.
Uninsulated plastic piping.
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 5
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Pipe hangers and supports.
Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air
inlets and outlets.
Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation
covering or other paintable jacket material.
Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for
field painting.
Electrical Work:
a.
b.
c.
Switchgear.
Panelboards.
Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
painting.
E.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
F.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.3
A.
INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
Concrete Substrates, Non-traffic Surfaces:
1.
Latex System: MPI INT 3.1E.
a.
b.
c.
B.
CMU Substrates:
1.
Latex System: MPI INT 4.2A.
a.
b.
c.
C.
Prime Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Interior latex (flat).
Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler.
Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Interior latex (flat).
Steel Substrates:
1.
Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q.
a.
b.
c.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Interior latex (gloss).
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 6
D.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1.
Latex Over Waterborne Primer System: MPI INT 5.3J.
a.
b.
c.
E.
Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:
1.
Latex System: MPI INT 5.4H.
a.
b.
c.
F.
Latex System: MPI INT 6.3T.
a.
b.
c.
Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer.
Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Interior latex (semi-gloss).
Wood Panel Substrates: Including painted plywood hardboard.
1.
Latex System: MPI INT 6.4R.
a.
b.
c.
H.
Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum.
Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Interior latex (gloss).
Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork doors.
1.
G.
Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer.
Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Interior latex (gloss).
Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer.
Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Interior latex (semi-gloss).
Gypsum Board Substrates:
1.
Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A.
a.
b.
c.
Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.
Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Interior latex (flat).
END OF SECTION 099123
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
INTERIOR PAINTING
099123 - 7
SECTION 101419 - DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Cutout dimensional characters.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: For dimensional letter signs.
1.
2.
3.
Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.
Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided
by others, and accessories.
Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least
half size.
C.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
D.
Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign
schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS
Cutout Characters: Characters with uniform faces; square-cut, smooth, eased edges;
precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Character Material: Sheet or plate aluminum or stainless steel.
Character Height: As indicated.
Thickness: .50 inch.
Finishes:
a.
b.
5.
Integral Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized.
Integral Stainless-Steel Finish: No. 4.
Mounting: As indicated or countersunk flathead through fasteners.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
101419 - 1
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
DIMENSIONAL CHARACTER MATERIALS
Stainless-Steel Sheet: Type 304.
ACCESSORIES
Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of
signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the
following:
1.
2.
3.
Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.
For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel devices unless otherwise indicated.
Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:
a.
4.
Sign Mounting Fasteners:
a.
b.
c.
B.
2.4
A.
Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless
otherwise indicated.
Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to
back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into
tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise
indicated.
Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to
back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into
tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise
indicated.
Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type
of head indicated, installed in predrilled holes.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
FABRICATION
General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to
resist water penetration and retention.
Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are
inconspicuous.
Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to
attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed
fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
101419 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
General:
Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with
sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.
Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris
that would impair installation.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of
bituminous paint.
Mounting Methods:
1.
Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on
back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.
a.
b.
2.
Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on
back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.
a.
b.
3.
C.
Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for
displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface,
embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until
adhesive fully sets.
Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install
washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and
tighten.
Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for
displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and
push until spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the
stud ends in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully
sets.
Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with
spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts
on stud ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.
Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as
template. Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to
surface. Install through fasteners and tighten.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.
END OF SECTION 101419
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
101419 - 3
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
101419 - 4
SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Private-use bathroom accessories.
Underlavatory guards for accessible unit.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room
of each accessory required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PRIVATE-USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES
Toilet Tissue Dispenser:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Shower Curtain Rod:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Outside Diameter: 1 inch (25.4 mm).
Mounting: Flanges with exposed fasteners.
Rod Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Flange Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Soap Dish:
1.
2.
D.
Description: Single-roll dispenser.
Mounting: Surface mounted.
Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch- (114- or 127-mm-) diameter tissue rolls.
Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Mounting: Surface mounted.
Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Medicine Cabinet:
1.
Mounting: Recessed, for nominal 4-inch (100-mm) wall depth and surface
mounted where recessed not feasible.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
102800 - 1
2.
3.
4.
5.
Size: 18 by 24 inches (460 by 610 mm).
Door: Framed mirror door concealing storage cabinet equipped with continuous
hinge and spring-buffered, rod-type stop and magnetic door catch.
Shelves: Three, adjustable.
Material and Finish:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
Robe Hook:
1.
2.
E.
A.
Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Towel Bar:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Description: Double-prong unit.
Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Toothbrush and Tumbler Holder:
1.
F.
Cabinet: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Mirror Frame: Stainless steel #4 finish.
Door: Stainless steel #4 finish back, mirror glass front.
Shelves: Glass.
Description: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) round tube with circular end brackets.
Mounting: Flanges with exposed fasteners.
Length: 24 inches (610 mm). Two (2) per bathroom.
Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
Underlavatory Guard:
1.
2.
Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that
prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without
removing coverings.
Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners
appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units
level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
102800 - 2
B.
Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested
according to ASTM F 446.
END OF SECTION 102800
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
102800 - 3
SECTION 106710 – WIRE CLOSET SHELVING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
Vinyl-coated ventilated closet shelf and rod system for coat closets, bedroom closets,
linen closets, pantries, and laundry closets.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 09260 – Gypsum Board Assemblies.
B.
Section 06110 – Wood Framing.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. Include similar
Samples of accessories involving color selection.
B.
Samples for Verification: For the following components, of size indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Posts: 12 inches (305 mm) long.
Shelves: Full size, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) wide by 12 inches (305
mm) deep.
Shelf-to-Post Connectors: Full size.
Required Accessories.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency for each type of metal storage
shelving.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: ClosetMaid, Shelf and Rod System, Model 7300, 12” shelf
depth, or a comparable product.
B.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WIRE CLOSET SHELVING SYSTEM
106710 - 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
ClosetMaid.
Elixir Industries
Schulte
Substitutions: Under provisions of Contract Documents.
C.
Colors: Provide manufacturer’s standard colors as shown or scheduled. If no color
indicated, provide white.
D.
Provide all storage shelving from a single manufacturer.
1.
2.
2.2
Thickness: 9 to 11 mils (0.229 to 0.279 mm).
Classification: No ingredients listed as hazardous per OSHA 29CFR1910.0017.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Wire Shelving with Integral Waterfall Clothes Rod: Coated steel wire, 1/2 to 1 inch (13 to
25 mm) incremental cross-deck spacings.
B.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Wall Clips.
End Brackets.
Support Brackets.
Standards.
Shelf Brackets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Verification of Conditions:
1.
2.
B.
Prepared spaces are sized and located in accordance with drawings.
Framing, reinforcement, and anchoring devices are correct type and are located in
accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.
Installer’s Examination
1.
2.
3.
Examine conditions under which installation is to be performed; submit written
notification if such conditions are unacceptable.
Installation activities before unacceptable conditions have been corrected is
prohibited.
Installation indicates installer’s acceptance of conditions.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WIRE CLOSET SHELVING SYSTEM
106710 - 2
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Provide the following shelving at each location identified.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Coat Closet: Continuous shelf with integral clothes hanger rod.
Bedroom Closet: Continuous shelf with integral clothes hanger rod.
Linen Closet: Five (5) continuous shelves, equally spaced.
Pantry Closet: Five (5) continuous shelves, equally spaced.
Laundry Closet: Two (2) continuous shelves above washer/dryer.
B.
Cut shelves1/2 inch to 1-3/8 inches (12.7 to 35 mm) shorter than actual wall
measurements; cap all exposed ends.
C.
Install shelving plumb and level at heights indicated in accordance with shop drawings
and manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.
D.
Place wall clips No. 910, 911 every 10 to 12 inches (250 to 300 mm) on level line.
E.
Install end brackets No. 972, 973, and 974 on same level line as wall clips, centered on
the front rods of shelves. Support shelves 36 inches (915 mm) maximum with end
brackets, support brackets, or poles.
F.
Drill holes where required using sharp bit; do not punch.
G.
Drywall: Drill 1/4 inch (6 mm) hole, insert No. 910 or 911 wall clip. Use No. 8 pin to
expand anchor.
H.
Wood: Drill1/4 inch (6 mm) hole into wood, secure wall clip with No. 8 x 1 inch (25 mm)
screw or secure pole clip no. 978 directly to wood with No. 8 x 1-1/4 inch (31 mm)
screws.
I.
Standards and Brackets:
1.
2.
3.
Install standards vertically every 16 inches (400 mm) on studs.
Install horizontal tracks level, secured with screws or mollies in studs or drywall; use
hanging adapters to connect wall standards for hanging.
Attach shelf brackets with Shelf and Rod 12-inch (300 mm) or 16-inch decking.
J.
Use lighting pole clip No. 978 for linen shelving, clip No. 977 for shelf and rod shelving.
K.
Shelf Supports:
1.
2.
3.
Place shelf support brackets No. 1164 or 1166 vertically to the shelf, attach with No.
954 or 975 wall anchors.
Install down clips No. 983/977 or cable clips No. 312 with ¼ inch (6 mm) anchor on
the back rod behind every support bracket.
24 inches (600 mm) o.c. maximum.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WIRE CLOSET SHELVING SYSTEM
106710 - 3
L.
Attach No. 977 or 978 pole clips at same elevations as wall clips for a given shelf; use
with No. 117 or 118 poles.
M.
Use No. 120 corner support brackets on all corner “butt” joints.
N.
For wall to wall installation, use lighting end bracket No. 972 or 973; drill 1/4 inch (6 mm)
holes, and secure with No. 8 pins.
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
As work proceeds, maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools,
equipment, surplus materials, and debris related to this work.
B.
Upon completion of installation, clean all surfaces that have become soiled during
installation.
C.
Verify that shelves adjust easily and properly.
D.
Touch up marred finishes or replace metal storage shelving that cannot be restored to
factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or
furnished by metal storage shelving manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 106710
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WIRE CLOSET SHELVING SYSTEM
106710 - 4
SECTION 113100 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
Cooking appliances.
Kitchen exhaust ventilation.
Refrigeration appliances.
Cleaning appliances.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product certificates.
B.
Field quality-control reports.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer
for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
RANGES
Electric Range: Freestanding range with one (1) oven and complying with AHAM ER-1.
Self-cleaning oven.
1.
Electric Burner Elements: Four (4), induction-type burners.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
113100 - 1
2.
3.
B.
2.2
A.
Anti-Tip Device: Manufacturer's standard.
Material: Stainless steel with manufacturer's standard ceramic-glass cooktop.
Provide front controls for accessible unit.
KITCHEN EXHAUST VENTILATION
Overhead Exhaust Hood:
1.
2.
Type: Wall-mounted, exhaust-hood system.
Exhaust Fan: Built into hood and with manufacturer's standard 150 cfm min.
capacity.
a.
3.
2.3
A.
Finish: Stainless steel.
REFRIGERATOR/FREEZERS
Refrigerator/Freezer:
Two-door, side-by-side refrigerator/freezer and Two-door
refrigerator/freezer with freezer on top for accessible unit and complying with AHAM HRF1.
1.
2.
Type: Freestanding.
Storage Capacity:
a.
b.
3.
4.
5.
A.
Refrigeration Compartment Volume: 15.6 cu. ft. (0.44 cu. m).
Freezer Volume: 5.13 cu. ft. (0.15 cu. m).
General Features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.4
Venting: Vented to outside through wall.
Dispenser in door for ice and cold water.
Interior light in refrigeration compartment.
Automatic defrost.
Interior light in freezer compartment.
Automatic icemaker and storage bin.
Energy Performance, ENERGY STAR: Provide appliances that qualify for the
EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program.
Front Panel(s): Stainless steel.
DISHWASHERS
Dishwasher: Complying with AHAM DW-1 and ASSE 1006.
1.
Type: Built-in undercounter.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
113100 - 2
2.
3.
2.5
A.
CLOTHES WASHERS AND DRYERS
Clothes Washer: Complying with ASSE 1007.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Energy Performance, ENERGY STAR: Provide appliances that qualify for the
EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program.
Front Panel: Stainless steel.
Type: Freestanding front-loading unit.
Capacity: 2.7 cu. ft. (0.08 cu. m).
Agitator: Impeller (without spindle).
Energy Performance, ENERGY STAR: Provide appliances that qualify for the
EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program.
Water-Efficient Clothes Washer: Provide clothes washer with modified energy
factor greater than or equal to 2.0 and water factor less than 5.5.
Appliance Finish: Porcelain enamel on top and lid; baked enamel on front and
sides.
Front-Panel Finish: Porcelain enamel.
Clothes Dryer: Complying with AHAM HLD-1.
1.
2.
3.
Type: Freestanding, frontloading, electric unit.
Capacity: 5.7 cu. ft. (0.16 cu. m).
Features:
a.
4.
5.
Interior drum light.
Appliance Finish: Porcelain enamel on top and lid; baked enamel on front and
sides.
Front-Panel Finish: Porcelain enamel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with
concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and that
rough openings are completely concealed.
B.
Freestanding Equipment:
completed in each area.
equipment.
C.
Range Anti-Tip Device:
instructions.
D.
Utilities: Comply with plumbing and electrical requirements.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Place units in final locations after finishes have been
Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate
Install at each range according to manufacturer's written
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
113100 - 3
3.2
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including
connections, and to assist in testing.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
113100 - 4
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each appliance
according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify compliance with
each manufacturer's appliance-performance parameters.
Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks
exist.
Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and components.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 113100
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
113100 - 5
SECTION 122113 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
1.2
Horizontal louver blinds with polymer slats.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver blinds.
C.
Samples: For each exposed finish.
1.3
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Product Standard: Provide horizontal louver blinds complying with WCSC A 100.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, POLYMER SLATS
Slats: Lead-free, UV-stabilized, integrally colored, opaque, permanently flexible, extruded
PVC that will not crack or yellow; antistatic, dust-repellent treated; with manufacturer's
standard profile.
1.
Width: 1 inches (25 mm).
2.
Finish: Painted color as indicated.
B.
Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully
enclosing operating mechanisms on three sides and ends.
C.
Bottom Rail: Manufacturers standard.
D.
Ladders: Manufacturer's standard-width cloth tapes. Evenly spaced to prevent long-term
slat sag.
1.
Tape Color, Texture, and Pattern: Color, texture, and pattern as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #120054
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
122113 - 1
E.
Tilt Control: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism and linkage rod.
F.
Lift Operation: Manual.
G.
Valance: Manufacturer's standard.
H.
Mounting: End mounting.
I.
Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard, as indicated.
J.
Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
2.2
A.
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION
Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.
1.
B.
Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts.
Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows:
1.
Blind Units Installed between (inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch (6 mm) per
side or 1/2 inch (13 mm) total, plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm), less than jamb-tojamb dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4
inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm), less than head-to-sill dimension of
opening in which each blind is installed.
C.
Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for
supporting headrail, valance, and operating hardware, and for hardware position and
blind mounting method indicated.
D.
Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal
noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to
supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal
use.
E.
Color-Coated Finish:
1.
F.
Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked
finish.
Component Color: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and exposed-to-view metal and plastic
matching or coordinating with slat color, unless otherwise indicated.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #120054
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
122113 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions
affecting performance.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according
to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so exterior slat edges in any position
are not closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to interior face of glass. Install intermediate support
as required to prevent deflection in headrail. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds
and for operating glazed opening's operation hardware if any.
B.
Flush Mounted: Install horizontal louver blinds with slat edges flush with finish face of
opening if slats are tilted open.
C.
Jamb Mounted: Install headrail flush with face of opening jamb and head.
D.
Head Mounted: Install headrail on face of opening head.
E.
Recessed: Install headrail concealed within blind pocket.
F.
Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free of binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
G.
Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
END OF SECTION 122113
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #120054
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
122113 - 3
SECTION 123530 - RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes kitchen and vanity cabinets.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
A.
Section 123623.13 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops."
Section 123661 "Simulated Stone Countertops."
Section 123640 “Stone Countertops."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
Cabinets.
Cabinet hardware.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show
materials, finishes, filler panels, and hardware.
C.
Samples: For cabinet finishes and hardware.
1.3
A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Product Certificates: For casework.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Manufacturer: Armstrong “Trevant” or approved equal.
B.
Quality Standard: Provide cabinets that comply with KCMA A161.1.
1.
C.
KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in
a semi-exposed location of each unit and showing compliance with the above
standard.
Face Style: Flush overlay.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
123530 - 1
D.
Cabinet Style: Face frame.
E.
Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid-wood stiles and rails, 3/4 inch (16 mm) thick, with 1/4inch- (19-mm-) thick, veneer-faced plywood or solid-wood center panels.
F.
Face Frames: 3/4-by-1-5/8-inch (19-by-41-mm) solid wood with glued mortise and tenon
or doweled joints.
G.
Exposed Cabinet End Finish: Wood veneer.
2.2
A.
CABINET MATERIALS
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Adhesives and Composite Wood: Do not use products that contain urea
formaldehyde.
Hardwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content.
Softwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 10 percent moisture content.
Hardwood Plywood:
HPVA HP-1; made with adhesive containing no urea
formaldehyde.
Exposed Materials:
1.
Exposed Wood Species: Maple.
a.
b.
2.
3.
C.
Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, free of defects.
Plywood: Hardwood plywood with face veneer of species indicated, with Grade A
faces and Grade C backs of same species as faces.
Semi-exposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1.
2.
D.
Select materials for compatible color and grain. Do not use two adjacent
exposed surfaces that are noticeably dissimilar in color, grain, figure, or
natural character markings.
Staining and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Solid Wood: Sound hardwood lumber, selected to eliminate appearance defects.
Same species as exposed surfaces or stained to be compatible with exposed
surfaces.
Plywood: Hardwood plywood with Grade C faces and not less than Grade 3 backs
of same species as faces. Face veneers of same species as exposed surfaces or
stained to be compatible with exposed surfaces.
Concealed Materials: Solid wood or plywood, of any hardwood or softwood species, with
no defects affecting strength or utility; particleboard; MDF; or hardboard.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
123530 - 2
2.3
CABINET HARDWARE
A.
General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, size, style,
material, and finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B.
Pulls: Wire pulls. Stainless steel. Provide UFAS compliant pulls for accessible unit.
C.
Hinges: Concealed European-style, self-closing hinges.
D.
Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent
rebound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying
with BHMA A156.9, Type B05011 or Type B05091.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed
shims. Where cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide
filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match cabinet face.
B.
Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit the openings, are aligned, and
are uniformly spaced. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated.
C.
Install cabinets level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m).
D.
Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing.
1.
3.2
A.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more
than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than
1-1/2-inch (38-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and
operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended
by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 123530
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
123530 - 3
SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
Section includes plastic-laminate countertops.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products and high-pressure
decorative laminate.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, largescale details, attachment devices, and other components.
C.
Samples:
1.
1.3
A.
1.4
Plastic laminates, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program
certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
1.5
A.
FIELD CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install countertops until building is enclosed,
wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and
relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS
123623.13 - 1
1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements.
1.
Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that
countertops, including installation, comply with requirements of grades specified.
B.
Grade: Premium.
C.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
b.
D.
Formica Corporation.
Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and
textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1.
As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range in the following categories:
a.
Patterns, matte finish.
E.
Edge Treatment: Lumber edge for transparent finish matching wood species and stain
on cabinet surfaces.
F.
Core Material at Sinks: Exterior-grade plywood.
G.
Core Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
1.
2.2
A.
WOOD MATERIALS
Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality
standard unless otherwise indicated.
1.
B.
Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) at front, back, and ends with
additional layers of core material laminated to top.
Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products:
Provide materials that comply with
requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade
specified unless otherwise indicated.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS
123623.13 - 2
1
2.3
A.
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and
end overhang of 1 inch (25 mm) over base cabinets.
B.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment
to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and
fitting.
C.
Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive appliances, plumbing fixtures,
electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of
cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
1.
Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
PREPARATION
Before installation, condition countertops to average prevailing humidity conditions in
installation areas.
INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B.
Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not
completed in the shop.
1.
2.
C.
Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items.
Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish.
Field Jointing: Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and
edge surfaces is not required.
1.
Secure field joints in plastic-laminate countertops with concealed clamping devices
located within 6 inches (150 mm) of front and back edges and at intervals not
exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Tighten according to manufacturer's written
instructions to exert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS
123623.13 - 3
1
D.
Install countertops level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed
shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
E.
Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair
damaged finish at cuts.
F.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or
other supports into underside of countertop.
1.
2.
3.
Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag,
bow, or other variation from a straight line.
Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm)
o.c. and to walls with adhesive.
Seal junctures of tops, splashes, and walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or
another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop
material manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 123623.13
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS
123623.13 - 4
1
SECTION 123661 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Cultured marble countertops and backsplashes in bathrooms.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks.
B.
Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash
profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
C.
Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
CULTURED MARBLE COUNTERTOPS
Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.2
Front: No drip (raised marine edge with rolled front).
Backsplash: Coved, with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) radius cove and top.
Endsplash: Matching backsplash.
Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with integral sink bowls and backsplashes.
COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A.
Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged,
touch sanded.
B.
Adhesives: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C.
Cultured Marble: Gel-coated solid fabrication of filled plastic resin complying with
ANSI Z124.3, Type 4, with precoated finish, and not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
123661 - 1
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a.
2.
Rynone Manufacturing Corp.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of
countertop. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop,
form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints
smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
END OF SECTION 123661
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
123661 - 2
SECTION 142600 - LIMITED-USE/LIMITED-APPLICATION ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
Section includes limited-use/limited-application (LU/LA) elevators.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features,
finishes, and similar information. Include Product Data for car enclosures, hoistway
entrances, and operation, control, and signal equipment.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
C.
1.3
Include plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at
each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure,
relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment.
Indicate loads imposed on building structure at points of support and power
requirements.
Samples: For exposed finishes.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Seismic Qualification Certificates:
components, from manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
For elevator equipment, accessories, and
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
C.
Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit,
and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service,
as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator being provided.
D.
Preinstallation Examination Report: Indicating dimensional discrepancies and conditions
detrimental to performance or indicating that dimensions and conditions were found to be
satisfactory.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
LIMITED-USE/LIMITED-APPLICATION ELEVATORS
142600 - 1
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
B.
Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits:
authorities having jurisdiction, for normal, unrestricted elevator use.
As required by
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
2.2
ThyssenKrupp Access, LEV Signet Home Elevator or approved equal.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
B.
Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 408 in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with
ICC A117.1.
C.
Seismic Performance: Elevator system shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and shall comply with elevator safety requirements
for seismic risk Zone 2 or greater in ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
1.
2.
2.3
A.
SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS
Elevator System, General: Manufacturer's standard LU/LA elevator. Unless otherwise
indicated, manufacturers' standard components shall be used, as included in standard
LU/LA elevators and as required for complete system.
1.
2.
B.
Affected peak velocity acceleration Av for Project's location is greater than or equal
to 0.10, but less than 0.20 (seismic risk Zone 2).
Provide earthquake equipment required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
Rated Load: 950 lb.
Rated Speed: 40 fpm.
Machine Type: Hydraulic, holeless, beside the car; direct-acting hydraulic roped
hydraulic or chain drive.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
LIMITED-USE/LIMITED-APPLICATION ELEVATORS
142600 - 2
C.
Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between
no load and full load and with minimum pulsations.
1.
2.
3.
D.
2.4
Pump shall be submersible type, suspended inside oil tank from vibration isolation
mounts.
Motor shall have solid-state starting.
System shall have hydraulic silencer and flexible piping connectors at pump unit.
Hydraulic Fluid: Elevator manufacturer's standard fluid.
OPERATION SYSTEMS
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard operation system for single automatic
operation.
B.
Battery-Powered Lowering: When power fails, car is lowered to the lowest floor, opens its
car and hoistway doors, and shuts down. System includes rechargeable battery and
automatic recharging system.
C.
Emergency Operation: None required.
2.5
CAR ENCLOSURES
A.
General: Provide steel-framed car enclosures with wall panels, car roof, access doors,
power door operators, and ventilation. Provide finished car including materials and
finishes specified below.
B.
Clear Inside Dimensions:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Inside Width: 36 inches (915 mm) from sidewall to sidewall.
Inside Depth: 48 inches (1219 mm) from back wall to front wall (return panels).
Inside Height: 84 inches (2134 mm) to underside of ceiling.
Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Floor Finish: Elevator manufacturer's standard level-loop nylon carpet; color as
selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Enameled-Steel Wall Panels: Flush construction; fabricated from cold-rolled steel
sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel or powder-coat finish; colors as
selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to manufacturer's
standard core with plastic-laminate panel backing and manufacturer's standard
protective edge trim. Plastic-laminate color, texture, and pattern as selected by
Architect from elevator manufacturer's full range.
Metal Ceiling: Flush panels, fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide panels
with factory-applied enamel or powder-coat finish; colors as selected by Architect
from manufacturer's full range.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
LIMITED-USE/LIMITED-APPLICATION ELEVATORS
142600 - 3
5.
6.
D.
Car Doors: Manufacturer's standard units.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.6
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard door-and-frame hoistway entrances.
Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self-supporting frames
with reinforced head sections.
Materials and Fabrication: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:
1.
2.
D.
Operation: Manual.
Type: Side hinged.
Coordinate frame size and profile with hoistway wall construction.
1.
C.
Operation: Manual.
Type: [Horizontal sliding] [Horizontally operated, folding].
Clear Opening Width: 32 inches (815 mm).
Door Height: 80 inches (2032 mm).
Plastic-Laminate Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated by laminating
plastic laminate to exposed faces of enameled cold-rolled steel doors and covering
edges with protective edge trim. Plastic-laminate color, texture, and pattern as
selected by Architect from elevator manufacturer's full range.
Aluminum Folding Doors: Aluminum extrusions with edges forming full-height
hinges connected by stainless-steel rod.
HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
1.
2.
B.
Lighting: Not less than two incandescent downlights. Provide battery backup
power source with automatic charging.
Handrail: Manufacturer's standard.
Enameled-Steel Frames: Formed from cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. Provide with
factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's
full range.
Plastic-Laminate Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated by laminating
plastic laminate to exposed faces of enameled cold-rolled steel doors and covering
edges with protective edge trim. Plastic-laminate color, texture, and pattern as
selected by Architect from elevator manufacturer's full range.
Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies shall comply with
NFPA 80 and be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction based on testing at as-close-to-neutral pressure as
possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.
1.
Fire-Protection Rating: 1 hour.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
LIMITED-USE/LIMITED-APPLICATION ELEVATORS
142600 - 4
2.7
A.
SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit
until call has been fulfilled.
1.
B.
Finish: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
Car-Control Stations:
indicated.
1.
2.
Mount in side panel adjacent to car door unless otherwise
Mark buttons and switches for function. Use both tactile symbols and Braille.
Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car-control station, either integral with carcontrol station or mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by
authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Emergency Communication System: Two-way voice communication system, with visible
signal, which dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and does not require
handset use. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification,
instructions for use, and battery backup power supply.
D.
Car Position Indicator: Provide digital-type position indicator in elevator car. Also,
provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing
each of the floors served. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car-control
station.
E.
Hall Push-Button Stations:
Provide manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units,
equipped with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating desired direction of travel
where applicable.
F.
Hall Lanterns:
landings.
G.
Hall Annunciator: Provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel.
H.
Emergency Signs: Fabricate from materials matching hall push-button stations, with text
and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide one sign at each hall
push-button station unless otherwise indicated.
2.8
Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal
FINISH MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed,
matte finish.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.
C.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.
D.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 22, Alloy 6063.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
LIMITED-USE/LIMITED-APPLICATION ELEVATORS
142600 - 5
E.
Plastic Laminate:
Type HGL.
High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS or
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install cylinder plumb and accurately located for elevator car position and travel. Anchor
securely in place, supported at pit floor and braced at intervals as needed to maintain
alignment. Anchor cylinder guides at spacing needed to maintain alignment and avoid
overstressing guides.
B.
Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts to
minimize vibration transmission to structure and structure-borne noise from elevator
system.
C.
Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers.
D.
Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator
guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Reduce clearances to minimum,
safe, workable dimension at each landing.
E.
Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel.
F.
Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing.
G.
Locate hall lanterns either above or beside hoistway entrance at a minimum of 72 inches
above finished floor unless hall lanterns are built into entrance frames.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting elevator
use, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1/CSA B44
and by authorities having jurisdiction.
MAINTENANCE
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service
shall include twelve (12) months' full maintenance by skilled employees of elevator
Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or
defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator
operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and
supplies.
END OF SECTION 142600
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
LIMITED-USE/LIMITED-APPLICATION ELEVATORS
142600 - 6
SECTION 223400 - GAS-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following Energy Star rated gas-fired water heaters:
1.
Residential, high efficiency, Energy Star-rated direct vent, gas water heaters.
2.
Water heater accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B.
Source quality-control test reports.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water
heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section
"Product Requirements."
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
D.
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.12004.
E.
Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9" for all components that will be in contact with potable water.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GAS-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
223400 - 1
1.5
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components of fuel-fired water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Structural failures including storage tank and supports.
Faulty operation of controls.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
use.
Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:
a.
Residential, Gas Water Heaters:
1)
2)
b.
Storage Tank: Ten years.
Controls and Other Components: Ten years.
Compression Tanks: One year(s).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Residential, High-Efficiency, Energy Star Rated, Gas Water Heaters:
ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3.
1.
2.
Comply with
Available Manufacturers:
a.
Bradford White Corporation.
b.
Ruud Water Heater Div.; Rheem Manufacturing Company.
c.
Smith, A. O. Water Products Company.
Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 150-psig working-pressure
rating.
a.
Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank.
tappings to tank before testing.
1)
2)
b.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Attach
NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for
steel and stainless-steel flanges, and according to ASME B16.24 for
copper and copper-alloy flanges.
Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank
linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
GAS-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
223400 - 2
c.
3.
Factory-Installed, Storage-Tank Appurtenances:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.
Dip Tube: Provide unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.
Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005.
Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Surround entire storage tank
except connections and controls.
Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.
Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.
Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great
as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater workingpressure rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into
storage tank.
Burner or Heat Exchanger: Comply with UL 795 or approved testing agency
requirements for high-efficiency water heaters and for natural-gas fuel.
Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.
Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or
systems.
Building Automation System Interface: Normally closed dry contacts for enabling
and disabling water heater.
Draft Hood: Draft diverter; complying with ANSI Z21.12
Capacity and Characteristics:
a.
2.2
Lining: Glass complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank
linings, including extending lining into and through tank fittings and outlets.
See Schedule on drawings.
WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A.
Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CGA 9.1, manually operated. Furnish for installation in
piping.
B.
Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18, appliance type. Include pressure rating,
capacity, and pressure differential required between gas supply and water heater.
C.
Gas Automatic Valves: ANSI Z21.21, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic
valve.
D.
Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least
as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater workingpressure rating. Select each relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage
tank.
1.
E.
Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.
Pressure Relief Valves: Include pressure setting less than working-pressure rating of
water heater.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GAS-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
223400 - 3
1.
Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.
F.
Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel
bracket for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water.
G.
Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet
piping arrangement for multiple-unit installation. Include piping and valves for field
assembly that is capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced flow
through each water heater.
H.
Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 or ASHRAE 90.2-2004.
2.3
arrangement
according
to
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test and inspect water heater storage tanks, specified to be ASME-code construction,
according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
B.
Prepare test reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A.
Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units
so controls and devices needing service are accessible.
B.
Install gas water heaters according to NFPA 54.
C.
Install gas shutoff valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters without shutoff valves.
D.
Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas water heaters without gas pressure
regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner.
E.
Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters, if required for
operation of safety control.
F.
Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open
drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for
water heaters that do not have tank drains.
G.
Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters.
H.
Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks
without integral or fitting-type heat traps.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GAS-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
223400 - 4
I.
3.2
Fill water heaters with water.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping
for easy removal of water heaters.
B.
Ground equipment.
C.
Connect to existing wiring.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,
including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks
exist.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper
operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as
specified above.
END OF SECTION 223400
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GAS-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
223400 - 5
SECTION 223401 – GAS-FIRED INSTANTANEOUS HIGH-EFFICIENCY
TANKLESS HOT WATER HEATER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
This section includes Energy Star rated high-efficiency condensing tankless water
heaters.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated include rated capacities,
operating characteristics.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data.
C.
Warranty: Minimum 12-year warranty on heat exchanger.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
High-efficiency direct vent condensing tankless gas water heater designed for continuous
hot water, Energy Star rated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Available Manufacturers: Rheem RTGH-84 for 2-3 bathroom homes, or approved
equal.
Minimum 94% energy efficiency.
Minimum 0.26 GPM flow rate; 40 GPM minimum activation flow rate; 8.4 gal per
min. at 35oF rise maximum; 6.6 gal per min. at 45oF rise.
Built-in electric blower. Self diagnostic digital display.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A.
Install water heater in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Install gas shut-off valves to water heater.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GAS-FIRED INSTANTEOUS HIGH-EFFICIENCY
TANKLESS HOT WATER HEATER
223401 - 1
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Install piping to water heaters to allow service and maintenance.
B.
Ground equipment.
END OF SECTION 223401
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GAS-FIRED INSTANTEOUS HIGH-EFFICIENCY
TANKLESS HOT WATER HEATER
223401 - 2
SECTION 224101 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
STIPULATI0NS
A.
The specifications sections "Contractual Requirements", "Special Requirements" and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and technical provisions of the Contract, including all Division 1, 2 and 3
specification sections and appropriate sections of Division 4 through 14 as referenced herein,
apply to this section.
1.2
A.
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
Installation Requirements.
REFERENCES
A.
ASME A112.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
B.
ANSI/ASME A112.19.1 - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures.
C.
ANSI/ASME A112.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.
D.
ANSI/ASME A112.19.4 - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures.
E.
ANSI/ASME A112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals (Dimensional
Standards).
F.
IAPMO/ANSI Z124.2 - Plastic Shower Stalls.
1.4
A.
1.5
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
B.
Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in
place to protect fixtures and prevent use.
1.6
A.
WARRANTY
Provide five year warranty.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING FIXTURES
2244101-1
1.7
A.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Provide four sets of each fixture type.
PART 2 PRODUCTS – SEE CONTRACT DRAWINGS.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
3.3
EXAMINATION
Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.
PREPARATION
Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture
rough-in schedule for particular fixtures.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
C.
Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key or screwdriver stops,
reducers, and escutcheons.
D.
Install components level and plumb.
E.
Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports, wall carriers and bolts.
F.
Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07902, color to
match fixture.
G.
Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture
in place.
H.
The plumbing contractor shall coordinate with the general contractor all rough in requirements
for all kitchen cabinets. The general contractor shall cut all openings and the plumbing
contractor shall install all fixtures and piping and be responsible for final setting in place of all
fixtures and piping.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation.
ADJUSTING
Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING FIXTURES
2244101-2
B.
3.6
Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or
overflow.
CLEANING
A.
Clean work under provisions of 01700.
B.
At completion clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
3.7
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.
B.
Do not permit use of fixtures.
3.8
FIXTURE HEIGHTS
A.
Install fixtures to heights above finished floor as indicated.
B.
Water-Closet
1.
C.
Lavatory
1.
D.
Standard 15 inches to top of bowl rim.
Standard 31 inches to top of basin rim.
Shower Heads
1.
67.5 inches to bottom of head.
END OF SECTION 224101
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING FIXTURES
2244101-3
SECTION 224101 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
STIPULATI0NS
A.
The specifications sections "Contractual Requirements", "Special Requirements" and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and technical provisions of the Contract, including all Division 1, 2 and 3
specification sections and appropriate sections of Division 4 through 14 as referenced herein,
apply to this section.
1.2
A.
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
Installation Requirements.
REFERENCES
A.
ASME A112.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
B.
ANSI/ASME A112.19.1 - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures.
C.
ANSI/ASME A112.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.
D.
ANSI/ASME A112.19.4 - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures.
E.
ANSI/ASME A112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals (Dimensional
Standards).
F.
IAPMO/ANSI Z124.2 - Plastic Shower Stalls.
1.4
A.
1.5
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
B.
Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in
place to protect fixtures and prevent use.
1.6
A.
WARRANTY
Provide five year warranty.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING FIXTURES
2244101-1
1.7
A.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Provide four sets of each fixture type.
PART 2 PRODUCTS – SEE CONTRACT DRAWINGS.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
3.3
EXAMINATION
Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.
PREPARATION
Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture
rough-in schedule for particular fixtures.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
C.
Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key or screwdriver stops,
reducers, and escutcheons.
D.
Install components level and plumb.
E.
Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports, wall carriers and bolts.
F.
Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07902, color to
match fixture.
G.
Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture
in place.
H.
The plumbing contractor shall coordinate with the general contractor all rough in requirements
for all kitchen cabinets. The general contractor shall cut all openings and the plumbing
contractor shall install all fixtures and piping and be responsible for final setting in place of all
fixtures and piping.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation.
ADJUSTING
Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING FIXTURES
2244101-2
B.
3.6
Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or
overflow.
CLEANING
A.
Clean work under provisions of 01700.
B.
At completion clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
3.7
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.
B.
Do not permit use of fixtures.
3.8
FIXTURE HEIGHTS
A.
Install fixtures to heights above finished floor as indicated.
B.
Water-Closet
1.
C.
Lavatory
1.
D.
Standard 15 inches to top of bowl rim.
Standard 31 inches to top of basin rim.
Shower Heads
1.
67.5 inches to bottom of head.
END OF SECTION 224101
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING FIXTURES
2244101-3
SECTION 224410 - PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
STIPULATI0NS
A.
The specifications sections "Contractual Requirements", "Special Requirements" and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and technical provisions of the Contract, including all Division 1, 2 and 3
specification sections and appropriate sections of Division 4 through 14 as referenced herein,
apply to this section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Pipe and pipe fittings.
B.
Valves.
C.
Sanitary sewer piping system.
D.
Domestic water piping system.
E.
Storm water piping system.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping.
B.
ANSI B31.9 - Building Service Piping.
C.
ASME Sec. 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
D.
ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800.
E.
ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
F.
ASME B16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250.
G.
ASME B16.18 - Cast Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings.
H.
ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings
I.
ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.
J.
ASME B16.26 - Cast Bronze Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING PIPING
224410-1
K.
L.
ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings DWV.
ASME B16.32 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Fittings for Solvent Drainage Systems.
M.
ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.
N.
ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
O.
ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized), Welded and
Seamless, for Ordinary Uses.
P.
ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
Elevated Temperatures.
Q.
ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
R.
ASTM B42 - Seamless Copper Pipe.
S.
ASTM B75 - Seamless Copper Tube.
T.
ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
U.
ASTM B251 - Wrought Seamless Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube.
AA.
ASTM B302 - Threadless Copper Pipe (TP).
BB.
ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).
CC. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
DD. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.
EE.
CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.
FF.
CISPI 310 - Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.
GG. CAN-3 B281 - Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Components.
HH. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
II.
1.5
A.
ASTM D1785: ASTM D2241 - Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide
manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING PIPING
224410-2
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
1.8
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Record actual locations of valves.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly
views.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
B.
Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor
regulations.
C.
Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Sec 9.
D.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.9
A.
1.10
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Perform Work in accordance with the National Standard Plumbing Code latest edition.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
B.
Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C.
Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
D.
Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
1.11
A.
1.12
A.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not install underground piping when bedding are wet or frozen.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Provide two repacking kits for each size valve.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
SANITARY PIPING (8" and under) BURIED BELOW GRADE
Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING PIPING
224410-3
1.
2.
2.2
A.
SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight.
1.
2.
B.
A.
C.
2.4
A.
Fittings: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034.
INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn seamless.
1.
2.
B.
Fittings: ASME B16.23
Joints: Soldered
PVC: Polyvinly chloride plastic (Type DWV) – NOT ACCEPTABLE FOR ENTIRE COMMERCIAL
UNIT BUILDING – TWO BED ROOM OVER OFFICE.
Standard: ASTM D2665, ASTM F891, ASTM D2949.
1.
2.3
Fittings: Cast iron.
Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.
DWV Copper: ASTM B306
1.
2.
D.
Fittings: Cast iron.
Joints: ASTM C564, neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum.
Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.
1.
2.
C.
Fittings: Cast iron.
Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene
gaskets or lead and oakum.
Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast bronze, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.
Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.
Polyethylene Tubing: ASTM F876/F877, Cross linked Pex Piping System. – NOT
ACCEPTABLE FOR ENTIRE COMMERCIAL UNIT BUILDING OR RESIDENTIAL OVER
COMMERCIAL OR TRIPLEX BUILDINGS.
1.
2.
Fittings: ASTM F-1807, solid brass.
System components shall be listed under NSF International Standard 14 and 61.
BELOW GRADE DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS (3” and Under)
Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, hard drawn.
1.
2.
Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast bronze or ASTM B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.
Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING PIPING
224410-4
2.5
A.
BELOW GRADE DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS (4" and Above)
Cast Iron Pipe: AWWA C151.
1.
2.
2.6
A.
COMBINED SANITARY/STORM WATER DRAINAGE PIPING, BELOW GRADE
Cast Iron Pipe (8" and under): ASTM A74 service weight, hub and spigot.
1.
3.
B.
A.
Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight.
A.
Fittings: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034.
FLANGES, UNIONS AND COUPLINGS
Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under:
1.
2.
B.
Fittings: Cast iron.
Joints: Neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic (Type DWV) - NOT ACCEPTABLE FOR ENTIRE COMMERCIAL
UNIT BUILDING OR RESIDENTIAL OVER COMMERCIAL.
Standard: ASTM D2665, ASTM F891, ASTM D2949.
1.
2.8
Fittings: Cast iron.
Joints: ASTM C564, neoprene gasket system or lead and oakum.
Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.
1.
2.
C.
Fittings: Concrete.
Joints: ASTM C443, rubber gaskets.
STORM WATER DRAINAGE PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
1.
2.
B.
Fittings: Cast iron.
Joints: ASTM C564, lead and oakum.
Reinforced Concrete Pipe (10" and Above): ASTM C14.
1.
2.
2.7
Fittings: Ductile iron, standard thickness.
Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket with 3/4 inch diameter rods.
Ferrous pipe: 150 psig malleable iron threaded unions.
Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig bronze unions with soldered joints.
Pipe Size Over 2 Inches:
1.
Ferrous pipe: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges; 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene
gaskets.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING PIPING
224410-5
2.
C.
Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings:
1.
2.
D.
2.9
A.
Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig slip-on bronze flanges; 1/16 inch thick preformed
neoprene gaskets.
Housing: Malleable iron clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular
deflection, contraction, and expansion; steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for
galvanized pipe.
Sealing gasket: "C" shape composition sealing gasket.
Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder
end, water impervious isolation barrier.
GATE VALVES
Manufacturers:
1.
NIBCO Model 3 inch and smaller S-113; 4 inch and larger F-619.
2.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Milwaukee Valve Company.
Stockham.
Crane.
Powell.
B.
Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, non-rising stem, handwheel, inside
screw, single or double wedge or disc, solder or threaded ends.
C.
Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, single or double
wedge, flanged or grooved ends.
2.10
A.
BALL VALVES
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
NIBCO.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.
a)
b)
B.
Watts Regulatory Company.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze one piece body, chrome plated brass ball, Teflon seats
and stuffing box ring, lever handle, solder or threaded ends.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING PIPING
224410-6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
EXAMINATION
Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
PREPARATION
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B.
Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C.
Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.
D.
Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.
E.
Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
G.
Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
H.
Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
I.
Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 3.5 feet of
cover, for sanitary/storm piping and 4.0 feet cover for water piping 2.0 feet cover for gas
piping. It is important that the contractor coordinate depths of piping requirements with
existing conditions. All piping must be installed below existing building grade beams to
extend piping below first floor slabs.
J.
Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean,
and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
K.
Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.
L.
Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting.
M.
Excavate in accordance with Division 2 and this specification for work of this Section.
N.
Backfill in accordance with Division 2 and this specification for work of this Section.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING PIPING
224410-7
O.
Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
P.
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
Q.
Provide one plug valve wrench for every ten plug valves sized 2 and smaller, minimum of one.
Provide each plug valve sized 2-1/2 inches and larger with a wrench with set screw.
R.
Install ‘pex’ interior domestic water system in strict accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations. Domestic to the pex system manifolds shall be copper for both hot and
cold water.
3.4
APPLICATION
A.
Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.
B.
Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
C.
Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder
adapters to pipe.
D.
Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
E.
Install ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
F.
Provide plug valves in Natural gas systems for shut-off service.
G.
Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where indicated.
3.5
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4" per foot for piping 3" and smaller and
1/8 inch per foot for piping more than 3" minimum as indicated on the drawings. Maintain
gradients.
B.
Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points.
3.6
EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
A.
Excavation, Backfilling and compaction shall comply with Division 2 of the Project Manual.
B.
General
1.
2.
The Contractor shall perform all excavation, backfilling, compaction and necessary
finishing for all piping, equipment and accessories. Piping installation shall be in
accordance with local water, sewer and gas utility regulations and applicable State and
Local codes.
The Contractor shall do all bracing, sheathing and shoring necessary to perform and
protect his excavations. The contractor shall provide safety rails, lights, signs, etc. as
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING PIPING
224410-8
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
necessary or required for safety, as directed by the professional, or as required to
conform to governing laws.
The Contractor shall provide, maintain, and operate pumping equipment of sufficient
capacity to insure that all his excavations and trenches are kept free of water at all
times.
All surfaces of streets, walkways, seeded areas, or finished grade areas disturbed by
the excavation shall be restored to their original condition and/or as indicated on the
Project Documents.
Protect existing structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements and other facilities not
indicated for removal, from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement,
undermining, washout and other hazards resulting from excavation operations.
Existing utility lines shown on the project documents do not indicate the exact in-place
location of the lines. They do not show every pipe, fitting or appurtenance that may
exist at the project site. The location and depth of all utilities shall be marked and
recorded prior to any excavation. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted, existing
piping or other utilities be uncovered during excavation, contact the professional
immediately for directions before proceeding further with work in this area. Cooperate
with owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in
operation. Repair damaged utilities to the satisfaction of the utility owner.
If it becomes necessary to install any lines equipment in locations other than those
shown, the Professionals acceptance shall be obtained before starting the excavation.
The presence of explosives on the project site or the use of explosives in the execution
of the work under this contract is not permitted
Excavation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
All plumbing excavation is unclassified.
Trenches shall be dug to uniform width not less than 12-inches nor more than 16inches wider than the bell diameter of the piping. Trench sides shall be vertical.
Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping as
required to establish required slopes and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter,
keep bottom of trenches sufficiently below finished grade to protect against frost. The
bottom of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform and smooth flow
throughout. Any over-excavation shall be backfilled with modified aggregate and
thoroughly tamped.
If trench excavation operations are performed when the atmospheric temperature is
less than thirty-five (35) degrees Fahrenheit, the Contractor shall provide at his own
expense cold weather protection as required to protect excavated trench bottoms from
freezing. Under no circumstances will any pipe be permitted to be laid in a trench
container of water or on a sub-grade containing frost.
Take up and re-lay pipe that is not laid true to required alignment or grade. Pipe that
has had its joints disturbed after laying shall be taken up and relayed. Deviation from
the required lines and grades will not be permitted unless approved by the
Professional.
Pipe Embedment - All pipe shall be laid on a first Class granular bedding. The bedding
shall be a minimum depth of 6-inches (six) or 1/4 (one-fourth) the pipe diameter
whichever is greater. The bedding shall provide uniform longitudinal support to the
piping and shall be laid to provide the grade and line as shown on the drawings or as
directed by the professional. Compaction of embedment materials under the
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING PIPING
224410-9
haunches and around the pipe to the spring line of the pipe shall be by hand tamping.
Final embedment for ferrous pipe materials shall extend from the spring line of the pipe
to a depth of 18-inches (minimum) above the top of the pipe. First Class bedding shall
be crushed stone or gravel and shall be compacted in accordance with the
Compaction Section.
D.
Backfilling
1.
2.
3.
Backfilling shall not be undertaken until all tests and inspections have been made. Use
care to avoid damaging or displacing piping systems. All backfill material shall be from
cinders, ashes, refuse, organic material, boulders, rocks or stones, frozen soil, and
other material that is unsuitable. When the type of backfill material is not indicated on
the plans or is not specified, the excavated material may be used, provided that such
material consists of loam, clay, sand, gravel, or other material that is suitable for
backfilling. From 1-foot above the top of the pipe to the subgrade of the pavement
material containing stones greater than 6-inches in their greatest dimension may not be
used.
Backfilling shall be carefully performed and the original surface restored.
All trench backfill shall be brought to sub-grade ready for base material or topsoil. After
the initial aggregate backfill layer has been placed, refill remainder of the trench using
backfill material as follows:
a.
5.
E.
Lawns - Successive 6-inch layers of clean search backfill material shall be
deposited after initial aggregate backfill. This backfill shall consist of excavated
material from large clods of search and stone. If large stones (greater than 6inches) and encountered, remove stones from site and haul clean earth backfill.
The entire trench shall be uniformly tamped after each successive layer is
deposited. Replace topsoil to approximate depth of existing as final refill
operation and crown to such height as required by the Professional. Maintain
crowned surface to the satisfaction of the Professional.
Walks and Parking Areas - Clean each backfill compacted in 6-inch layers to a point 8
inches below the adjacent existing surfaces. Refill the remaining 8 inches with
compacted modified stone and replace walk or paving as required.
Compaction
1.
2.
3.
4.
Thoroughly compact subgrade prior to the installation of 6-inches of First Class pipe
bedding. Following satisfactory pipe laying and in-line structure installation, backfill
trenches to a height of at least 12-inches above the top of the outside barrel of the pipe
with Penn DOT No. 1B crushed stone.
All fill shall be compacted to ninety-five (95%) percent. Each layer shall be compacted
to the specified percent of maximum density obtained at optimum moisture content, in
accordance with ASTM D1557, method D and ASTM D1556 sand cone method.
Compaction shall be accomplished by approved equipment suited to the soil being
compacted. Material shall be moistened or aerated as necessary to provide the
moisture content that will readily facilitate obtaining the specified compaction with the
equipment used.
Thoroughly compact successive layers of backfill material with a vibrating compactor of
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING PIPING
224410-10
5.
3.7
A.
CONCRETE
Refer to Section 03300.
3.8
A.
INSPECTION AND TESTING
General
1.
New plumbing systems and parts of existing systems which have been altered,
extended or repaired shall be tested to disclose leaks and defects.
2.
The Contractor shall notify the Professional a minimum of 5 (five) working days prior to
testing to coordinate the testing and inspection procedures.
If the Professional determines that the plumbing systems do not pass the prescribed
tests, then the Contractor shall be required to make the necessary repairs at his own
expense, and the Contractor shall re-inspect and re-test the systems. Repairing
inspection and testing shall be continued until all systems pass as determined by the
Professional.
All new, altered, extended or replaced plumbing shall be left uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been inspected, tested and accepted by the Professional.
Where such work has been covered or concealed before it has been inspected, tested
and accepted, it shall be uncovered by the Contractor, at his own expense as directed
by the Professional.
All equipment, material, labor, etc., required for testing the plumbing systems shall be
furnished by the Contractor.
3.
4.
5.
B.
a type and size satisfactory to the Professional. Compacting of this backfill by puddling
or jetting will not be permitted. Use mechanical tampers to compact backfill materials
in trench refill operations to produce a density of backfill at the bottom of each layer of
not less than ninety-five (95%) percent of the maximum density obtained at optimum
moisture content as determined by AASHTO T99 when requested by the Professional.
Perform field determinations of backfill density in accordance with AASHTO T 191.
-HAMMER for compaction of
backfill is prohibited.
Sanitary, Vent, and Rainwater Collection Systems
1.
Rough Plumbing - Systems shall be tested upon completion of the rough piping
installation and proved watertight. The water test shall be applied to the system either in
its entirety or in sections after rough piping has been installed.
a.
b.
c.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Where applied to the entire system, all openings in the piping shall be closed,
except the highest opening, and the system filled with water to point of overflow.
Where the system is tested in sections, each opening shall be plugged, except
the highest opening of the section under test, and each section shall be filled
with water. A section shall not be tested with less than a 10-foot head of water.
In testing successive sections, at least the upper 10-feet of the next preceding
section shall be tested, such that a joint or pipe in the building, except the
uppermost 10 feet of the system, shall not have been subjected to a test of less
PLUMBING PIPING
224410-11
d.
2.
Finished Plumbing - After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with
water, the plumbing fixture connections shall be tested and proved gas and water tight.
a.
b.
C.
A smoke test shall be made by filling all traps with water and then introducing
into the system smoke produced by one or more smoke machines. When the
smoke appears at stack openings on the roof, the stack openings shall be
closed and pressure equivalent to a 1-inch water column shall be introduced and
maintained for the period of the inspection.
Where the local Authority Having Jurisdiction finds that a smoke test need not be
performed, a peppermint test shall be performed. Two (2) ounces of oil of
peppermint shall be poured into the roof terminal of every line or stack to be
tested. The oil of peppermint shall be followed at once by 10 quarts of hot (140degrees Fahrenheit) water. All roof vent terminals shall then be sealed. The
system shall then be inspected for the detection of odor of peppermint. If odor of
peppermint is detected, repairs shall be made and the system shall be retested.
Domestic Water Systems
1.
2.
3.
3.6
than a 10-foot head of water.
The water shall be kept in the system or in the portion under test for a minimum
of 2 (two) hours before inspection starts. The system shall then be inspected to
ensure that it is tight at all points.
The system shall be tested either in its entirety or in sections.
The system shall be tested and proved tight under a water pressure of 125 pounds per
square inch for a period of 2 hours.
Potable water shall be used for testing.
DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A.
Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
B.
Ensure PH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or
soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).
C.
Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to
obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.
D.
Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum
15 percent of outlets.
E.
Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
F.
If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
G.
Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.
H.
Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 5 percent of outlets and from
water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING PIPING
224410-12
3.7
SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A.
Provide new sanitary/storm sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations
required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly
connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing. Confirm with the City of
Philadelphia all applicable requirements before beginning work.
B.
Provide new water service piping complete to living units as indicated. See drawings for
more detailed information. Confirm with water utility company all applicable requirements
before beginning work.
END OF SECTION 224410
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING PIPING
224410-13
SECTION 224412 - PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
STIPULATIONS
A.
The specifications sections "Contractual Requirements", "Special Requirements" and
"General Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have
the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and technical provisions of the Contract, including all Division 1, 2 and 3
specification sections and appropriate sections of Division 4 through 14 as referenced
herein, apply to this section.
1.2
A.
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
Piping insulation.
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C195 - Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Cement.
B.
ASTM C335 - Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation.
C.
ASTM C449 - Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.
D.
ASTM C534 - Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and
Tubular Form.
E.
ASTM C585 - Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of
Pipe and Tubing (NPS System).
F.
ASTM C921 - Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.
G.
ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
H.
ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
I.
NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
J.
UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.4
A.
SUBMITTALS
Samples: Submit one sample of any representative size illustrating each insulation type.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PIPING INSULATION
224412-1
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance with
ASTM E84. NFPA 255. UL 723.
QUALIFICATIONS
Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum
three years experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B.
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's
identification, including product density and thickness.
C.
Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic.
D.
Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.
1.8
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,
mastics, and insulation cements.
B.
Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
GLASS FIBER
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
Manville.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.
a)
b)
c)
d)
B.
Owens-Corning.
Knaul.
Certainteed.
Or approved equal.
Insulation: ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1.
2.
'K' value: ASTM C335, 0.24 BTU/Hour at 75 degrees F.
Minimum Service Temperature: -20 degrees F.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PIPING INSULATION
224412-2
3.
4.
C.
Maximum Service Temperature: 300 degrees F.
Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
Vapor Barrier Jacket
1.
2.
3.
ASTM C921, White kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to
aluminized film.
Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm inches.
Secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
D.
Tie Wire: 18 gage stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
E.
Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
b)
c)
d)
2.
2.2
A.
Manville.
Owens-Corning.
Armstrong.
Or approved equal.
Compatible with insulation.
JACKETS
PVC Plastic
1.
Manufacturers:
a)
b)
2.
Manville Corporation
Or approved equal.
Jacket: ASTM C921, One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off
white color.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Minimum Service Temperature: -10 degrees.
Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.
Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.002 perm inches.
Maximum Flame Spread: ASTM E84; 25.
Maximum Smoke Developed: ASTM E84; 50.
Thickness: 15 mil.
Connections: Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.
Jacket shall include bonded vapor proof alumium foil-kradt and vapor proof,
pressure-sensitive closure seal with release paper.
PIPING INSULATION
224412-3
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B.
Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
On exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
C.
Insulated hot or cold pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
For insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory applied or field applied.
Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and
thickness as adjacent pipe.
Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive.
PVC fitting covers may be used.
Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe
penetrations.
Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, and
flexible connections.
Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory applied or field
applied.
Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as
adjoining pipe.
Finish with glass cloth and adhesive.
PVC fitting covers may be used.
For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and
unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
Inserts and Shields:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Application: Piping 1-1/2 to 2 inches diameter or larger.
Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.
Insert Location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as
adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.
Insert Material: ASTM C640 cork, hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy
density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PIPING INSULATION
224412-4
F.
Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
G.
For pipe exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished spaces below 10 feet
above finished floor, finish with metal jacket sized for finish painting or PVC jacket and
fitting covers. Review requirements of section 15410 and this section.
3.3
GLASS FIBER INSULATION SCHEDULE
PIPING SYSTEMS
Inch (mm)
A.
PIPE SIZE
Inch (mm)
THICKNESS
Plumbing Systems
Domestic Hot Water
Domestic Cold Water
1/2 to 2
1/2 to 4
1"
1/2"
ALL PIPING SYSTEMS AS SCHEDULED ABOVE LOCATED WITHIN BASEMENTS,
UNCONDITIONED SPACES AND/OR ATTICS SHALL BE INSULATED.
END OF SECTION 244412
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PIPING INSULATION
224412-5
SECTION 224430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
STIPULATI0NS
A.
The specifications sections "Contractual Requirements", "Special Requirements" and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and technical provisions of the Contract, including all Division 1, 2 and 3
specification sections and appropriate sections of Division 4 through 14 as referenced herein,
apply to this section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Floor drains.
B.
Cleanouts.
C.
Wall Hydrants.
D.
Drain Pan.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping.
B.
Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.
B.
ANSI/ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent.
C.
ANSI/ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle.
D.
ANSI/ASSE 1019 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types.
E.
ANSI A112.26.1 - Water Hammer Arrestors.
F.
AWWA C506 - Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure Principle and Double Check
Valve Types.
G.
PDI WH-201 Water Hammer Arresters.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
224430-1
1.5
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, backflow preventers.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly
views.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Provide two of loose keys, hose end vacuum breakers, and service kits for wall hydrants.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
FLOOR DRAINS
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
J.R. Smith.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.
a)
b)
c)
d)
B.
2.2
B.
Wade
Josam
Zurn
Or approved equal.
FD-A: ANSI A112.21.1; duco cast iron, flashing collar flange, with sediment bucket,
adjustable nickel-bronze strainer and vandal proof screws; models 2010A and 2010B
manufactured by J.R. Smith.
CLEANOUTS
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
J.R. Smith.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Wade
Josam
Zurn
Or approved equal.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
224430-2
B.
2.3
A.
Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated
gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw; Model
4422 or 4555 manufactured by J.R. Smith.
WALL HYDRANTS
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
Mansfield. Model 300
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.
a)
b)
c)
B.
2.4
A.
Wall Hydrant: ANSI/ASSE 1019; non-freeze, self-draining type with chrome plated, wall plate,
hose thread spout, handwheel, and integral vacuum
WATER HAMMER ARRESTER
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
J. R. Smith Fig series 5000
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.
a)
b)
c)
d)
2.5
A.
Wade
Josam
Murdock
Wade
Josam
Murdock
Or approved equal.
DRAIN PAN
Manufacturers:
1.
Water-tite Model WWP-series or equal.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
PREPARATION
Coordinate cutting and forming of roof and floor construction to receive drains to required
invert elevations.
INSTALLATION
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
224430-3
B.
Extend cleanouts to finished floor or make accessible at wall access door location. Lubricate
threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at
cleanout for rodding of drainage system.
C.
Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
D.
Pipe relief from back flow preventer to nearest drain.
E.
Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve where indicated on
the drawings.
END OF SECTION 224430
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
224430-4
SECTION 233200 - HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
STIPULATIONS
A.
The specifications sections "General Conditions," "Special Requirements," and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the
same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
GENERAL
A.
1.3
Refer to Divisions 1-14. Read thoroughly.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work in Division 15, of the specifications covers all items relating to work under the
HVAC (mechanical), contract work, and every part herein is binding upon the
Contractor.
B.
The work is intended to include a proper HVAC (mechanical) system to be provided on
a design-build basis by the Contractor. The HVAC layouts are for diagrammatic
purposes to show layout intent only. All labor, equipment, materials, and accessories
for a complete and proper installation, or as may be required for a proper system shall
be furnished under this Contract.
C.
In general, the work shall consist of but not necessarily be limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Piping for split system cooling of air systems. Included in all related piping and
fittings.
Ductwork for supply, return and exhaust.
Insulation of ductwork and piping systems.
Exhaust fans.
Instruction and equipment manuals, instruction of using agencies
representatives.
Grilles and registers.
All automatic temperature control as specified hereinafter.
Vibration isolation.
Testing, adjust and balancing of ductwork and equipment.
Equipment marking and tags.
Instruction and equipment manuals.
Training of Owner’s Representatives.
Gas Furnaces and Appurtenance.
HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
223200-1
D.
Refer to Division 1 for further requirements. Read thoroughly.
1.4
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Installation:
1.
2.
3.
C.
The drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be
performed. Detail sizing and design is to be provided by the HVAC Contractor
on a design-build basis. However, it is not intended that they show every pipe
fitting or appurtenances required for a complete installation. Exact locations of
equipment and points of termination shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor
and approved by the Professional.
Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all
offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. The Contractor shall
carefully investigate the plumbing, electrical, structural and finish conditions
that would affect the work to be performed and shall arrange such work
accordingly, furnishing required ductwork and/or piping offsets, fittings, and
accessories to meet such conditions.
The drawings and specifications are intended to function as a common set of
documents. Anything shown on the drawings but not in the specifications, or
mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the drawings, shall be
equally binding as if both noted on the drawings and called for in the
specifications.
If there is a conflict between drawings and specifications, the contractor is to
notify the design professional in writing for clarification before bidding. If no
such notification is made, the contractor shall be responsible to provide the
product and/or service of the more stringent requirement.
The layouts should be followed as closely as circumstances will permit,
however, the Contractor will be held responsible for detail sizing and design
and proper installation of all materials and equipment required for a complete
installation within the intent and meaning of the Contract Documents.
The Contractor must be thoroughly familiarized with the specifications and
drawings in order to clearly understand the responsibility in relationship to the
work to be performed under this Contract. The Contractor must perform and
plan work so as to permit the use of the building at the earliest possible date.
No measurement of a drawing by scale shall be used as a working dimension.
Working measurements shall be taken from figured dimensions and survey of
actual condition.
Refer to Section Division 1. Read thoroughly.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
223200-2
1.5
RECORDS DRAWINGS
A.
1.6
Refer to Division1. Read thoroughly.
FAMILIARITY WITH CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
A.
General:
1.
B.
Execution:
1.
C.
1.7
1.9
The Contractor's responsibility, prior to submitting his bid on this Project, is to
satisfy himself as to the nature and location of the work, the existing conditions,
and the quality and quantity of the materials which will be required, under this
Contract.
Failure to make an on-site inspection prior to submitting a bid, or failure to
comply with any or all of the requirements herein will not relieve the Contractor
from the responsibilities of properly estimating the requirements of the work nor
from the responsibility for the performance of the provisions of this Contract.
Refer to “Instructions to Bidders” and “General Conditions”.
PERMITS, TESTS, AND INSPECTION
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible to obtain and pay for all permits, pay all deposits
and fees necessary for the installation tests and inspection of all work provided
under15000 specifications. These tests shall be conducted as required by the
regulations of the local and/or state authorities, having jurisdiction.
B.
“Fees” shall include connection charges, construction cost and other such charges by
utility companies or service providers. Ascertain such charges during bidding and
include in bid price.
C.
Refer to Section Division 1 for further requirements.
LOCATIONS
A.
The Contractor shall provide for detailed and specific information regarding the location
and size of all equipment, as the final or required location and size may differ from that
indicated on the drawings. Any material or equipment improperly placed because of
the Contractor's failure to provide this information shall be relocated and reinstalled
without additional expense to the Owner.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
223200-3
1.10
1.11
LINES AND GRADES
A.
The Contractor shall lay out his work, establishing heights and grades for all exterior
and interior piping and duct work included in these specifications in strict accordance
with the intent of the drawings, the physical conditions of the building and the finished
site grades. He shall be responsible for the accuracy of such heights and grades and
that they meet all physical conditions of the building and the requirements of these
specifications.
B.
Refer to Division 1.
CHASES AND SOFFITS
A.
1.12
Refer to Division 1.
CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
A.
The Contractor shall provide all openings or chases for the installation of this contract's
work.
B.
The Contractor shall set all sleeves, hangers and anchors required for the work
document on contract drawings and he will be responsible for their proper and
permanent installation.
C.
The Contractor shall be responsible for sealing around openings in fire-rated
separations where such openings were provided for equipment installed under his
contract, i.e. piping. Such seals shall be installed to maintain the full fire rating of the
separation.
D.
Cutting shall not cause damage to the building or leave unsightly surfaces which
cannot be concealed by plates, escutcheons or other construction. Where such
unsightly conditions are caused by the Contractor, he shall be required, at his own
expense, to repair the damaged areas.
E.
All patching or repair of fireproofing due to cutting by the Contractor shall be performed
under and included with the work of the Contractor. Such patching or repair shall be
paid for by the Contractor.
F.
No cutting may impair the strength of the building construction shall be done. No holes
may be drilled in or attachments welded to the beams or other structural members
without prior approval from the Owner’s representative. All work shall be done by
mechanics skilled in their trade.
G.
For standard of quality for patching, repair and finishing, comply with requirements of
Divisions 1 through 14, in particular Section 01045.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
223200-4
1.13
1.14
FLASHING AND ROOFING WORK
A.
This contractor shall coordinate with the general contractor all cutting and patching and
sealing of roofs as required for the installation of all work under this Contract. This
contractor shall perform all cutting and the general contractor shall perform all
patching, sealings, flashing and finish roofing as required. The general contractor will
perform and be responsible for the integrity of the roof.
B.
The general contractor bears the complete responsibility for maintaining and obtaining
the watertight integrity of the affected areas of the roofs both during and after the
completions of construction.
C.
The general contractor shall provide all base flashings, counter flashings and applied
roofing materials necessary to properly flash and seal the roofs as required and to
prevent any water or moisture leakage whatsoever from occurring as a result of this
work. This contractor shall provide other flashing necessary to perform a proper
installation.
D.
This contractor must exercise extreme care so as not to damage roofs while working
thereon and he shall provide protection planking and plywood as required to achieve
this result. Any damage to the roofs and their watertight integrity caused as a result of
work being under this contract shall be properly repaired by the General Contractor at
the expense of this contractor to the satisfaction of and at no cost to the Owner.
E.
Refer to Division 7 for further requirements.
PRUDENT WORK-PRACTICE AND PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND PERSONNEL
A.
This contractor shall expedite the work of a specific area, section or part of the project
to make provision for, or protect equipment, or to permit the installation of another part
of the work. Refer to Division 1 for coordination and scheduling requirements.
B.
Before any piping, conduit, equipment, devices, controls, and supports are installed,
the Contractor shall check field conditions to eliminate any possible interference.
C.
Where two items of equipment, devices, piping, conduits, supporting metal work,
hangers, pull boxes, outlets, or controls are shown on any of the drawings in the same
location, adjustments shall be made. These adjustments shall be made through
coordination between the contractor and professional prior to the installation of any
work. The modifying changes shall be accomplished within the same space assigned
for such construction and at no additional cost to the Owner. All necessary offsets,
bends, turns, modifications in piping, ductwork and conduit devices required to install
the work without interference with other items or structure shall be provided and
installed without additional cost to the Owner.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
223200-5
1.15
D.
Where equipment is indicated on the drawings it shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to install the equipment, its control or operational devices, with sufficient
space provided for proper operation and maintenance.
E.
All equipment, devices, controls, and motors shall be tightly covered and protected
during construction and up to the time of operation. The protection shall be arranged
and be of such design as to prevent damage from infiltration of dust, dirt, debris,
moisture, chemicals or water. All pipe, including electrical conduit shall be capped or
plugged during installation with temporary dust-tight caps. The Contractor shall be
responsible for damage or breakage to his fixtures and equipment and shall make
good such damaged items at no cost to the Owner.
F.
All surfaces, either finished, in preparation for finishing or finish material application,
shall be protected against damage from welding, cutting, burning, soldering or similar
construction activities. This protection shall be accomplished by care in operations,
covering and shielding. Special care shall be directed to exposed finished masonry,
metal or wood surfaces, and painted surfaces. Corrective measures required shall be
accomplished by the Contractor causing the damage, and at no cost to the owner.
The protective coverings and coatings shall be maintained, and until the work is ready
for acceptance by the Design Professional.
G.
All exposed polished metal fittings, parts and devices, shall have a protective coating
applied and maintained during the course of construction, and shall not be installed
until adjoining tile or masonry work has been finally acid cleaned.
H.
Install temporary screens at all strainers or similar cleaning devices in the installation.
At the completion of the work and just prior to acceptance of the system by the agency,
remove the temporary screens and install new and final screens. The temporary
screens shall be given to the agency at the time of replacement.
I.
Provide suitable permanent safety guards for all pulleys, belt drives, centrifugal
equipment and rotating parts, of the various items or equipment provided under this
Contract.
J.
The guards and safety devices not noted on the drawings but required by regulations
or agencies having jurisdiction shall be included as part of the project requirements.
INSTALLATION PROVISIONS
A.
Install all equipment, and piping so as to preserve access to all fittings, valves and
accessories. In general, piping shall be concealed unless otherwise indicated on the
plans, but when exposed it shall be run so as to allow maximum headroom consistent
with proper pitch. Piping and ducts shall not be installed in front of or interfere with any
light, opening, door, window or equipment. Headroom in front of openings, doors or
windows shall not be less than the top of the opening.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
223200-6
1.16
B.
All piping, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work to
permit a clearance of not less than 1" between the finished covering and all adjacent
work.
C.
Where required to allow clearance for electrical conduits, beams, and piping and to
avoid interference with other work, to increase the headroom under pipes or to improve
appearance of the pipe work or ducts the Contractor shall offset the pipes as directed
by the Design Professional and properly drain and drip same where necessary. The
contractor shall provide the necessary special pipe fittings to secure the necessary
offsets and maintain good liquid flow.
D.
Pipes carrying liquids or liquid vapors shall not be installed in electrical equipment
rooms unless utilized for fire protection requirements. Pipes shall not be installed over,
around, in front of, in back of, or below electrical controls, panels, switches, terminals,
boxes or similar electrical equipment. Drip pans will not be permitted under any
circumstances around electrical equipment.
MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP
A.
General:
1.
2.
B.
Materials and Equipment:
1.
2.
3.
C.
All details of the installation shall be mechanically and electrically correct, and
the mechanical and electrical equipment shall operate without objectionable
noise or vibration.
Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall bear the label of approval
of Underwriter Laboratories, Inc.
All materials and equipment furnished under this contract shall be new,
American made and shall conform to the grade, quality and standards
specified herein. Major items of equipment shall be the latest and standard
product, as advertised in printed catalogs by reputable manufacturers for the
purpose intended and shall have replacement parts readily available.
All equipment or apparatus of any one system must be the product of one
manufacturer, or equivalent products of a number of manufacturers which are
suitable for use in a unified or assembled system. All equipment shall be
installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
Mechanical fastenings used throughout on the equipment or parts subject to
wear and replacement shall be of a type capable of removal and replacement
without physical deformation of the equipment.
Workmanship:
1.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
All manufactured articles, material, and equipment shall be applied, installed,
connected, erected, adjusted, cleaned, and conditioned, in accordance with
the manufacturer's directions, unless hereinafter specified otherwise. The
HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
223200-7
2.
D.
1.17
1.18
1.19
Refer to Division 1.
PROTECTION OF SERVICES AND EQUIPMENT
A.
The Contractor, at his own expense, shall repair, replace and maintain in service any
utilities, facilities or services (underground, overground, interior or exterior) damaged,
broken, or otherwise rendered inoperative during the course of construction due to fault
or neglect on the part of the Contractor.
B.
Refer to Division 1 for further requirements.
INTERRUPTION OF SERVICES
A.
The Contractor shall schedule his work to avoid any major interruption of any utility
services. Interruption of services shall be done during overtime if necessary at no
additional cost to the Owner.
B.
Refer to Division 1 for further requirements.
INSERTS AND FASTENERS
A.
B.
Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining such instructions from the
suppliers.
Equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions for type and capacity of each piece of equipment. The Contractor
shall obtain these instructions from the manufacturer and such instructions
shall be considered a part of these specifications. Type, capacity and
application of equipment shall be suitable and capable of satisfactory
operation for the purpose intended in the Mechanical Systems.
Inserts:
General:
1.
This section describes methods and materials for various standard types of
construction for the guidance and establishment of the minimum requirements.
However, if required, provide fasteners in modified form to suit other types of
construction and adopt the method most applicable to the problem and with
approval of the Professional.
2.
Provide all required inserts or fasteners for the various types of construction
encountered in the project. Hangers and inserts shall be in accordance with
MSS-SP58, ASHRAE or SMACNA.
3.
Inserts and fasteners hereinafter described shall be for hangers, supports,
anchors, guides, braces, angle clips, brackets, controls, operators, drives,
electrical controls, electrical devices, boxes, cabinets and equipment and
fixtures. Inserts and fasteners shall be provided by the Contractor.
1.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Inserts shall be Drop-In Anchor type with internal threads with flush mounted
expansion anchor for solid and hollow concrete and shall be not longer than 1
inch in length.
HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
223200-8
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Expansion anchors shall be flush type which meets the description in Federal
Specification FF-S-325. Group VIII, Type 1, for expansion shield anchors.
Anchors to be carbon steel and zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633.
SC. 1, Type III. Anchors shall be Hilti HDI-P anchors as supplied by Hilti, Inc. or
approved equal.
Inserts shall be accurately located to accommodate bolt or rod after concrete
in floor above has been cured and accepted by the general contractor for
installation. Where loading exceeds the safe allowable limit for any single
insert, then multiple inserts shall be installed, spaced no less than 12" on
centers. The multiple inserts shall be connected with suitable size steel angles
and locking bolts.
Inserts shall of the type to receive a machine bolt head, rod or nut after
installation and shall permit adjustment of this bolt in one horizontal direction.
When installed in cured concrete, inserts shall be capable of developing the full
strength of bolt or rod. Inserts shall be installed in such a manner that they be
flush with the concrete surfaces, permit adjustment of the bolt or rod in one
direction and permit removal or insertion of the bolt, rod or nut after the
installation of the insert.
Inserts shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
C.
Fasteners:
1.
In cases where inserts have been inadvertently omitted or required in existing
construction, the fastening shall be accomplished by means of approved lead
sheathed expansion bolts.
a.
Wood plugs shall not be used in any case.
b.
Expansion shields in concrete slabs shall not be loaded more than ½
their maximum design capacity and never more than 200 pounds per
bolt.
c.
Bolts used with the lead expansion shields shall be cadmium plated.
2.
Where roofing or floors are supported by structural steel members, it will be
necessary to support piping, conduit, devices, and equipment by suitable
structural steel members, or fabricated supports.
3.
Where guides or anchors are noted on the drawings, provision shall be made
for the proper inserts or fastenings to structural members, deck or floor
material.
D.
Drop-in wedge anchor bolts or self-drilling anchors may be used in place of hook bolts.
Minimum embedment in concrete of wedge anchor bolts shall be in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions. Wedge anchor bolts shall be manufacturer by Phillip Drill
Co. or USM Corp. Self-drilling anchors shall be manufactured by Phillips Drill Co.
E.
After equipment is set in place and bolted down, any space between equipment base
and floor slab or foundation shall be completely filled with non-shrink grout equal to
Master Builders Co., Ltd. Embeco 153 grout.
F.
Refer to Division 1 for further requirements.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
223200-9
1.20
1.21
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL AND ACCESSORIES
A.
The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary lumber, steel angles, channels,
plates, pipe, rods, nuts, bolts, etc., as shown on plans, and as specified or as may be
required for complete and proper installation of all systems. All material and
workmanship shall be of the best quality and shall be installed in accordance with all
manufacturer’s requirements.
B.
The Contractor shall provide all materials, equipment, supplies and labor necessary to
construct all structural steel support work shown on the drawings and as hereinafter
specified, and as may be required for the installation of the equipment under this
Contract.
CONNECTIONS
A.
1.22
EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN EXPOSED MASONRY
A.
1.23
The points of connections and termination of the work under this specification are
shown on the drawings or stated in the specifications, but in case of doubt as to such
points of connections or terminations, the decision of the Design Professional shall be
final.
Where equipment, devices, access panels, radiation enclosure, and similar items of
mechanical construction are installed in exposed masonry construction, utilize and
submit for approval items of such size, height, and arrangement as to conform to the
corresponding masonry unit. Provide the necessary offsets, adjustments and
relocations necessary to conform with the instructions of the General Contractor as to
the final location of the equipment item in the exposed masonry.
ACCESS DOORS INTEGRAL WITH BUILDING STRUCTURE
A.
General:
1.
2.
B.
Provide access doors in ceiling, walls, partitions and floors for access to
valves, traps, expansion joints, devices, appurtenances, regulators, controls,
and electrical controls or devices for code compliance so that full access for
operation, inspection, and maintenance is assured.
The doors shall be of sufficient size to permit removal of item or clearance to
perform maintenance, but in no case less than 12" x 16".
Installation:
1.
2.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Location of access doors shall be determined by the Mechanical Contractor
and installed by the General Contractor. Coordination by the mechanical
contractor for this procedure is critical.
Access doors shall be arranged so they can be integrated into the surface
pattern, e.g., recessed panel with wire lath or tile. Bottom of access doors shall
not be lower than the top of base, or a minimum of 6" above floor. Tops and/or
HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
223200-10
side of access panels shall be a minimum of 6" from the ceiling or opening or
from the edge of a wall return.
C.
Product:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.24
1.25
Access doors in fire rated ceiling/floor and ceiling/roof assembly shall be "BLabel" and have a UL 1-1/2 hour (250 deg. F rating) for both door and frame.
Maximum size shall be 20" x 20" or 400 square inches in area.
a.
Frame - 16 gauge minimum steel.
b.
Panel - 14 gauge minimum steel.
c.
Pre-Finished by Manufacturer in white baked-on enamel.
d.
Hinge - Continuous type, one per door.
e.
Lock - Flush-face, key operated, self-latching cylinder locks.
Access doors without UL label:
a.
Frame - 16 gauge minimum steel.
b.
Panel - 14 gauge minimum steel.
c.
Pre-Finished by Manufacturer in white baked-on enamel.
d.
Hinges - Concealed spring hinges. Door to open 175 degrees
minimum.
e.
Lock - Flush-face, key operated, self-latching cylinder locks.
All access doors shall be keyed alike and provided with casing beads, frame
flange, or masonry anchor, as required, for mounting.
Refer to Division 1 and Division 8 for further requirements.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all
measurements at the building and he shall be held responsible for the correctness of
same.
B.
No extra compensation will be allowed on account of difference between actual
dimensions and measurements and those indicated on the drawings.
C.
Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Professional for
consideration before proceeding with the work.
CHANGES FROM CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A.
Changes from the contract drawings necessary to make the work of the Contractor
conform to the building as constructed, or to fit the work of other contractors, or to
conform to the rules and/or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, shall be made
by the Contractor at his own expense.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
223200-11
1.26
SHOP DRAWING SUBMISSIONS
A.
General:
1.
The Contractor shall submit to the Professional in accordance with Section
01300.
B.
Submit the following:
Furnaces and AC units
Heat Pumps
Access Panels/Doors
Inserts, Fasteners and Instruction
Pipe Systems
Automatic Temp. Controls
Supply Diffusers
Grilles and Registers
Exhaust Fans
2.
3.
4.
C.
1.27
Balancing Report Units
Operating & Maintenance
Vibration Isolators
Fire Stop Materials
Sheet Metal Shop Drawings
Return Registers
Heating Recovery Ventilators
All items or materials not mentioned above, which are substitutes or of
approved manufacturer's list shall be submitted if accepted as a substitute in
the form of shop drawings for review by the Professional and the Construction
Manager.
When shop drawings are submitted on equipment different from the equipment
specified hereinafter, the Contractor shall relate each item of the submitted
equipment to its specified equivalent.
Refer to Division 1.
Samples:
1.
The Contractor shall furnish, for review by the Professional and General
Contractor, all samples specified. Finished work shall match accepted
samples and shop drawings.
2.
At the request of the Professional or the General Contractor, samples of items
that are to be used in substitution of specified items shall be submitted. If such
a request is made, a sample of both the specified item and the proposed
substitute item shall be submitted simultaneously. The scheduling of the
submission of such samples shall be as directed and shall in no way delay the
progress of the project.
3.
Neither the Professional nor Owner will assume any liability whatsoever for any
samples submitted.
4.
Refer to Division 1 for further requirements.
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Equipment may be shown or specified in several ways:
1.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Several manufacturers and model numbers listed; or one manufacturer and
model number, followed by (mfr A), (mfr B), (mfr C), or words similar respect.
HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
223200-12
a.
3.
1.29
If one manufacturer is listed in the specifications or drawings that
manufacturer shall be considered the basis of design. If more than one
is listed the first manufacturer named in the Specification shall be
considered the basis of design.
b.
Where manufacturer’s or supplier’s name, style and catalog numbers
are mentioned in the description of material and equipment in the
specifications or on the drawings, it is to be understood that they are
for the purpose of setting a standard.
c.
If Contractor elects to furnish equipment other than the basis of design,
he shall verify capacities, physical size weight, electrical requirements,
methods of connection to other parts of the system, and all other
relevant data. Contractor shall be responsible for informing the Design
Professional of all changes required to other equipment, spaces,
structure or systems in order to install the substituted equipment. He
shall furnish all required shop drawings or sketches required for Design
Professional to evaluate the required changes, and shall be
responsible for all costs associated with such changes, including costs
of design or engineering, if such are necessary, and costs of other
trades.
Where manufacturer’s or supplier’s names are listed in conjunction with the
manufacturer or supplier that is basis of design, they are given to approve the
firm name only. Equipment or material submitted by such firms must meet the
detailed technical specifications written for the respective item. Contractor
shall be responsible for verifying capacities, physical sizes, weights, electrical
requirements, methods of connection to other parts of the system, etc.
Contractor shall furnish all required shop drawings for equipment, and for its
connection and installation.
B.
If any substituted items are submitted after contracts have been awarded, and there is
any question of equality of such items, samples may be required to be submitted both
for the item specified to the entire satisfaction of the Design Professional. In no case
shall additional remuneration be allowed because of the rejection of a substitute.
C.
When the equipment is relocated to a place other than shown on the drawings, or when
equipment other than that specified is used, the Contractor shall pay the extra cost
required revisions such as structural steel, concrete, electrical, piping etc.
D.
The Design Professional’s costs to evaluate substitutions and to revise Drawings and
specifications may be required to be paid by the Contractor should substitutions not be
in compliance with Division 1.
E.
Refer to Division 1 for further requirements.
CONCRETE
A.
This contractor shall be responsible for all concrete cutting, patching and replacement
as required and specified herein.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
223200-13
B.
1.30
1.31
Refer to Division 3 for all concrete requirements.
GUARANTEE
A.
The Contractor shall guarantee the workmanship, materials and equipment against
defects, leaks or non-operation for a period of one (1) year (unless specified
elsewhere), except Automatic Temperature Controls which is three (3) years from date
of acceptance by the Owner. Defective workmanship shall be construed as meaning
defective materials or unsatisfactory installation and not to mean ordinary wear and
tear.
B.
The Contractor shall pay for any repairs or replacements caused by defective
workmanship as construed herein within the period covered by the Guarantee.
C.
See “General Conditions”.
CLEAN-UP
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
1.32
Once per week or more often as required, and whenever directed by the
General Contractor, during the course of the work, the Contractor shall be held
responsible to clean all areas of this contractor’s work of debris and rubbish
which was left. The Contractor shall immediately remove water present in any
area, due to leaking fittings, broken pipe, etc. caused by defective materials or
improper installation by himself or his sub-contractors. Internal and external
areas of all equipment must be cleaned of all construction dust, etc. prior to
pre-final inspection.
Upon completion of his work and when directed by the General Contractor, the
Contractor shall remove all dirt, foreign materials, stains and fingerprints from
all equipment, fixtures, panels, plates etc., installed under this contract. Internal
areas of all equipment must be cleaned of all construction dust, etc. prior to
pre-final and/or final inspection.
Refer to Division 1 for further requirements.
COVERING THE WORK
A.
No piping shall be insulated and/or enclosed in walls or ceilings until it has been
inspected, tested and accepted.
B.
If any piping is insulated and/or enclosed in walls or ceilings before it has been
inspected, tested and accepted, it shall be uncovered by the Contractor at his own
expense when so notified by the Professional.
C.
Schedule testing and inspection time as not to delay another prime contractor’s work.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
223200-14
1.33
1.34
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL DEVICES
A.
All equipment under this contract, panels, contactors, circuit breakers, relays, motors,
safety switches, junction and pull boxes, control devices and similar items installed
under this project shall be identified by name, function and/or control. Included on
name plates shall be the voltage of the involved circuits. Name plates shall be at least
1" x 3" with characters not less than 1/4" high. They shall be made up of 2 laminated
black plastic sheets bonded with a middle sheet of white plastic and characters
engraved in the one black sheet to the depth of the white plastic. The Contractor shall
have the option to supply (in lieu of the above) #60 White Kromekote permanent labels
as manufactured by Specified Products, Inc., P.O. Box 8746, Milwaukee, WI 53227.
B.
The Contractor shall provide an indexed directory on typewritten chart(s) including
control drawings indicating the item or items controlled by each circuit.
C.
A typewritten list of name plates shall be submitted to the Design Professional for
review before ordering same and the final copy framed and hung at the jobsite where
directed by the Engineer.
INSTRUCTION OF OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE
A.
Scope:
1.
B.
Deliverables:
1.
C.
1.35
These instructions shall include, but not be limited to instruction in the following
items:
a.
Operation and Maintenance Schedules of Equipment
b.
Operation of Automatic Temperature Control.
c.
Start-up, operation and shut-down procedures including seasonal and
emergency consideration
d.
Warranties: What they cover and how to use them.
e.
Maintenance: Routine, periodic, service, lubrication, overhaul and
factory
A minimum of four (4) sets of all parts lists and instruction sheets received with
any equipment or appliance shall be bound in standard 3-ring binders, indexed
and turned over to the Construction Manager for delivery to the Owner.
Refer to Division 1 for further requirements.
FIRE STOPPING
A.
Provide fire stopping material at pipe, equipment, cable, and tubing penetrations in fire
and smoke rated walls and floors. Fire stop material shall be applied to meet all fire
rating requirements. Fire stop material shall be as specified in Section 07902. Fire
stop shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
223200-15
B.
1.36
Refer to Division 7 for further requirements.
CONSTRUCTION RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Comply with requirements of Division 1 and General Conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT APPLICABLE
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT APPLICABLE
END OF SECTION 233200
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
223200-16
SECTION 233290 - DUCTWORK INSULATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
STIPULATIONS
A.
The specifications sections "General Conditions," "Special Requirements," and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
Ductwork insulation.
RELATED SECTIONS
Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification.
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
B.
ASTM C518 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
C.
ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation.
D.
ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
E.
ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
F.
ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
G.
NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
H.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
I.
UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DUCTWORK INSULATION
233290-1
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each service,
and locations.
B.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensure acceptable
workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84
NFPA 255 UL 723.
QUALIFICATIONS
Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5
years experience.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's density and
thickness.
B.
Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic.
C.
Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.
1.9
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,
mastics, and insulation cements.
B.
Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
Owens Corning.
Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.
a)
b)
c)
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CertainTeed.
Manville Products.
Knauf.
DUCTWORK INSULATION
233290-2
B.
Insulation: ASTM C553 C612; flexible, noncombustible blanket.
1.
'K' ('Ksi') value : ASTM C518, 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2.
Maximum service temperature: 250.
3.
Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume.
4.
Density: 1.0 lb/cu ft.
C.
Vapor Barrier Jacket
1.
Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
2.
Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.04 perm.
3.
Secure with pressure sensitive tape.
D.
Vapor Barrier Tape
1.
E.
Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with
pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage.
PART 3
- EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
E.
Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.
F.
Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature:
1.
Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.
2.
Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.
3.
Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
4.
Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible
connections, and expansion joints.
C.
Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature:
1.
Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket.
2.
Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of
insulation.
3.3
A.
TOLERANCE
Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 percent at normal
conditions, as materials indicated.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DUCTWORK INSULATION
233290-3
3.4
FLEXIBLE GLASS FIBER DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE
DUCTWORK
THICKNESS
FINISH
Inch
Supply Ducts
1 1/2"
Vapor Barrier Jacket
(Within basements, attic spaces, over porch areas and/or within unconditioned spaces)
END OF SECTION 233290
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DUCTWORK INSULATION
233290-4
SECTION 233291– HEAT RECOVERY VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
This section includes the following:
1.
1.2
Energy Star Rated Heat Recovery Ventilator
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties
and accessories.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data.
C.
Warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Fantech or approved equal.
Fantech Model # Flex 100H, or approved equal, suitable for house up to 2,200 sq.ft in
area. Energy Star rated.
2.2
CONSTRUCTION
A.
Powder-coated 24-gage minimum galvanized steel cabinet, fully insulated with 1”
aluminum foil face high density foam.
B.
Aluminum heat recovery core.
C.
Motors: EBM motors with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings.
D.
Filters: Washable electrostatic panel type.
E.
Filters Control System: Low voltage.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
HEAT RECOVERY VENTILATORS
233291 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install unit in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Provide drain line to drain with “P” trap, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C.
Adjust and balance airflow.
END OF SECTION 233291
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
HEAT RECOVERY VENTILATORS
233291 - 2
SECTION 233714 – GAS FURNACES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
STIPULATIONS
A.
The specifications sections "General Conditions," "Special Requirements," and
"General Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and
shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Air Handling Unit package. (Energy Star rated)
B.
Charge of refrigerant and oil.
C.
Controls and control connections.
D.
Refrigerant piping connections.
E.
Motor starters.
F.
Electrical power connections.
1.3
REFERENCE
A.
ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
B.
ANSI/ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in new Building Design.
C.
ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
D.
ANSI/UL 303 - Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Condensing, and Air-Source Heat
Pump Equipment.
E.
ARI 520 - Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors, Compressor Units and
Condensing Units.
F.
ASHRAE 14 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Condensing
Units.
G.
ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GAS FURNACES
233714 - 1
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Submit shop drawings indicating components, assembly, dimensions, weights and
loadings, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Include
schematic layouts showing condensing units, cooling coils, refrigerant piping, and
accessories required for complete system.
C.
Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
D.
Submit product data indicating rated capacities, weights specialties and
accessories, electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams.
E.
Submit design data under provisions of Section 01300.
F.
Submit design data indicating pipe and equipment sizing.
G.
Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
1.5
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1.
B.
Include start-up instructions, maintenance instructions, parts lists, controls, and
accessories.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1.
B.
Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1.
C.
Comply with manufacturers installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and
transporting units.
D.
Protect units on site from physical damage. Protect coils.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Provide five year warranty under provisions of Division 1.
B.
Warranty: Include coverage for refrigerant compressors.
1.8
A.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Unit shall be used in a refrigerant circuit with a matching air-cooled condensing
unit, for matched system approved by manufacturer.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GAS FURNACE
15856 - 2
1.9
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All coils shall be designed and tested in accordance with ASHRAE 15 Safety Code
for Mechanical Refrigeration, latest edition.
B.
Unit shall be constructed in accordance with ETL and ETL, Canada, standards and
shall carry the ETL and ETL, Canada, labels.
C.
Unit insulation and adhesive shall comply with NFPA-90A requirements for flame
spread and smoke generation. Insulation shall contain an EPA-registered
immobilized antimicrobial agent to effectively resist the growth of bacteria and fungi
as proven by tests in accordance with ASTM standards G21 and 22.
D.
Unit shall be manufactured in a facility registered to the ISO 9001:2000
manufacturing quality standard.
E.
Direct-expansion coils shall be burst tested at 435 psi and leak tested at 150 psi.
1.10
A.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Units shall be stored and handled per manufacturer’s recommendations.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Luxaire.
B.
Carrier
C.
York
D.
Trane
E.
Or approved equal.
2.2
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Configuration: Up-flow type with gas burner and electric refrigeration.
mechanical drawings for proper application.
B.
Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit consisting of
cabinet, supply fan, heat exchanger, burner or heater, controls, air filter,
refrigerant cooling coil and outdoor package containing compressor, condenser
coil and condenser fan.
C.
Units shall be 92% + AFUE furnaces for Direct Vent connections and Energy Star
rated.
D.
Construction and Ratings: In accordance with ARI 210/240, and ANSI/UL 207 and
ANSI/UL 303. Testing: ASHRAE 14.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GAS FURNACES
See
233714 - 3
E.
Performance Ratings: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) not less than requirements
of ANSI/ASHRAE 90A; seasonal efficiency to ANSI/ASHRAE 103.
F.
Refer to Furnace Schedule. Gas heating capacities are sea level ratings. Cooling
performance is based on ARI 210/240 test conditions. Sound Rating Numbers
are in accordance with ARI 270.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured
access doors, glass fiber or asbestos insulation and reflective liner.
B.
Heat Exchanger: Aluminized or Stainless Steel welded construction.
C.
Combustion Chamber: ANSI/UL 727; ANSI/UL 729; welded stainless steel.
D.
Supply Fan: Centrifugal type rubber mounted with direct or belt drive.
E.
Motor: ANSI/NEMA MG 1; 1750 rpm rubber isolated hinge mounted.
F.
Air Filters: 1 inch thick glass fiber, disposable type arranged for easy replacement.
2.4
BURNER
A.
Gas Burner: Atmospheric type with adjustable combustion air supply,
combination gas valve and pressure regulator incorporation manual shut-off, pilot
valve, automatic 100 percent shut-off and thermo-couple pilot safety device,
electronic pilot ignition, automatic vent damper, and draft diverter.
B.
Gas Burner Safety Controls: Thermocouple sensor prevents opening of solenoid
gas valve until pilot flame is proven and stops gas flow on ignition failure.
2.5
BURNER OPERATING CONTROLS
A.
Room Thermostat: Cycles burner to maintain room temperature setting.
B.
High Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting, de-energizes
burner on excessive bonnet temperature and re-energizes when temperature
drops to lower safe value.
C.
Control Supply Fan: Bonnet temperatures and independent of burner controls,
manual switch for continuous fan operation.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GAS FURNACE
15856 - 4
2.6
OPERATING CONTROLS
A.
Adjustable Room Thermostat: Low voltage, to control burner operation,
compressor and condenser fan and supply fan to maintain temperature setting.
Include system selector switch (heat-off-cool) and fan control switch (auto-on).
B.
Thermostat shall be equal to Honeywell Model T7300 (PROGRAMMABLE).
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that floors are ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated
on shop drawings.
B.
Verify that proper power supply is available for furnace condenser package.
C.
Verify that proper fuel supply is available for connection.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install to NFPA 90A and ANSI/NFPA 90B.
C.
Install gas fired furnaces to ANSI Z223.1 (NFPA 54).
D.
Provide vent connections to ANSI/NFPA 211.
3.3
SCHEDULE - See contract drawings.
END OF SECTION 233714
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GAS FURNACES
233714 - 5
SECTION 233715 - AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS – AND INDOOR BLOWER UNIT
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
STIPULATIONS
A.
The specifications sections "General Conditions," "Special Requirements," and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the
same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Condensing unit package, Energy Star compliant.
B.
Charge of refrigerant and oil.
C.
Controls and control connections.
D.
Refrigerant piping connections.
E.
Motor starters.
F.
Electrical power connections.
REFERENCE
A.
ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
B.
ANSI/ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in new Building Design.
C.
ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
D.
ANSI/UL 303 - Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Condensing, and Air-Source
Heat Pump Equipment.
H.
ARI 520 - Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors, Compressor Units and
Condensing Units.
I.
ASHRAE 14 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Condensing Units.
J.
ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS –
AND INDOOR BLOWER UNIT
233715 - 1
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Submit shop drawings indicating components, assembly, dimensions, weights and
loadings, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Include
schematic layouts showing condensing units, cooling coils, refrigerant piping, and
accessories required for complete system.
C.
Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
D.
Submit product data indicating rated capacities, weights specialties and accessories,
electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams.
E.
Submit design data under provisions of Section 01300.
F.
Submit design data indicating pipe and equipment sizing.
G.
Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division 1.
B.
Include start-up instructions, maintenance instructions, parts lists, controls, and
accessories.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1.
B.
Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1.
C.
Comply with manufacturers installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and
transporting units.
D.
Protect units on site from physical damage. Protect coils.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide five year warranty under provisions of Division 1.
B.
Warranty: Include coverage for refrigerant compressors.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS –
AND INDOOR BLOWER UNIT
233715 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
CARRIER Model FAC4C Indoor unit 25HBR Outdoor Unit or equal.
LENNOX
YORK
TRANE
Or approved equal.
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and pre-wired units suitable for
outdoor use consisting of cabinet, compressors, condensing coil and fans, integral
sub-cooling coil, controls, liquid receiver and screens.
B.
Construction and Ratings: In accordance with ARI 210/240. Testing shall be in
accordance with ASHRAE 14.
C.
Performance Ratings: Energy Efficiency Rating shall be minimum 14.5 SEER and
Coefficient of Performance (COP) not less than prescribed by ANSI/ASHRAE 90A.
D.
Units shall be installed based on manufacturer’s recommended clearances.
CASING
A.
House components in welded steel frame with galvanized steel panels with weather
resistant, baked enamel finish.
B.
Mount starters, disconnects, and controls in weatherproof panel provided with full
opening access doors. Provide mechanical interlock to disconnect power when door is
opened.
C.
Provide removable access doors or panels with quick fasteners.
CONDENSER COILS
A.
Coils: Aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing. Provide subcooling circuits. Air test under water to 425 psig and dehydrate. Seal.
B.
Coil Guard: Expanded metal with lint screens.
FANS AND MOTORS
A.
Vertical discharge direct driven propeller type condenser fans with fan guard on
discharge.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS –
AND INDOOR BLOWER UNIT
233715 - 3
2.6
2.7
B.
Weatherproof motors suitable for outdoor use, single phase permanent split capacitor
and built in current and thermal overload protection.
C.
Horizontal discharge, double width, double inlet [ forward curved] [ backward inclined]
centrifugal type condenser fans, equipped with roller or ball bearings with grease
fittings extended to outside of casing, v-belt drive with belt guard.
COMPRESSORS
A.
Construction: Semi-hermetic scroll type with heat treated forged steel or cast iron
shafts, aluminum alloy connecting rods, automotive type pistons, rings to prevent gas
leakage, suction and discharge valves, and sealing surface immersed in oil.
B.
Mounting: Statically and dynamically balance rotating parts and mount on spring
rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. Internally isolate hermetic units on springs.
C.
Lubrication System: Reversible, positive displacement oil pump with oil charging valve,
oil level sight glass, oil filter, and magnetic plug or strainer.
D.
Capacity Reduction Equipment: Suction valve unloaders, with lifting mechanism
operated by electrically actuated solenoid valve. Provide for unloaded compressor
start. Control unloading from room thermostat.
E.
Motor: Constant speed suction gas cooled with electronic sensor and winding over
temperature protection, designed for across-the-line starting. Furnish with starter.
F.
Crankcase Heater: Evaporates refrigerant returning to crankcase during shut down.
Energize heater continuously, thermostatically, and when compressor is not operating.
REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT
A.
Provide each unit with one refrigerant circuit, factory supplied and piped.
B.
Provide the following for each refrigerant circuit:
1.
Filter dryer.
2.
Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator.
3.
Thermal expansion valve for maximum operating pressure.
4.
Insulated suction line.
5.
Suction and liquid line service valves and gage ports.
6.
Liquid line solenoid valve.
7.
Charging valve.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS –
AND INDOOR BLOWER UNIT
233715 - 4
2.8
8.
Discharge line check valve.
9.
Compressor discharge service valve.
10.
Condenser pressure relief valve.
CONTROLS
A.
On unit, mount weatherproof steel control panel, NEMA 250, containing power and
control wiring, molded case disconnect switch, factory wired with single point power
connection.
B.
For each compressor, provide starter, non-recycling compressor overload, starter relay,
and control power transformer or terminal for controls power. Provide manual reset
current overload protection. For each condenser fan, provide across-the-line starter
with starter relay.
C.
Provide the following safety controls arranged so that operating any one will shut down
machine and require manual reset:
D.
1.
High discharge pressure switch (manual reset).
2.
Low suction pressure switch (automatic reset).
3.
Oil pressure switch (manual reset).
Provide the following operating controls:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.9
Thermostat located in room.
Head pressure switch to cycle fan motors in response to refrigerant
condensing pressure.
Solid state control to vary speed of one condenser fan motor in response to
refrigerant condensing pressure.
Electronic control consisting of mixing damper assembly, controlled to maintain
constant refrigerant condensing pressure.
INDOOR BLOWER UNIT
A.
Indoor unit shall be tested and matching the condensing/heat pump unit. Unit shall be
provided with refrigerant coil and electric heater.
B.
Construct unit of heavy gauge galvanized steel completely insulated with thick
fiberglass insulation. Cabinet shall be pre-painted with textured enamel finish.
C.
Drain pan shall be deep corrosion resistant with dual pipe connections.
D.
Blower shall be direct drive statically and dynamically balanced.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS –
AND INDOOR BLOWER UNIT
233715 - 5
E.
Refrigerant connections shall be sweat connections extended outside the cabinet for
ease of installation.
F.
Coil shall be copper tubes with aluminum fins.
G.
Provide transformer and blower control relays.
H.
Provide air filters with tool less access capabilities.
I.
Electrical coil shall be provided for field installation. Coil shall be helix wound nichrome
heating elements. Coil shall have thermal sequencer relay bringing elements on and
off line, in sequence and in equal increments with time delay between each.
J.
Unit shall have single point of connection power box.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B.
Provide for connection to electrical service.
C.
Install units on concrete base as indicated.
E.
Provide connection to refrigeration piping system and evaporators. Comply with
ANSI/ASHRAE 15.
MANUFACTURERS FIELD SERVICES
A.
Prepare start systems under provisions of Division 1.
B.
Provide initial and cooling season start-up, and winter season shut down during first
year of operations, including routine servicing and check out.
C.
Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil for each refrigerant circuit. Replace losses of
refrigerant and oil.
D.
Inspect and test for refrigerant leaks the beginning of June and the end of August
during first year of operation.
END OF SECTION 233715
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS –
AND INDOOR BLOWER UNIT
233715 - 6
SECTION 233717 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
STIPULATIONS
A.
The specifications sections "General Conditions," "Special Requirements," and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
1.2
A.
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
Registers/grilles.
REFERENCES
A.
ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual.
B.
AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
C.
ARI 650 - Air Outlets and Inlets.
D.
ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets.
E.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
F.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
G.
NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
1.4
A.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets
as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and
inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code
1062 and ASHRAE 70.
B.
Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
233717-1
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
CEILING OR SIDEWALL SUPPLY REGISTERS (SR)
Manufacturers:
1.
Hart & Cooley Model 661 or equal.
B.
Fabrication: Aluminum with factory baked enamel white finish.
C.
Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with handle operator, operable from
face.
D.
Register with four, three and two-way air pattern.
2.2
A.
FLOOR GRILLES (FG)
Manufacturers:
1.
Hart & Cooley Model 210 or equal.
B.
Fabrication: Steel with factory baked enamel white finish with heavy guage welded vanes.
C.
Damper: Integral, foot-operated, opposed blade type with position lock, operable from face.
2.3
A.
RETURN REGISTERS (RR)
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
Hart & Cooley Model 650.
Or approved equal.
B.
Fabrication: Aluminum with factory baked enamel white finish.
C.
Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with handle operator, operable from
face.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform
with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
C.
Install registers and grilles to ductwork with air tight connection.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
233717-2
D.
3.2
Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to grilles and registers, despite whether dampers
are specified as part of the grille and register assembly.
SCHEDULES (See Contract Drawings for labels at each air terminal location).
END OF SECTION 233717
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
233717-3
SECTION 233860 - EXHAUST FANS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
STIPULATIONS
A.
The specifications sections "General Conditions," "Special Requirements," and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all Division 1 and 2 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
A.
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
Inline centrifugal fans, Energy Star rated.
REFERENCES
A.
AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
B.
AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
C.
AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
D.
AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes
E.
AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
F.
AMCA 301 - Method of Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.
G.
NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators.
H.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
I.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly of centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves
with specified operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet
at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXHAUST FANS
233860-1
C.
Product Data: Provide data on centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with
specified operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at
rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions.
1.5
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B.
Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare
parts list, and wiring diagrams.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1.
B.
Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust.
1.7
A.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings
lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
IN-LINE CABINET FANS (Unit toilet exhaust fans)
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Loren Cook Co.
B.
Penn Ventilator Co.
C.
Or approved equal.
2.3
GENERAL
A.
Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
B.
Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating
Seal.
C.
Ceiling Ventilators shall be UL listed and CSA Certified.
D.
Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
E.
Performance Base: Sea level conditions.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXHAUST FANS
233860-2
F.
2.4
A.
Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas.
CONSTRUCTION
Fan shall be direct drive, forward curved, centrifugal blower type. Fan wheel and scroll shall
be constructed of galvanized steel. The housing shall be constructed of galvanized steel and
acoustically insulated for quiet operation. An intergral aluminum backdraft damper shall be
standard. A terminal box with cord, plug and receptacle shall be provided to facilitate
removal of complete fan wheel and motor assembly without disturbing the ductwork. The
motor shall be permanently lubricated with built in thermal overload protection and shall be
factory tested prior to shipment. The ceiling ventilators shall be furnished standard with a
powder-painted white grille.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install fans as with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads.
C.
Install woven glass fiber with neoprene coating flexible connections between fan inlet and
discharge ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch
flex between ductwork and fan while running.
D.
Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.
END OF SECTION 233860
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXHAUST FANS
233860-3
SECTION 233890 - DUCTWORK
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
STIPULATIONS
A.
The specifications sections "General Conditions," "Special Requirements," and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all Division 1 and 2 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
A.
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
Metal ductwork.
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel.
B.
ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.
C.
ASTM A 366 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality.
D.
ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the
Hot-Dip Process.
E.
ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Lock Forming
Quality.
F.
AWS D9.1 - Welding of Sheet Metal.
G.
NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
H.
SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
I.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
J.
UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DUCTWORK
233890-1
1.4
A.
1.5
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. Size round
ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent
rectangular and round ducts.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and
configuration prior to start of work for 4 inch pressure class and higher systems.
B.
Product Data: Provide data for duct materials duct connectors.
1.6
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years
documented experience.
1.7
A.
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant
manufacturers.
B.
Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealants.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
MATERIALS
All ductwork shall be galvanized steel ducts: ASTM A525 and ASTM A527 galvanized steel
sheet, lock-forming quality, having G60 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90.
DUCTWORK FABRICATION
Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing
for operating pressures indicated.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DUCTWORK
233890-2
B.
Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on
centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning
vanes.
C.
Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;
maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence
downstream.
D.
Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct
gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint,
brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints.
E.
Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree
conical tee connections may be used.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible.
B.
Duct Sizes are inside clear dimensions.
C.
Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
D.
Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
E.
During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open
ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
3.2
A.
CLEANING
Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust.
To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be
harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.
END OF SECTION 233890
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DUCTWORK
233890-3
SECTION 233990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
STIPULATIONS
A.
The specifications sections "General Conditions," "Special Requirements," and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all Division 1 and 2 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
AABC - National Standards for Total System Balance.
B.
ADC - Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers.
C.
ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building
Heating, Ventilation, Air-conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.
D.
NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems.
E.
SMACNA - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting,
and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
B.
Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final
copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
C.
Provide reports in, letter size, 3-ring or spiral binder manuals, complete with index page and
indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with
air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat
locations.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
Not used
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
233990-1
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the
following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
Duct systems are clean of debris.
Fans are rotating correctly.
Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
Air outlets are installed and connected.
Duct system leakage is minimized.
B.
Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services
which prevent system balance.
C.
Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
3.4
PREPARATION
Provide additional balancing devices as required.
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to
space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
ADJUSTING
A.
Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
B.
Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing
settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
C.
After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such
disruption has been rectified.
D.
Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing
doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
E.
At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or
areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner.
F.
Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit
report.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
233990-2
3.5
AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A.
Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design exhaust air
quantities at site altitude.
B.
Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
C.
Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable
drafts and noise.
D.
Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do not
create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal
devices such as dampers and splitters.
3.6
A.
SCHEDULES
Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
Gas Furnace
B.
Report Forms
1.
Title Page:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
Summary Comments:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
Project name
Project location
Project Architect
Project Engineer
Project Contractor
Project altitude
Report date
Design versus final performance
Notable characteristics of system
Description of systems operation sequence
Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building
pressurization
Nomenclature used throughout report
Test conditions
Instrument List:
a.
b.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Instrument
Manufacturer
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
233990-3
c.
d.
e.
f.
6.
Model number
Serial number
Range
Calibration date
Air Distribution Test Sheet:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Air terminal number
Room number/location
Terminal type
Terminal size
Area factor
Design velocity
Design air flow
Test (final) velocity
Test (final) air flow
Percent of design air flow
END OF SECTION 233990
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
233990-4
SECTION 262100 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
1.2
STIPULATIONS
A.
The specifications sections "General Conditions," "Special Requirements," and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the
same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
GENERAL
A.
1.3
Refer to Division 1. Read thoroughly.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work in this Division of the specifications covers all items relating to work under the
ELECTRICAL, contract work, and every part herein is binding upon the Contractor.
B.
The work shown is intended to include a proper ELECTRICAL system for the Spring
Garden Renovation - Phase 2 as shown on plans and as specified herein. All labor,
equipment, materials, and accessories for a complete and proper installation as
hereinafter specified, or as shown on plans, or as may be required for a proper system
shall be furnished under this Contract. The contractor must coordinate with PECO all
requirements.
C.
WORK DESCRIPTION
1.
In general, the work shall consist of but not necessarily be limited to the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Rough in and make final connections to equipment furnished by Owner
or by other Trades.
Provide new lighting fixtures with lamps, switches, and other controls
for areas shown on the Drawings.
Provide receptacles, lights and switches for all attic spaces, crawl
spaces, storage rooms and furnace rooms.
Provide branch circuit wiring from local lighting and power panels for all
general light and power circuits.
Provide new emergency lighting fixtures, circuits and distribution
equipment as shown on the Drawings.
Provide wiring of HVAC systems for same to the extent shown on the
Drawings, or described elsewhere in these Specifications.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
262100-1
g.
h.
i.
k.
m.
n.
o.
D.
WORK INCLUDED
1.
In addition to work described above under WORK DESCRIPTION, the work
shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
1.4
Provide temporary service for construction in accordance with general
conditions or Division 1.
Provide smoke detectors, hard wired, as indicated.
Provide outlets for miscellaneous communication systems as
indicated.
Provide new 125 amp services to all residences as required.
Coordinate with local utility company for all requirements.
Provide new telephone devices and distribution system.
Provide new cable television devices and distribution systems.
Rigging of equipment and materials related to the Electrical Work.
Panel directories for lighting and power distribution panels. See
Section: PANELBOARDS.
Lamping of all lighting fixtures.
Providing for electrical inspection of all new electrical work.
Testing and energizing as specified below.
Miscellaneous steel and hangers required for support of electrical
equipment.
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
The drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be
performed. However, it is not intended that they show every pipe fitting or
appurtenances required for a complete installation. Exact locations of
equipment and points of termination shall be approved by the Professional.
Should it be found that any system or equipment cannot be installed as shown
on the drawings, the Professional shall be consulted before installing or making
changes to the layout.
Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all
offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. The Contractor shall
carefully investigate the plumbing, electrical, structural and finish conditions
that would affect the work to be performed and shall arrange such work
accordingly, furnishing required ductwork and/or piping offsets, fittings, and
accessories to meet such conditions.
The drawings and specifications are intended to function as a common set of
documents. Anything shown on the drawings but not in the specifications, or
mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the drawings, shall be
equally binding as if both noted on the drawings and called for in the
specifications.
If there is a conflict between drawings and specifications, the contractor is to
notify the design professional in writing for clarification before bidding. If no
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
262100-2
such notification is made, the contractor shall be responsible to provide the
product and/or service of the more stringent requirement.
B.
Installation:
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.5
Refer to Division 1. Read thoroughly.
RECORDS DRAWINGS
A.
1.6
Refer to Division 1. Read thoroughly.
FAMILIARITY WITH CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS
A.
General:
1.
B.
C.
The Contractor's responsibility, prior to submitting his bid on this Project, is to
satisfy himself as to the nature and location of the work, the existing conditions,
and the quality and quantity of the materials which will be required, under this
Contract.
Execution:
1.
1.7
The drawings must be followed as closely as circumstances will permit,
however, the Contractor will be held responsible for the proper installation of all
materials and equipment required for a complete installation within the intent
and meaning of the Contract Documents.
The Contractor must be thoroughly familiarized with the specifications and
drawings in order to clearly understand the responsibility in relationship to the
work to be performed under this Contract. The Contractor must perform and
plan work so as to permit the use of the building at the earliest possible date.
No measurement of a drawing by scale shall be used as a working dimension.
Working measurements shall be taken from figured dimensions and survey of
actual condition.
Failure to make an on-site inspection prior to submitting a bid, or failure to
comply with any or all of the requirements herein will not relieve the Contractor
from the responsibilities of properly estimating the requirements of the work nor
from the responsibility for the performance of the provisions of this Contract.
Refer to Instructions to Bidders and General Conditions.
PERMITS, TESTS, FEES AND INSPECTION
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible to obtain and pay for all permits, pay all deposits
and fees necessary for the installation tests and inspection of all work provided under
16000 specifications. These tests shall be conducted as required by the regulations of
the local and/or state authorities, having jurisdiction.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
262100-3
1.9
B.
Fees shall include connection charges, construction cost and other such charges by
utility companies or service providers. Ascertain such charges during bidding and
include in bid price.
C.
Refer to Division 1 for further requirements.
LOCATIONS
A.
1.10
1.11
LINES AND GRADES
A.
The Contractor shall lay out his work, establishing heights and grades for all exterior
and interior piping and duct work included in these specifications in strict accordance
with the intent of the drawings, the physical conditions of the building and the finished
site grades. He shall be responsible for the accuracy of such heights and grades and
that they meet all physical conditions of the building and the requirements of these
specifications.
B.
Refer to Division 1.
PUMPING
A.
1.12
Provide pumping equipment to pump all water to prevent it from collecting in trenches,
basement areas and any other excavation necessary to carry out contract
requirements. Prepare run-off trenches as required to pump water into and use surplus
earth to form dam at top of excavation to run back surface water.
CHASES AND SOFFITS
A.
1.13
The Contractor shall notify the Design Professional and request for detailed and
specific information regarding the location and size of all equipment, as the final or
required location and size may differ from that indicated on the drawings. Any material
or equipment improperly placed because of the Contractor's failure to obtain this
information shall be relocated and reinstalled without additional expense to the Owner.
Refer to Division 1.
CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
A.
The Contractor shall provide all openings or chases for the installation of this contract's
work.
B.
The Contractor shall set all sleeves, hangers and anchors required for the work
document on contract drawings and he will be responsible for their proper and
permanent installation.
C.
The Contractor shall be responsible for sealing around openings in fire-rated
separations where such openings were provided for equipment installed under his
contract, i.e. piping. Such seals shall be installed to maintain the full fire rating of the
separation.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
262100-4
1.14
1.15
D.
Cutting shall not cause damage to the building or leave unsightly surfaces which
cannot be concealed by plates, escutcheons or other construction. Where such
unsightly conditions are caused by the Contractor, he shall be required, at his own
expense, to repair the damaged areas.
E.
All patching or repair of fireproofing due to cutting by the Contractor shall be performed
under and included with the work of the Contractor. Such patching or repair shall be
paid for by the Contractor.
F.
No cutting may impair the strength of the building construction shall be done. No holes
may be drilled in or attachments welded to the beams or other structural members
without prior approval from the Owners representative. All work shall be done by
mechanics skilled in their trade.
G.
For standard of quality for patching, repair and refinishing, comply with requirements of
Divisions 1 through 14.
FLASHING AND ROOFING WORK
A.
This contractor shall coordinate with the general contractor all cutting and patching and
sealing of roofs as required for the installation of all work under this Contract. This
contractor shall perform all cutting and the general contractor shall perform all
patching, sealings, flashing and finish roofing as required. The general contractor will
perform and be responsible for the integrity of the roof.
B.
The general contractor bears the complete responsibility for maintaining and obtaining
the watertight integrity of the affected areas of the roofs both during and after the
completions of construction.
C.
The general contractor shall provide all base flashings, counter flashings and applied
roofing materials necessary to properly flash and seal the roofs as required and to
prevent any water or moisture leakage whatsoever from occurring as a result of this
work. This contractor shall provide other flashing necessary to perform a proper
installation.
D.
This contractor must exercise extreme care so as not to damage roofs while working
thereon and he shall provide protection planking and plywood as required to achieve
this result. Any damage to the roofs and their watertight integrity caused as a result of
work being under this contract shall be properly repaired by the General Contractor at
the expense of this contractor to the satisfaction of and at no cost to the Owner.
E.
Refer to Division 7 for further requirements.
PRUDENT WORK-PRACTICE AND PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND PERSONNEL
A.
This contractor shall expedite the work of a specific area, section or part of the project
to make provision for, or protect equipment, or to permit the installation of another part
of the work. Refer to Division 1 for coordination and scheduling requirements.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
262100-5
B.
Before any piping, conduit, equipment, devices, controls, and supports are installed,
the Contractor shall check field conditions to eliminate any possible interference.
C.
Where two items of equipment, devices, piping, conduits, supporting metal work,
hangers, pull boxes, outlets, or controls are shown on any of the drawings in the same
location, adjustments shall be made. These adjustments shall be made through
coordination between the contractor and professional prior to the installation of any
work. The modifying changes shall be accomplished within the same space assigned
for such construction and at no additional cost to the Owner. All necessary offsets,
bends, turns, modifications in piping, ductwork and conduit devices required to install
the work without interference with other items or structure shall be provided and
installed without additional cost to the Owner.
D.
Where equipment is indicated on the drawings it shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to install the equipment, its control or operational devices, with sufficient
space provided for proper operation and maintenance.
E.
All equipment, devices, controls, and motors shall be tightly covered and protected
during construction and up to the time of operation. The protection shall be arranged
and be of such design as to prevent damage from infiltration of dust, dirt, debris,
moisture, chemicals or water. All pipe, including electrical conduit, shall be capped or
plugged during installation with temporary dust-tight caps. The Contractor shall be
responsible for damage or breakage to his fixtures and equipment and shall make
good such damaged items at no cost to the Owner.
F.
All surfaces, either finished, in preparation for finishing or finish material application,
shall be protected against damage from welding, cutting, burning, soldering or similar
construction activities. This protection shall be accomplished by care in operations,
covering and shielding. Special care shall be directed to exposed finished masonry,
metal or wood surfaces, and painted surfaces. Corrective measures required shall be
accomplished by the Contractor causing the damage, and at no cost to the owner.
The protective coverings and coatings shall be maintained, and until the work is ready
for acceptance by the Engineer.
G.
All exposed polished metal fittings, parts and devices, shall have a protective coating
applied and maintained during the course of construction, and shall not be installed
until adjoining tile or masonry work has been finally acid cleaned.
H.
Install temporary screens at all strainers or similar cleaning devices in the installation.
At the completion of the work and just prior to acceptance of the system by the agency,
remove the temporary screens and install new and final screens. The temporary
screens shall be given to the agency at the time of replacement.
I.
Provide suitable permanent safety guards for all pulleys, belt drives, centrifugal
equipment and rotating parts, of the various items or equipment provided under this
Contract. Requirements of the City of Philadelphia, the State of PA and OSHA shall be
met.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
262100-6
J.
1.16
1.17
The guards and safety devices not noted on the drawings but required by regulations
or agencies having jurisdiction shall be included as part of the project requirements.
INSTALLATION PROVISIONS
A.
Install all equipment, and piping so as to preserve access to all fittings, valves and
accessories. In general, piping shall be concealed unless otherwise indicated on the
plans, but when exposed it shall be run so as to allow maximum headroom consistent
with proper pitch. Piping and ducts shall not be installed in front of or interfere with any
light, opening, door, window or equipment. Headroom in front of openings, doors or
windows shall not be less than the top of the opening.
B.
All piping, valves, and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work to
permit a clearance of not less than 1" between the finished covering and all adjacent
work.
C.
Where required to allow clearance for electrical conduits, beams, and piping and to
avoid interference with other work, to increase the headroom under pipes or to improve
appearance of the pipe work or ducts the Contractor shall offset the pipes as directed
by the Engineer and properly drain and drip same where necessary. The contractor
shall provide the necessary special pipe fittings to secure the necessary offsets and
maintain good liquid flow.
D.
Pipes carrying liquids or liquid vapors shall not be installed in electrical equipment
rooms unless utilized for fire protection requirements. Pipes shall not be installed over,
around, in front of, in back of, or below electrical controls, panels, switches, terminals,
boxes or similar electrical equipment. Drip pans will not be permitted under any
circumstances around electrical equipment.
MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP
A.
All work shall be installed in a first class, neat and workmanlike manner by mechanics
skilled in the trade involved. All details of the installation shall be mechanically and
electrically correct. Should the Design Professional direct removal, change, or
installation of any equipments or systems not installed in a neat and workmanlike
manner, such charges shall be made by the Electrical Contractor at no expense to the
Owner.
B.
Equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions for
type and capacity of each piece of equipment used. The Contractor shall obtain these
instructions from the manufacturer and these instructions shall be considered part of
these Specifications.
C.
Drawings and specifications have been prepared with best knowledge of conditions
available at the time of design. If any obscurities or discrepancies exist, they shall be
brought to the attention of the Design Professional before bids are submitted. If they
are not discovered before bids are submitted, the Design Professional shall be notified
and shall render decision. This decision shall be final.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
262100-7
1.
D.
Drawings and Specifications are intended to be complementary; items
described or shown in one but not both are to be furnished as if fully shown or
described in both locations.
Drawings are generally indicative of the work to be installed, but do not indicate all
bends, fittings, boxes, and specialties which may be required, or the exact locations of
all conduits. Contractor shall investigate structure and finish conditions affecting his
work and arrange his work accordingly, furnishing such fittings as may be required to
meet such conditions. Contractor is responsible for exercising proper judgment to
arrange his work and materials so as to avoid interference with other trades.
1.
2.
3.
4.
The essentially diagrammatic nature of drawings shall not be interpreted as
reason to redesign project. While raceways shall be installed as required by
local conditions rather than exactly as shown, all outlets indicated on in circuit
shall be so installed. No reduction in size or number of raceways will be
permitted, (except that it shall be permissible to "gang" two or three sequentially
phased 20 ampere branch circuits to form a single phase, three-wire, or three
phase, four-wire multi-wire branch circuit, per NEC. In general, number of wires
in each raceway has not been indicated, but shall be provided as required.
Numbering of circuits is for convenience only, and bears no necessary relation
to circuit protectors in panel boards.
Riser diagrams, details, and schematics generally indicate wiring to be used in
various systems involved. This information may or may not be duplicated on
the plans, but equipment shown on either plans or riser diagrams and
schematics shall be provided as if shown on both.
All grades, elevations, dimensions and clearances of equipment shown on
drawings are approximate and shall be verified at site.
Where work or equipment is referred to in singular terms, such reference shall
be deemed to apply to as many items of work or equipment as required to
complete entire installation.
E.
Electrical junction boxes, pull boxes, panel boards, switches and controls and other
apparatus requiring periodic maintenance and operation shall be accessible.
F.
General:
1.
2.
G.
All details of the installation shall be mechanically and electrically correct, and
the mechanical and electrical equipment shall operate without objectionable
noise or vibration.
Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall bear the label of approval
of Underwriter Laboratories, Inc.
Materials and Equipment:
1.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
All materials and equipment furnished under this contract shall be new,
American made and shall conform to the grade, quality and standards
specified herein. Major items of equipment shall be the latest and standard
product, as advertised in printed catalogs by reputable manufacturers for the
purpose intended and shall have replacement parts readily available.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
262100-8
2.
3.
H.
Workmanship:
1.
2.
I.
1.18
1.19
1.20
All equipment or apparatus of any one system must be the product of one
manufacturer, or equivalent products of a number of manufacturers which are
suitable for use in a unified or assembled system. All equipment shall be
installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
Mechanical fastenings used throughout on the equipment or parts subject to
wear and replacement shall be of a type capable of removal and replacement
without physical deformation of the equipment.
All manufactured articles, material, and equipment shall be applied, installed,
connected, erected, adjusted, cleaned, and conditioned, in accordance with
the manufacturer's directions, unless hereinafter specified otherwise. The
Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining such instructions from the
suppliers.
Equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions for type and capacity of each piece of equipment. The Contractor
shall obtain these instructions from the manufacturer and such instructions
shall be considered a part of these specifications. Type, capacity and
application of equipment shall be suitable and capable of satisfactory
operation for the purpose intended in the Mechanical Systems.
Refer to Division 1.
PROTECTION OF SERVICES AND EQUIPMENT
A.
The Contractor, at his own expense, shall repair, replace and maintain in service any
utilities, facilities or services (underground, overground, interior or exterior) damaged,
broken, or otherwise rendered inoperative during the course of construction due to fault
or neglect on the part of the Contractor.
B.
Refer to Section 01012 for further requirements.
INTERRUPTION OF SERVICES
A.
The Contractor shall schedule his work to avoid any major interruption of any utility
services. Interruption of services shall be done during overtime if necessary at no
additional cost to the Owner.
B.
Refer to Division 1 for further requirements.
TESTING AND ENERGIZING
A.
On completion of the installation and wiring covered by this Specification of the
installation shall be thoroughly proved free from grounds and short circuits, and left
ready for operation. Necessary adjustments to all equipment shall be made in
cooperation with the manufacturer.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
262100-9
1.21
1.22
B.
Balance all three-phase panels to within at least ten percent (10%). Submit a report of
current readings obtained for each panel after balancing has been completed.
C.
Test all special systems or equipments for proper operation as described in the
respective specification sections.
D.
Test all motors for proper rotation.
E.
Indicate by letter on Company letterhead that all the above testing has been
successfully completed.
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT BY OTHERS
A.
All electrical equipment furnished and installed under contracts other than the Electrical
Contract, will be furnished with the full complement of control equipment, starters,
control wiring conduit and all other items necessary for satisfactory operation.
B.
The Electrical Contractor shall provide disconnect switches for all motor driven
equipment with starters not in sight of panel-board, except when combination motor
starters are furnished under other contracts. Refer to HVAC and Plumbing drawings for
such combination starters. The Electrical Contractor shall provide disconnect switches
at motors when motors are located out of sight of starters or where otherwise required
by National Electrical Code.
C.
The Electrical Contractor shall complete electrical power connections through the
disconnect, starter and motor terminals. He shall be responsible for final power
connections.
D.
The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install a thermal overload switch for each
single phase motor except where units are furnished with a built-in thermal protection,
in which case he shall furnish and install a single pole switch, with or without pilot light
as required.
E.
The Electrical Contractor shall complete all power wiring for single and/or phase
equipment, through the disconnect and/or the thermal cutouts and local control
stations to the equipment as required.
INSERTS AND FASTENERS
A.
General:
1.
2.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
This section describes methods and materials for various standard types of
construction for the guidance and establishment of the minimum requirements.
However, if required, provide fasteners in modified form to suit other types of
construction and adopt the method most applicable to the problem and with
approval of the Professional.
Provide all required inserts or fasteners for the various types of construction
encountered in the project.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
262100-10
3.
B.
Inserts and fasteners hereinafter described shall be for hangers, supports,
anchors, guides, braces, angle clips, brackets, controls, operators, drives,
electrical controls, electrical devices, boxes, cabinets and equipment and
fixtures. Inserts and fasteners shall be provided by the Contractor.
Fasteners:
1.
In cases where inserts have been inadvertently omitted or required in existing
construction, the fastening shall be accomplished by means of approved lead
sheathed expansion bolts.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
1.23
Wood plugs shall not be used in any case.
Expansion shields in concrete slabs shall not be loaded more than
their maximum design capacity and never more than 200 pounds per
bolt.
Bolts used with the lead expansion shields shall be cadmium plated.
Where roofing or floors are supported by structural steel members, it will be
necessary to support piping, conduit, devices, and equipment by suitable
structural steel members, or fabricated supports.
Where guides or anchors are noted on the drawings, provision shall be made
for the proper inserts or fastenings to structural members, deck or floor
material.
C.
Drop-in wedge anchor bolts or self-drilling anchors may be used in place of hook bolts.
Minimum embedment in concrete of wedge anchor bolts shall be in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions. Wedge anchor bolts shall be manufacturer by Phillip Drill
Co. or USM Corp. Self-drilling anchors shall be manufactured by Phillips Drill Co.
D.
After equipment is set in place and bolted down, any space between equipment base
and floor slab or foundation shall be completely filled with non-shrink grout equal to
Master Builders Co., Ltd. Embeco 153 grout.
E.
Refer to Division 1 for further requirements.
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL AND ACCESSORIES
A.
The Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary lumber, steel angles, channels,
plates, pipe, rods, nuts, bolts, etc., as shown on plans, and as specified or as may be
required for complete and proper installation of all systems. All material and
workmanship shall be of the best quality and shall be installed in accordance with the
best practices of the trade.
B.
The Contractor shall provide all materials, equipment, supplies and labor necessary to
construct all structural steel support work shown on the drawings and as hereinafter
specified, and as may be required for the installation of the equipment under this
Contract.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
262100-11
1.24
CONNECTIONS
A.
1.25
EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN EXPOSED MASONRY
A.
1.26
1.27
The points of connections and termination of the work under this specification are
shown on the drawings or stated in the specifications, but in case of doubt as to such
points of connections or terminations, the decision of the Professional shall be final.
Where equipment, devices, access panels, radiation enclosure, and similar items of
mechanical construction are installed in exposed masonry construction, utilize and
submit for approval items of such size, height, and arrangement as to conform to the
corresponding masonry unit. Provide the necessary offsets, adjustments and
relocations necessary to conform with the instructions of the Construction Manager as
to the final location of the equipment item in the exposed masonry.
COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
A.
Electrical Contractor shall carefully examine the drawings of all other trades for
equipment requiring electrical connection, and shall ascertain that all electrical
characteristics of equipment scheduled thereon matches the service available. If any
discrepancies are noted, he shall immediately refer to Design Professional for
resolution. If characteristics are correct, the Electrical Contractor is responsible for
ascertaining method of connection, "rough-in" dimensions, correct plug and receptacle
configurations, etc. While Design Professional has made every effort to provide such
information as is known at the time of the design, Contractor shall obtain final data from
shop drawings before proceeding.
B.
For all equipment of other trades which electrical characteristics are not scheduled on
drawings of that trade, the Electrical Contractor shall assume the responsibility of
notifying the Contractor; furnishing such equipment as to the characteristics required.
The Electrical Contractor will be held responsible for correction of all problems arising
from failure to do so.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A.
All panels, relays, contactors, starters, circuit breakers, safety switches, or similar items
shall be identified by equipment name, function, and/or control. Unless otherwise
noted, tags shall be engraved plastic black field with white letters. Size of nameplate
shall be determined to fit the individual conditions. Nameplates shall be securely and
permanently mounted. Use sheet metal screws, drive rivets, or "pop" rivets. Cement or
adhesive strips will not be accepted. Nameplates are not required in residences or
outside of distribution panels.
B.
A schedule of nameplates proposed to be used shall be submitted for approval, and
no identification material shall be ordered until approval is received.
C.
Identify electrical conductors in splice or pull boxes, panels, cabinets, or other locations
with round or square tags made of heavy paper and fastened with nylon or cotton cord.
Such identification shall indicate circuit number; gauge of conductors; and either
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
262100-12
designation (at source location) or source (at destination and intermediate locations).
Lace all conductors of one circuit together prior to tagging.
1.28
ACCESS DOORS INTEGRAL WITH BUILDING STRUCTURE
A.
General:
1.
2.
B.
Installation:
1.
2.
C.
Provide access doors in ceiling, walls, partitions and floors for access to
valves, traps, expansion joints, devices, appurtenances, regulators, controls,
and electrical controls or devices for code compliance so that full access for
operation, inspection, and maintenance is assured.
The doors shall be of sufficient size to permit removal of item or clearance to
perform maintenance, but in no case less than 12" x 16".
Location of access doors shall be determined by the Electrical Contractor and
installed by the General Contractor. Coordination by the electrical contractor
for this procedure is critical.
Access doors shall be arranged so they can be integrated into the surface
pattern, e.g., recessed panel with wire lath or tile. Bottom of access doors shall
not be lower than the top of base, or a minimum of 6" above floor. Tops and/or
side of access panels shall be a minimum of 6" from the ceiling or opening or
from the edge of a wall return.
Product:
1.
Access doors in fire rated ceiling/floor and ceiling/roof assembly shall be "BLabel" and have a UL 1-1/2 hour (250 deg. F rating) for both door and frame.
Maximum size shall be 20" x 20" or 400 square inches in area.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Access doors without UL label:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Frame - 16 gauge minimum steel.
Panel - 14 gauge minimum steel.
Pre-Finished by Manufacturer in white baked-on enamel.
Hinge - Continuous type, one per door.
Lock - Flush-face, key operated, self-latching cylinder locks.
Frame - 16 gauge minimum steel.
Panel - 14 gauge minimum steel.
Pre-Finished by Manufacturer in white baked-on enamel.
Hinges - Concealed spring hinges. Door to open 175 degrees
minimum.
Lock - Flush-face, key operated, self-latching cylinder locks.
All access doors shall be keyed alike and provided with casing beads, frame
flange, or masonry anchor, as required, for mounting.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
262100-13
4.
1.29
1.30
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all
measurements at the building and he shall be held responsible for the correctness of
same.
B.
No extra compensation will be allowed on account of difference between actual
dimensions and measurements and those indicated on the drawings.
C.
Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Professional for
consideration before proceeding with the work.
CHANGES FROM CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A.
1.31
Refer to Division 1 and Division 8 for further requirements.
Changes from the contract drawings necessary to make the work of the Contractor
conform to the building as constructed, or to fit the work of other contractors, or to
conform to the rules and/or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, shall be made
by the Contractor at his own expense.
SHOP DRAWING SUBMISSIONS
A.
General:
1.
The Contractor shall submit to the Professional in accordance with Division 1.
B.
Furnish shop drawings, catalog cuts, performance data and other required data to the
Design Professional for approval for all material and equipment specified hereinafter.
Sufficient data shall be submitted to show compliance with the requirements of the
plans and specifications. All shop drawings submitted shall be first checked and
corrected before submitting for approval. Approval for shop drawings by the Design
Professional will not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions
therein. All such errors or omissions must be made good by the Contractor
irrespective of any approval by the Design Professional.
C.
On submissions beyond the initial one, clearly identify changes made from the initial
submittal other than those requested by the Design Professional will review only those
changes he requested and those identified by the Contractor.
D.
Shop drawings required shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Shop drawings, cuts and catalogue information showing appearance,
dimensions, performance, weight, etc., of all equipment, fixtures,
appurtenances, etc.
Schedules of all materials showing type and manufacturer.
Wiring diagrams and schematics for equipment.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
262100-14
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.32
Lighting fixtures, panels and protective devices, showing appearance, weight,
dimensions, finishes, etc.
All special equipment and systems.
Any special constructions.
Other shop drawings as may be requested.
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Equipment may be shown or specified in several ways:
1.
Several manufacturers and model numbers listed; or one manufacturer and
model number, followed by (mfr A), (mfr B), (mfr C), or words similar respect.
a.
b.
c.
3.
B.
If one manufacturer is listed in the specifications or drawings that
manufacturer shall be considered the basis of design. If more than one
is so listed the first manufacturer named in the Specification shall be
considered the basis of design.
Where manufacturers or suppliers name, style and catalog numbers
are mentioned in the description of material and equipment in the
specifications or on the drawings, it is to be understood that they are
for the purpose of setting a standard.
If Contractor elects to furnish equipment other than the basis of design,
he shall verify capacities, physical size weight, electrical requirements,
methods of connection to other parts of the system, and all other
relevant data. Contractor shall be responsible for informing the Design
Professional of all changes required to other equipment, spaces,
structure or systems in order to install the substituted equipment. He
shall furnish all required shop drawings or sketches required for Design
Professional to evaluate the required changes, and shall be
responsible for all costs associated with such changes, including costs
of design or engineering, if such are necessary, and costs of other
trades.
Where manufacturers or suppliers names are listed in conjunction with the
manufacturer or supplier that is basis of design, they are given to approve the
firm name only. Equipment or material submitted by such firms must meet the
detailed technical specifications written for the respective item. Contractor
shall be responsible for verifying capacities, physical sizes, weights, electrical
requirements, methods of connection to other parts of the system, etc.
Contractor shall furnish all required shop drawings for equipment, and for its
connection and installation.
If any substituted items are submitted after contracts have been awarded, and there is
any question of equality of such items, samples may be required to be submitted both
for the item specified to the entire satisfaction of the Design Professional. In no case
shall additional remuneration be allowed because of the rejection of a substitute.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
262100-15
1.33
1.34
1.35
C.
When the equipment is relocated to a place other than shown on the drawings, or when
equipment other than that specified is used, the Contractor shall pay the extra cost
required revisions such as structural steel, concrete, electrical, piping etc.
D.
The Design Professionals costs to evaluate substitutions and to revise Drawings and
specifications may be required to be paid by the Contractor should substitutions not be
in compliance with Division 1.
E.
Refer to Division 1 for further requirements.
CONCRETE
A.
This contractor shall be responsible for all concrete cutting, patching and replacement
as required and specified herein.
B.
Refer to Division 3 for all concrete requirements.
GUARANTEE
A.
The Contractor shall guarantee the workmanship, materials and equipment against
defects, leaks or non-operation for a period of one (1) year (unless specified
elsewhere). Defective workmanship shall be construed as meaning defective materials
or unsatisfactory installation and not to mean ordinary wear and tear.
B.
The Contractor shall pay for any repairs or replacements caused by defective
workmanship as construed herein within the period covered by the Guarantee.
C.
See General Conditions.
CLEAN-UP
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Once per week or more often as required, and whenever directed by the
Construction Manager, during the course of the work, the Contractor shall be
held responsible to clean all areas of this contractor’s work of debris and
rubbish which was left. The Contractor shall immediately remove water present
in any area, due to leaking fittings, broken pipe, etc. caused by defective
materials or improper installation by himself or his sub-contractors. Internal
and external areas of all equipment must be cleaned of all construction dust,
etc. prior to pre-final inspection.
Upon completion of his work and when directed by the Construction Manager,
the Contractor shall remove all dirt, foreign materials, stains and fingerprints
from all equipment, fixtures, panels, plates etc., installed under this contract.
Internal areas of all equipment must be cleaned of all construction dust, etc.
prior to pre-final and/or final inspection.
Refer to Division 1 for further requirements.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
262100-16
1.36
1.37
1.38
1.39
COVERING THE WORK
A.
No piping shall be insulated and/or enclosed in walls or ceilings until it has been
inspected, tested and accepted.
B.
If any piping is insulated and/or enclosed in walls or ceilings before it has been
inspected, tested and accepted, it shall be uncovered by the Contractor at his own
expense when so notified by the Professional.
C.
Schedule testing and inspection time as not to delay another prime contractors work.
ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL DEVICES
A.
All equipment under this contract, panels, contactors, circuit breakers, relays, motors,
safety switches, junction and pull boxes, control devices and similar items installed
under this project shall be identified by name, function and/or control. Included on
name plates shall be the voltage of the involved circuits. Name plates shall be at least
1" x 3" with characters not less than 1/4" high. They shall be made up of 2 laminated
black plastic sheets bonded with a middle sheet of white plastic and characters
engraved in the one black sheet to the depth of the white plastic. The Contractor shall
have the option to supply (in lieu of the above) #60 White Kromekote permanent labels
as manufactured by Specified Products, Inc., P.O. Box 8746, Milwaukee, WI 53227.
B.
The Contractor shall provide an indexed directory on typewritten chart(s) including
control drawings indicating the item or items controlled by each circuit.
C.
A typewritten list of name plates shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before
ordering same and the final copy framed and hung at the jobsite where directed by the
Engineer.
FIRE STOPPING
A.
Provide fire stopping material at pipe, equipment, cable, and tubing penetrations in fire
and smoke rated walls and floors. Fire stop material shall be applied to meet all fire
rating requirements. Fire stop material shall be as specified in Division 7. Fire stop
shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Refer to Division 7 for further requirements.
CONSTRUCTION RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Comply with requirements of Division 1 and General Conditions.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
NOT APPLICABLE
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
262100-17
PART 3 – EXECUTION
NOT APPLICABLE
END OF SECTION 262100
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
262100-18
SECTION 262110 - CONDUIT
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
STIPULATIONS
A.
The specifications sections "General Conditions," "Special Requirements," and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all Division 1 and 2 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Metal conduit.
B.
Flexible metal conduit.
C.
Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
D.
Electrical metallic tubing.
E.
Nonmetallic conduit.
F.
Fittings and conduit bodies.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 16130 - Boxes.
B.
Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
B.
ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
C.
ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable
Assemblies.
D.
ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E.
NECA "Standard of Installation."
F.
NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and
Intermediate Metal Conduit.
St. Boniface Affordable Housing
KSK #120054
CONDUIT
262110 - 1
G.
NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).
H.
NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
1.5
A.
1.6
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B.
Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquid-tight flexible metal
conduit, nonmetallic conduit fittings, conduit bodies.
1.7
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 16000.
B.
Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inches.
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. testing firm
acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site under provisions of Section 16000.
B.
Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
C.
Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide
appropriate covering.
D.
Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
1.10
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B.
Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
C.
Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route
as required to complete wiring system.
St. Boniface Affordable Housing
KSK #120054
CONDUIT
262110 - 2
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Minimum Size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified.
B.
Underground Installations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
More than Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use thick wall nonmetallic conduit.
Within Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit.
In or Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid galvanized steel conduit or thick wall nonmetallic
conduit.
Minimum Size: 1 inch.
C.
Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid galvanized steel conduit.
D.
Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid galvanized steel conduit.
2.2
METAL CONDUIT
A.
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B.
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
C.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.
2.3
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A.
Description: Interlocked steel construction.
B.
Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
2.4
LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A.
Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
B.
Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
2.5
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A.
Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
B.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel or compression set screw type.
2.6
A.
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40, 80 PVC.
St. Boniface Affordable Housing
KSK #120054
CONDUIT
262110 - 3
B.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
B.
Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
D.
Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis
hangers, and split hangers.
E.
Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel;
provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.
F.
Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces.
G.
Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary
supports
H.
Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
I.
Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
J.
Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
K.
Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
L.
Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
M.
Do not cross conduits in slab.
N.
Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
O.
Maintain 12 inch (300 mm) clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures
exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C).
P.
Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
Q.
Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
R.
Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic
conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in
fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
St. Boniface Affordable Housing
KSK #120054
CONDUIT
262110 - 4
S.
Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet
locations and to cast boxes.
T.
Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit
bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot
bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch (50 mm) size or provide factory
elbows.
U.
Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
V.
Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses
and expansion joints.
W.
Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
X.
Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
Y.
No exposed conduit on exterior walls.
3.2
A.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
materials and methods under the provisions of Section 16000.
END OF SECTION 262110
St. Boniface Affordable Housing
KSK #120054
CONDUIT
262110 - 5
SECTION 262112 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
STIPULATIONS
A.
The specifications sections "General Conditions," "Special Requirements," and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all Division 1 and 2 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Building wire and cable.
B.
Nonmetallic sheath cable.
C.
Wiring connectors and connections.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 16111 - Conduit.
B.
Section 16130 - Boxes.
1.4
A.
1.5
REFERENCES
ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 16000.
B.
Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type.
C.
Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained.
D.
Design Data: Indicate voltage drop and ampacity calculations for aluminum conductors
substituted for copper conductors.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
262112 - 1
1.5
A.
1.6
QUALIFICATIONS
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with
minimum three years documented experience.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. testing firm
acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B.
Conductor sizes are based on copper unless indicated as aluminum or "AL".
C.
Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire
and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. Include wire and cable lengths within 10
feet.
D.
Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact
routing and lengths required.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 16000.
B.
Determine required separation between cable and other work.
C.
Determine cable routing to avoid interference with other work.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
A.
Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
B.
Conductor: Copper
C.
Insulation Voltage Rating:
D.
Insulation:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
600 volts.
ANSI/NFPA 70, Type THHN.
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
262112 - 2
2.2
NONMETALLIC SHEATH CABLE
A.
Description: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type NM and NMC.
B.
Conductor: Copper.
C.
Insulation Voltage Rating:
D.
Insulation Temperature Rating:
E.
Insulation Material: Thermoplastic.
F.
Jacket: None.
600 volts.
90 degrees C.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
B.
Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
3.2
A.
3.3
PREPARATION
Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
WIRING METHODS
A.
Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN, XHHW
insulation, in raceway, metal clad cable (MC) or non-metalic sheath cable (NM). Where
concealed dry locations maybe affected by dampness or moisture such as bathrooms, use
raceway, metal clad (MC) or non-metallic sheath cable (NMC - installed with protective metal
plate).
B.
Exposed Dry Interior Locations:
Use only building wire, Type TW, THW, THHN/THWN,
XHHW insulation, in raceway or metal clad cable.
C.
Wet or Damp Interior Locations:
XHHW insulation, in raceway.
D.
Exterior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN XHHW insulation, in raceway.
E.
Underground Installations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN, XHHW insulation, in
raceway.
F.
See drawings for more detailed wiring methods.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Use only building wire, Type TW, THW, THHN/THWN,
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
262112 - 3
3.4
INSTALLATION
A.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.
C.
Use stranded conductors for control circuits.
D.
Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
E.
Use conductor not smaller than 22 AWG for control circuits.
F.
Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet.
G.
Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
H.
Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
I.
Protect exposed cable from damage.
J.
Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
K.
Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
L.
Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
M.
Make splices,taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible
temperature rise.
N.
Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape
uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating
of conductor.
O.
Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and
taps, 8 AWG and smaller.
P.
Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and
taps, 10 AWG and smaller.
Q.
No exposed conduit on exterior walls.
3.5
A.
3.6
A.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform field inspection and testing under provisions of Section 16000.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
262112 - 4
B.
Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
C.
Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with
manufacturer's recommended values.
D.
Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor.
END OF SECTION 262112
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
262112 - 5
SECTION 262113 - BOXES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
STIPULATIONS
A.
The specifications sections "General Conditions," "Special Requirements," and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all Division 1 and 2 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.
B.
Pull and junction boxes.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 16140 - Wiring Devices: Wall plates in finished areas, box service fittings.
B.
Section 16160 - Cabinets and Enclosures.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
NECA - Standard of Installation.
B.
NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
C.
NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
D.
NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports.
E.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
F.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT
A.
Section 16000 - General Requirements: Submittals for Project Closeout.
B.
Record actual locations and mounting heights of pull boxes on project record documents.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
BOXES
262113-1
1.5
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or a testing firm
acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and
indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
OUTLET BOXES
Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
1.
B.
2.2
Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment
supported; include 1/2-inch (13 mm) male fixture studs where required.
Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16140.
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A.
Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
B.
Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 16160.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
EXAMINATION
Verify locations of outlets in residences and work areas prior to rough-in.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install boxes in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.
B.
Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,
equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.
C.
Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated. The
electrical contractor shall mount all outlet boxes to clear all piping, radiation and valves for
mechanical and plumbing lines. The electrical contractor must coordinate rough-in
locations of all electrical devices with all trades before installation. If conflicts exist after
installation due to lack of coordination, devices will be relocated at no additional cost to
owner.
D.
Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.
Adjust box location up to 3 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
BOXES
262113-2
E.
Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140.
F.
Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.
G.
Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas
only.
H.
Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches (150)
mm from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
I.
Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
approved materials suitable for the application.
J.
Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches
and backsplashes.
K.
Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
L.
Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
M.
Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.
N.
Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only.
Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
O.
Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches
separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
P.
Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow
for surface finish thickness.
Q.
Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
R.
Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
S.
Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
T.
Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.
U.
Support boxes independently of conduit.
V.
Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
W.
Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
X.
Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.
Y.
Large Pull Boxes: Used screw cover enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted
cast metal box in other locations.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
BOXES
262113-3
Z.
3.3
A.
3.4
Coordinate installation of boxes with baseboard radiation.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
Coordinate installation of outlet box for equipment supplied by other trades.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
B.
Install knockout closures in unused box openings.
3.5
CLEANING
A.
Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris and other material.
B.
Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
END OF SECTION 262113
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
BOXES
262113-4
SECTION 262215 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
STIPULATIONS
A.
The specifications sections "General Conditions," "Special Requirements," and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the
same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all Division 1 and 2
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Grounding electrodes and conductors.
B.
Equipment grounding conductors.
C.
Bonding.
REFERENCES
A.
NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association).
B.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
C.
NFPA 99 - Health Care Facilities.
GROUNDING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Metal frame of the building.
B.
Concrete-encased electrode.
C.
Ground ring.
D.
Rod electrode.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.6
Grounding System Resistance: 25 ohms.
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Section 16000 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GROUNDING AND BONDING
262215 - 1
B.
1.7
1.8
1.9
Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections.
SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A.
Section 16000 - Submittals: Submittals for information.
B.
Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground.
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and
installation of Product.
SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT
A.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding
electrodes.
B.
Certificate of Compliance: Indicate approval of installation by authority having
jurisdiction.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities
within 100 miles of Project.
1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. testing firm
acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and
indicated.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
ROD ELECTRODES
A.
Material: Copper-clad steel.
B.
Diameter: 1/2 inch, 3/4 inch.
C.
Length: 10 feet.
MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturer: OZ/Gedney or approved equal.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GROUNDING AND BONDING
262215 - 2
B.
2.3
EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS
A.
2.4
Material: Bronze.
Manufacturers: Cadweld or approved equal.
WIRE
A.
Material: Stranded copper.
B.
Foundation Electrodes: 2/0, 4/0 AWG.
C.
Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Section 16000 - General Requirements. Verification of existing conditions prior to
beginning work.
B.
Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod
electrodes.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as
required to achieve specified resistance to ground.
B.
Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation
footing where indicated. Bond steel together.
C.
Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements.
D.
Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each
feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or
bushing.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B.
Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.
END OF SECTION 262215
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
GROUNDING AND BONDING
262215 - 3
SECTION 262217 - ELECTRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
STIPULATIONS
A.
The specifications sections "General Conditions," "Special Requirements," and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all Division 1 and 2 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
APPLICATION
Section 16000, ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, applies to this Section with
additions and modifications specified herein.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The Electrical Contractor shall provide a full complement of Energy Star rated fixtures and
required associated appurtenances including all lamps and accessory wiring. He shall
provide all labor and materials necessary to assemble, install and test the specified
equipment in the manner indicated. The word "fixture" indicated in this specification means
lighting fixture, complete.
REQUIREMENTS
Refer to Article "Substitutions" of Section 16000 and Section 01350. The lighting fixtures listed
in the Fixture Schedule constitute the basis of Design. They have been chosen for their ability
to meet the luminous environment requirements of the project, as well as for such other
characteristics as durability, security, appearance, etc.
1.
Other manufacturer's fixtures of same quality, appearance and performance may be
accepted at the sole discretion of the Design Professional. It is the responsibility of the
alternative manufacturer to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Design Professional
that the proposed substitute fixture is equal in all required respects, including
photometrically, to the Specified fixture.
2.
Substitution submittals shall consist of a physical description, photographic illustration,
dimensioned drawing and complete photometric and electric data of the proposed
lamp and luminary. Working samples of lamp and required luminary substitutions may
also be required for visual check of finish and operating characteristics. Photometric
reports must list the actual candela values of the luminary's distribution in at least three
of the planes. Candela curves, foot-candle and lumen tables and iso-foot-candle
contours alone are not acceptable.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELECTRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEMS
262217 - 1
3.
Judgment of Design Professional as to equality of Substitutions shall be final.
B.
Catalog numbers indicate the manufacturer and general type of fixture for each application,
but do not necessarily reflect all accessories and features that may be required for each
application to meet mounting requirements and other application conditions. Provide
accessories and features as are required for each fixture and show complete catalog
numbers in submittal data.
C.
Every lighting outlet shall have a lighting fixture unless otherwise directed. In instances where
a specified type of fixture has not been assigned to an outlet, provide a complete fixture of the
type and wattage designated for outlets of similar function and/or type as directed by the
Design Professional.
D.
Consult the room finish schedule as to the type of ceiling construction. Order the proper
fixture with hardware for installation in or on the specified ceiling. All recessed fixtures in
plaster ceilings shall include a plaster frame and a matte white trim finish, or trimless flange
as specified or described by catalogue number.
1.5
A.
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following for review:
1.
1.6
A.
Catalog cuts for each fixture type shown on drawings, complete with photometric data,
certified by recognized independent testing laboratory.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
See Article: Operating Instructions of Section 16000. Include therein:
1.
Complete set of approved fixture cuts and descriptive materials including all necessary
auxiliaries for proper installation and operation.
2.
Complete lamping data for each fixture type to include:
a)
Number and type of lamps used per fixture.
b)
Lamp wattage.
c)
ANSI code number.
d)
Ballast type (Where applicable).
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
LIGHTING FIXTURES
All light fixtures to be Energy Star rated.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELECTRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEMS
262217 - 2
B.
Refer to LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE on the drawings for lighting fixture specifications. A
manufacturer's standard fixture is designated on the drawing for each of the fixtures in order
to establish a standard of quality, a finish, and a desired effect. The catalog numbers used
for this designation are not intended to completely specify the fixture mounting requirements
and coordination of such mounting requirements and coordination of such mountings with
final finished ceiling. Such coordination is the responsibility of the Contractor. Provide air
handling type lighting fixtures where indicated on the project drawings.
B.
The fixture types indicated in the Fixture Schedule are keyed with the fixture type letters shown
on the drawings adjacent to or in the outlets.
C.
All plastic shielding shall be 100% virgin acrylic plastic unless specifically noted otherwise.
2.2
A.
2.3
BALLASTS
Ballasts for high intensity discharge lamps shall be UL and CSA listed, ETL and CBMcertified, high power factor type, manufactured and tested in strict accordance with NEMA
standards. Ballasts shall conform to ANSI 8824 Series Specifications, and meet UL Standard
1029. Indoor ballasts shall be thermally protected.
LAMPS
A.
All fixtures shall be complete with sizes specified. Lamp wattage and type shall be in
accordance with the wattage recommend by the fixture manufacturer. Lamps shall be of the
type required for the fixture and shall be as manufactured by General Electric Company,
Phillips, or Sylvania.
B.
Incandescent lamps shall be inside frosted extended service type (2500 hr.), rated 130 volts.
Special purpose lamps shall be of a type recommended by the fixture manufacturer for the
specific luminaire, or as noted in Fixture Schedule. Reflector lamps shall meet Federal
Lumens per-watt standards.
C.
High intensity discharge lamps shall be phosphor-coated unless noted.
D.
All inoperable lamps shall be replaced with new lamps during the course of construction, up
to and including the date of final acceptance of the area by the Owner.
E.
Lamps which fail within 90 days after acceptance shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
A.
LIGHTING FIXTURE MOUNTING
Fixtures and/or fixture outlet boxes shall be provided with hangers to adequately support
the complete weight of the fixture. Design of hangers and method of fastening other than
shown on the drawings or herein specified shall be submitted to the Design Professional
for approval. Provide outlet boxes as required for complete wiring and/or mounting of
lighting fixtures and lighting system.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELECTRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEMS
262217 - 3
B.
Fixtures mounted on outlet boxes shall be rigidly secured to a fixture stud in the outlet box.
Hickies or extension pieces shall be installed where required to facilitate proper installation.
C.
Unless otherwise directed, all pendant fixtures within the room type or area shall be installed
plumb and at a uniform height from the finished floor. Adjustment of height shall be made
during installation.
D.
Flush mounted recessed fixtures shall be installed so as to complete eliminate light leakage
between the frame and the finished surface. Fixture housing, frame or canopy shall provide a
suitable cover for the fixture outlet box or fixture opening. Incandescent fixtures shall be
thermally-protected, or be listed for use without such protection.
E.
Fixtures shall be installed at mounting heights as shown on the drawings.
3.2
LIGHTING WIRING
A.
All wiring within fluorescent or HID fixtures and all wiring within the "tails" of recessed fixtures
shall be rated for a minimum of 90 degrees C. Fixture taps installed in "tails" for an individual
fixture may be #16 AWG (unless a larger size is required by fixture wattage). Taps supplying
more than one fixture shall be the same size as the branch circuit.
B.
No splice or tap will be permitted within an arm or stem, or exposed in fixture wiring interlaced
in fixture suspension. Wiring shall be continuous from the splice in the outlet box, to the
lamp-holder of an incandescent fixture or to the wireway or space provided in lighting fixtures
for necessary splices between lamp-holders.
C.
Connections of wiring to terminal screws or lamp-holders and other accessories must be
made in a neat and workmanlike manner and shall be electrically and mechanically secure
with no protruding, loose strands.
END OF SECTION 262217
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ELECTRICAL LIGHTING SYSTEMS
262217 - 4
SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
A.
1.3
Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. Compact fluorescent lamps in all
fixtures.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.
Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on
Drawings.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS
A.
Recessed Fixtures:
fixtures.
B.
Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
C.
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 1
D.
Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated.
prevent warping and sagging.
E.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed
to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling
accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
F.
Diffusers and Globes:
2.3
A.
Form and support to
1.
Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
2.
Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS
General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:
1.
2.
Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11.
Designed for type and quantity of lamps served.
B.
Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor,
Class P, and having automatic-reset thermal protection.
C.
Ballasts for Residential Applications: Fixtures designated as "Residential" may use lowpower-factor electronic ballasts having a Class B sound rating and total harmonic
distortion of approximately 30 percent.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS
Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with
ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be
designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:
EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with
UL 924.
1.
2.
3.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage
drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects
from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage
is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically
recharged and floated on charger.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 2
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.6
Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal
power and demonstrates unit operability.
LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures.
Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when
power is restored after an outage.
FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A.
T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches (1220 mm), 2800
initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average
rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.
B.
T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches (610 mm), 1300
initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average
rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K,
average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start unless otherwise
indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in
each fixture.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports.
C.
Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1.
2.
3.
Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit
swinging.
Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.
D.
Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.
E.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 3
3.2
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating
and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to
demonstrate compliance with standards.
END OF SECTION 265100
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 4
SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
A.
1.3
Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. Compact fluorescent lamps.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each luminaire, include data on features, accessories, and finishes.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B.
Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on
Drawings.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES
Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet
locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
B.
LER Tests Incandescent Fixtures:
NEMA LE 5A.
Where LER is specified, test according to
Lateral Light Distribution Patterns: Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light
distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
265600 - 1
C.
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
D.
Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated.
Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
E.
Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or
deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.
F.
Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to
heat, and UV radiation.
G.
Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light
distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.
H.
Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal
and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.
I.
Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and tested luminaire before shipping.
J.
Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes
Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
1.
2.
Surface Preparation:
Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent
Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair
paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill
scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPCSP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats
of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.
a.
K.
2.3
A.
Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors.
Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes
Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS
Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:
1.
2.
3.
Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F (Minus 29 Deg C) and Higher: Electromagnetic type
designed for use with indicated lamp types.
Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum.
Transient-Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2,
Category A or better.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
265600 - 2
B.
Low-Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballast
provided at temperatures minus 20 deg F (minus 29 deg C) and higher.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
A.
Install lamps in each luminaire.
B.
Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.
1.
C.
Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for
the application and approved by manufacturer.
Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment of
photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources, favoring
a north orientation.
END OF SECTION 265600
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
265600 - 3
SECTION 265800 - FIRE ALARM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
STIPULATIONS
A.
The specifications sections "General Conditions," "Special Requirements," and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all Division 1 and 2 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
Residential grade smoke detectors and strobes.
RELATED SECTIONS
Section 16000 - General Requirements
REFERENCES
A.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
B.
NFPA 72 - Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Protective Signaling Systems.
C.
ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act/Section 504.
D.
Philadelphia Fire Code - Latest Edition
E.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
F.
UFAS - Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
1.5
A.
1.6
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Residential grade smoke detectors: Smoke detectors shall be surface mounted on ceiling or
wall with 120 volt AC supply and 9 volt DC battery backup. Detectors shall have provisions for
wiring interconnection and shall be so connected for annunciation of other detectors within
each residence.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 16000.
B.
Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
FIRE ALARM
265800 - 1
C.
Test Reports: Indicate satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, installation, and starting of products.
1.7
A.
1.8
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Provide 1 set of reproducible of as built drawings.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Operation Data: Operating instructions.
B.
Maintenance Data: Maintenance and repair procedures.
1.9
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 50 miles
of Project.
B.
Installer: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience, and certified by the City of Philadelphia as a
fire alarm installer.
1.10
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70, NFPA 101, Philadelphia Fire Code, UFAS and the ADA.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by UL FM testing firm acceptable to authority having
jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Gentex (residential grade).
B.
Filex (residential grade).
C.
BRK (residential grade).
2.2
SMOKE DETECTOR WIRE AND CABLE
A.
Smoke Detector Power Branch Circuits: Building wire as specified in Section 16123.
B.
Initiating Device and Indicating Appliance Circuits: Power limited fire-protective signaling
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
FIRE ALARM
265800 - 2
cable, copper conductor, 300 volts insulation rated 105 degrees C. Power limited
fire-protective signaling cable classified for fire and smoke characteristics, copper conductor,
300 volts insulation rated 105 degrees C, suitable for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces
used as ducts, and plenums.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Use 16 AWG minimum size conductors for fire alarm detection and signal circuit conductors
unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer’s instructions. Install wiring in conduit.
C.
Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field inspection and testing shall be provided.
B.
Test in accordance with NFPA 72 and local fire department requirements.
3.3
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A.
Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 16000.
B.
Include services of certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final
connections, and system testing.
3.4
SMOKE DETECTOR WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE
A.
Provide fire alarm circuit conductors with insulation color coded as follows, or using colored
tape at each conductor termination and in each junction box.
B.
Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red, white.
3.5
A.
DEMONSTRATION
Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required responses to each.
END OF SECTION 265800
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
FIRE ALARM
265800 - 3
SECTION 266741 - TELEPHONE WIRING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
STIPULATIONS
A.
The specifications sections "General Conditions," "Special Requirements," and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all Division 1 and 2 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
Premises wiring and outlets.
RELATED SECTIONS
Section 16140 - Wiring Devices: Telephone outlet jacks.
REFERENCES
A.
EIA/TIA-568 - Commercial Building Wiring Standard.
B.
EIA/TIA-569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication Pathways and Spaces.
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.5
A.
1.6
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Residential Wiring: By electrical contractor from Network Interface Device or central
telephone panel at each building to all telephone outlets. Complete to each outlet, using wire
and cable as recommended by Verizon. This contractor shall pull Cat 5 wire to each outlet.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 16000 - General Requirements.
B.
Record actual locations and sizes of pathways and outlets.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Telephone Utility: Verizon
B.
Perform Work in accordance with telephone utility's rules and regulations.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TELEPHONE WIRING
266741 - 1
1.8
A.
1.9
QUALIFICATIONS
Installer: Company specializing in installing telephone premises wiring with minimum three
years documented experience.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and local telephone company.
B.
Furnish Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for purpose specified
and indicated.
1.10
A.
1.11
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Furnish service and maintenance of premises wiring for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish under provisions of Section 16000.
B.
Provide 10 telephone outlet jacks.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install wire and cable in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with
EIA/TIA 568.
B.
Support raceways, backboards, and cabinets under the provisions of Section 16000 - General
Requirements.
C.
Install pull-wire in each empty telephone conduit over ten feet in length or containing a bend.
END OF SECTION 266741
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TELEPHONE WIRING
266741 - 2
SECTION 266781 – CABLE TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
STIPULATIONS
A.
The specifications sections "General Conditions," "Special Requirements," and "General
Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same
force and effect as if printed herewith in full.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including all Division 1 and 2 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Television distribution equipment.
B.
Cable and accessories.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 16130 - Boxes.
B.
Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding.
1.4
A.
1.5
REFERENCES
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Service entrance from local cable utility.
B.
Premises wiring for distribution of television signal, including individual outlets.
1.6
A.
1.7
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Signal at each outlet: 3 dBmV across 75 ohms, minimum, + 5 dB, - 0 dB.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 16000.
B.
Record actual locations of outlets, devices, and cable routing.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CABLE TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
266781 - 1
1.8
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles
of Project.
B.
Installer: Authorized installer of specified manufacturer with service facilities within 100 miles
of the project.
1.9
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Furnish Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for
purpose specified and indicated.
C.
Conform to requirements of cable television utility company.
1.10
A.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Furnish service and maintenance of television system for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION
All cable system internal distribution components including outlets, ivory plates, wiring and
installation shall be provided by the contractor. The contractor is to coordinate with Local
Cable Company all cable and outlet requirements and as shown on contract drawings. This
contractor is to provide the recommended cable to each outlet from a central location within
the mechanical room junction box as required by the cable company.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Connect cable television service in accordance with Cable Utility instructions.
C.
Provide proper grounding of television system components and wiring.
3.2
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 16000.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CABLE TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
266781 - 2
B.
3.3
Measure signal level at each outlet.
MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A.
Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 16000.
B.
Supervise final adjustments and tuning of system.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust work under provisions of Section 16000.
B.
Adjust work under supervision of manufacturer's field service personnel.
END OF SECTION 266781
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CABLE TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
266781 - 3
SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
Clearing and grubbing.
Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.
Disconnecting, capping or sealing site utilities.
Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.
MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
Cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project
site.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent
occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1.
2.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by
Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located
before site clearing.
C.
Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentationcontrol measures are in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MATERIALS
Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in
Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
1.
Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not
available on-site.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
B.
Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1.
3.2
Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to
Owner.
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A.
Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion
and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and
walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction
activity do not enter or cross protection zones.
C.
Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during
construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
D.
Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed
during removal.
3.3
A.
EXISTING UTILITIES
Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or
abandoned in place.
1.
B.
Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner
or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
C.
Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.
Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
Removal of underground utilities is included in earthwork sections and with applicable fire
suppression, plumbing, HVAC, electrical, communications, electronic safety and security
and utilities sections and Section 024116 "Structure Demolition."
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 2
3.4
A.
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new
construction.
1.
2.
B.
Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil
material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1.
3.5
A.
3.6
Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18
inches (450 mm) below exposed subgrade.
Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones.
Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200
mm), and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
SITE IMPROVEMENTS
Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to
facilitate new construction.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A.
Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and
waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's
property.
B.
Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable
materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them
to recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.
END OF SECTION 311000
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SITE CLEARING
311000 - 3
SECTION 321216 – ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
STIPULATIONS
The specifications section "General Conditions" and "Special Requirements" form a part
of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same force and affect as if
printed herewith in full.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Bidding Requirements,
Conditions of the Contract and General Requirements Specifications Sections, apply to
work of this Section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
This work is the construction of plant-mixed bituminous concrete courses on a prepared
surface.
B.
Extent of work is shown on drawings including:
1. Bituminous binder course - 1-1/2 inch thick unless otherwise indicated.
2. Bituminous wearing surface - 1 inch thick compacted unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Prepared aggregate base is specified in Section 321100.
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
PennDOT State Highway Administration form 408 Standard Specifications. Comply with
Section 420 type 1D-2A Bituminous Pavements and Section 321100.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
GENERAL
Materials and methods of construction shall conform to applicable requirements of the
Pennsylvania Department of Transportation Specifications, form 408, latest edition
unless otherwise noted and shall consist of:
1. Bituminous Concrete Binder Course - 1-1/2 inch thick compacted or as shown on the
drawings.
2. Bituminous Wearing Surface - 1 inch thick or as shown on the drawings.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ASPHALT PAVING
321216 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONSTRUCTION
A.
Comply with PennDOT Section 401.
B.
Finished paving shall be true and even, free of low spots or bumps. All areas must drain
to established drainage points. No puddles will be permitted.
END OF SECTION 321216
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
ASPHALT PAVING
321216 - 2
SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Bidding Requirements,
Conditions of the Contract and General Requirements Specifications Sections, apply to
work of this Section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This section includes the following:
1. Construction of cement walks on 4-inch stone aggregate subbase.
2. Construction of an 8-inch thick cement concrete pad on a 4-inch stone aggregate
base.
3. Construction of a 8-inch depth concrete driveway paving on a 4-inch aggregate
subbase on geotextile fabric in accordance with the City of Philadelphia Streets
Department specifications and details.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with PennDOT State Highway Administration Standard Specifications, Section
676.1 Cement Concrete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS (PER PennDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS)
A.
Cement Concrete – Class AA Section 704.1 PennDOT Specifications.
B.
Aggregate. Shall be stone gravel or slag meeting the requirements of Section 703.3 of
PDT 408 for Type C or better AASHTO No. 57 Material.
C.
Premoulded Expansion Joint Filler – Section 705.1 PennDOT Specifications.
D.
Concrete Curing Compound – Section 711.2 (a) PennDOT Specifications.
E.
Curing and Protecting Covers.
F.
Protective Coating for Cement Concrete Pavement.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
Install concrete work in compliance with PennDOT Standard Specifications.
3.2
CONSTRUCTION
A.
Preparation of Foundation: Form the foundation at a depth of 8" below and parallel with
the finished surface of the sidewalk. When directed, remove and replace unsuitable
material with acceptable material. Thoroughly compact the foundation, finish to a firm,
even surface; moisten if required.
B.
Placing Aggregate for Bed: Spread aggregate on the prepared foundation to form a
thoroughly compacted bed 4 inches deep.
C.
Forms: Use acceptable wood or metal forms extending the full depth of concrete.
D.
Concrete: As specified in the applicable parts of Standard Specifications. Place
concrete 4 inches deep. Strike off, finish, and test, as specified except that manual
operations are allowed and a light broom finish applied. Form outside edges and joints
with a 1/4-inch radius edging tool. Form transverse dummy joints at 5-foot intervals,
approximately 1/8 inch wide and at least 1 inch deep.
E.
Concrete shall be protected and cured for a period of not less than 72 hours after
completion by the use of an approved membrane curing compound; or by double
thickness burlap or cotton mats kept wet throughout the curing period; or by the use of
waterproof mats. All types of mats shall be properly weighted down to prevent access of
air to the concrete.
F.
Concrete driveway construction shall be in accordance with Section 11.8.3 and 11.8.4 of
the City of Philadelphia Standard Specifications for Paving and Repaving 1967.
G.
Expansion Joints: Place 1/2 inch premoulded, expansion joint material for the full depth
of the sidewalk, opposite expansion joints in adjacent curb, between the sidewalk and
curb, and between the sidewalk and rigid structures.
H.
Removal of Forms: Do not remove side forms until at least 12 hours after placing
concrete. After removal of forms, fill minor honeycombed areas with mortar. As
directed, remove and replace defective major honeycombed areas.
I.
Backfilling: After the concrete has cured for at least 72 hours, backfill spaces adjacent to
the sidewalk, using acceptable embankment material, as specified in PennDOT
Standard Specifications.
END OF SECTION 321313
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CONCRETE PAVING
321313 - 2
SECTION 321443 - POROUS UNIT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Solid concrete pavers with openings between pavers filled with aggregate for
driveway.
Aggregate setting bed for pavers.
Edge restraints.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For materials other than aggregates.
B.
Sieve Analyses: For aggregate materials, according to ASTM C 136.
C.
Samples:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
A.
Full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated.
Exposed edge restraints.
Aggregate fill.
Aggregate setting bed materials.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of
the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS
Solid Concrete Pavers for Porous Paving: Solid interlocking paving units of shapes that
provide openings between units, complying with ASTM C 936, resistant to freezing and
thawing when tested according to ASTM C 67, and made from normal-weight
aggregates.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
POROUS UNIT PAVING
321443 - 1
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
product or comparable product by the following:
a.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
A.
Thickness: 3-1/8 inches (80 mm).
Face Size and Shape: 6.7” x 9”.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
ACCESSORIES
Steel Edge Restraints: Painted steel edging, 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) thick by 4 inches (100
mm) high, with loops pressed from or welded to face to receive stakes at 36 inches (900
mm) o.c., and with steel stakes 15 inches (380 mm) long for each loop.
1.
2.3
EP Henry ECO Paver
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A.
Regional Materials: Aggregate and soil shall be extracted, harvested, or recovered, as
well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
B.
Graded Aggregate for Subbase: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with
requirements in Section 312000 “Earth Moving” for subbase material.
C.
Graded Aggregate for Base Course: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with
ASTM D 448 for Size No. 57.
D.
Graded Aggregate for Leveling Course: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with
ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8.
E.
Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface
drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than
50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured according to
test methods referenced:
1.
2.
3.
2.4
A.
Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.
Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
FILL MATERIALS
Graded Aggregate for Porous Paving Fill: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with
ASTM D 448 for Size No. [8] [9].
1.
Color: Match Architect's sample.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
POROUS UNIT PAVING
321443 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that
might be structurally unsound or visible in finished work.
B.
Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipmentto provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly.
Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
C.
Tolerances:
1.
2.
D.
3.2
Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.5mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush.
Variation from Level or Indicated Slope: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 24 inches (3 mm
in 600 mm) and 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) or a maximum of 1/2 inch (13
mm).
Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.
SETTING-BED INSTALLATION
A.
Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least ninety-five (95) percent of ASTM D 698
laboratory density.
B.
Place drainage geotextile over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at least
12 inches (300 mm).
C.
Place aggregate subbase and base, compact by tamping with plate vibrator, and screed
to depth indicated.
D.
Place aggregate subbase and base, compact to one hundred (100) percent of
ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory density, and screed to depth indicated.
E.
Place drainage geotextile over compacted subbase, overlapping ends and edges at least
12 inches (300 mm).
F.
Place drainage geotextile over compacted base course, overlapping ends and edges at
least 12 inches (300 mm).
G.
Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of [1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm)] [2 to
2-1/2 inches (50 to 64 mm)] [3 inches (76 mm)], taking care that moisture content
remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
POROUS UNIT PAVING
321443 - 3
3.3
PAVER INSTALLATION
A.
Install pavers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Set unit pavers on leveling course, being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers
have lugs or spacer bars to control spacing, place pavers hand tight against lugs or
spacer bars. If pavers do not have lugs or spacer bars, place pavers with a 1/16-inch(1.6-mm-) minimum and 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) maximum joint width.
C.
Compact pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a
3500- to 5000-lbf (16- to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz.
D.
Place graded aggregate fill immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course.
Spread and screed aggregate fill level with tops of pavers.
E.
As work progresses, remove and replace pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained,
or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match
adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and
with no evidence of replacement.
3.4
A.
MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION
Erect barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from
traffic. Maintain barricades for sixty (60) days after planting.
END OF SECTION 321443
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
POROUS UNIT PAVING
321443 - 4
SECTION 321613 - CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Bidding Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and General Requirements
Specifications Sections, apply to work of this Section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION
A.
The extent of the concrete curb work is shown on the drawings.
B.
Lines and grades are shown on drawings.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with details shown on the drawings and applicable PennDOT Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIAL
A.
Cement Concrete - Class A Section 704.1 PennDOT Specifications.
B.
Premolded Expansion Joint Filler - Section 705.1 PennDOT Specifications.
C.
Concrete Curing Compound - Section 711.2(a) PennDOT Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONSTRUCTION: As shown on the Standard Drawings as specified in the applicable
parts of Standard Specifications, and as follows:
A.
Excavation: Excavate to the required depth, then compact the material upon which the
curb is to be constructed to a firm, even surface.
B.
Forms: Use acceptable metal forms, except on sharp curves and short tangent
sections, where wood forms may be used. Use forms which will not discolor the
concrete.
C.
Placing and Finishing Concrete: Place the concrete in the forms in layers not exceeding
5 inches in depth and spade sufficiently to eliminate voids. A vibrator may be used.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS
321613 - 1
Provide drainage openings through the curb, at the elevation and of the size required,
where indicated or directed.
Smoothly and evenly finish the top surface of the curb, using a wood float. While the
concrete is still plastic, round the edge of the face and back of the curb. Place
depressed curbs for drives or handicapped ramps, where indicated or directed. Cure
shall be applied to the top of the curb before any marked dehydration of the concrete
surface occurs. The forms shall be removed within 24 hours and all exposed concrete
surfaces cured.
D.
Joints: The curbing shall be constructed in uniform lengths or blocks of 10 feet, except
where closures necessitate a reduction in length, and the blocks shall be separated
during construction by 1/8 inch thick sheet steel templates cut to conform to the size of
the curbing. These templates shall be set and maintained accurately in a position at
right angles to the alignment and finished surface of the curb and shall be withdrawn to
within 6 inches of the top of the curb at initial set and completely withdrawn as concrete
approaches hard set.
Tool the edges of construction joints to a 1/4-inch radius.
Place 1/4 inch premolded expansion joint material, cut to the cross sectional area of the
curb, at 30 foot intervals, at points of curve at structures, and at the end of the work day.
E.
Removal of Forms: Do not remove forms until such time it will not be detrimental to the
concrete. Correct irregular surfaces by rubbing with a carborundum stone. Brush
finishing or plastering will not be permitted. Fill minor defects with mortar.
F.
Backfilling and Embankment: As soon as possible after the removal of forms, backfill
the voids in front and back of the curb, using acceptable embankment material.
Complete embankments in back of raised curbs, as indicated, except carefully compact
the embankment by means of mechanical tampers, or rollers, if permitted, not exceeding
8 tons.
Dispose of unsuitable and surplus material.
END OF SECTION 321613
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
CONCRETE CURBS AND GUTTERS
321613 - 2
SECTION 323119 - DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Decorative metallic-coated-steel tubular picket fences.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: For gates. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
to other work.
C.
Samples: For each fence material and for each color specified.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Field quality-control reports.
B.
Product Test Reports: For decorative metallic-coated-steel tubular picket fences,
including finish, indicating compliance with referenced standard.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DECORATIVE METALLIC-COATED-STEEL TUBULAR PICKET FENCES
A.
Decorative Metallic-Coated-Steel Tubular Picket Fences: Comply with ASTM F 2408, for
residential application (class) unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Post Caps: Formed from steel sheet and hot-dip galvanized after forming.
C.
Pickets: Square tubes.
1.
2.
D.
Extend pickets beyond top rail as indicated and terminate with UV-resistant plastic
caps.
Picket Spacing: 4 inches (101.6 mm) clear, maximum.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Galvanized-steel sheet or aluminum-zinc, alloy-coated steel
sheet.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES
323119 - 1
E.
2.2
Finish: Organic coating complying with requirements in ASTM F 2408 of powder coating.
DECORATIVE STEEL FENCES
A.
Decorative Steel Fences:
galvanized.
B.
Posts: Square steel tubing, 2 by 2 inches (51 by 51 mm) with 3/16-inch (4.76-mm) wall
thickness.
C.
Post Caps: Formed from steel sheet.
D.
Rails:
1.
2.
E.
Fences made from steel tubing bars and shapes, hot-dip
Steel Tube Rails: Square steel tubing 2 by 2 inches (51 by 51 mm) with 1/8-inch
(3.2-mm) wall thickness.
Steel Channel Rails: Steel channels 1-1/2 by 3/4 inch (38 by 19 mm).
Pickets: 5/8 inch (16 mm) square by 0.065-inch (1.65-mm) steel tubes, terminated as
indicated.
1.
Picket Spacing: 4 inches (101.6 mm) clear, maximum.
F.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel carriage bolts and tamperproof nuts.
G.
Fabrication: Assemble fences into sections by welding pickets to rails.
H.
Fabrication: Fabricate bar grating infill into sections of size indicated.
I.
Galvanizing: For items other than hardware that are indicated to be galvanized, hot-dip
galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. For hardware items, hot-dip galvanize to
comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
1.
Hot-dip galvanize rail and picket assemblies after fabrication.
J.
Finish for Steel Items: High-performance coating.
K.
Finish for Metallic-Coated-Steel Items: High-performance coating.
2.3
A.
SWING GATES
Galvanized-Steel Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from square tubes 1-1/2 by
1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm) formed from 0.108-inch (2.74-mm) nominal-thickness,
metallic-coated steel sheet or formed from 0.105-inch (2.66-mm) nominal-thickness steel
sheet and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES
323119 - 2
B.
Steel Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from square steel tubing 1-1/2 by 1-1/2
inches (38 by 38 mm) with 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) wall thickness. Hot-dip galvanize frames
after fabrication.
C.
Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, and keepers for
each gate leaf more than 5 feet (1.52 m) wide. Provide center gate stops and cane bolts
for pairs of gates. Fabricate latches with integral eye openings for padlocking; padlock
accessible from both sides of gate.
D.
Galvanizing: For items other than hardware that are indicated to be galvanized, hot-dip
galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. For hardware items, hot-dip galvanize to
comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E.
Metallic-Coated-Steel Finish: High-performance coating.
F.
Steel Finish: High-performance coating.
2.4
STEEL AND IRON
A.
Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Bars (Pickets): Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.
C.
Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.
D.
Bar Grating: NAAMM MBG 531.
1.
2.
Bars: Hot-rolled steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel, Type B.
Wire Rods: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).
E.
Uncoated Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel,
Grade 45 (Grade 310) or cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel,
Grade 50 (Grade 340).
F.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 50 (Grade 340),
with [G90 (Z275)] [G60 (Z180)] coating.
G.
Aluminum-Zinc, Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, structural quality,
Grade 50 (Grade 340), with AZ60 (AZM180) coating.
2.5
COATING MATERIALS
A.
Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer for Uncoated Steel: Complying with MPI #20 and compatible
with coating specified to be applied over it.
B.
Epoxy Primer for Galvanized Steel: Epoxy primer recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturer.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES
323119 - 3
C.
Intermediate Coat for Uncoated Steel:
Epoxy or polyurethane intermediate
recommended in writing by primer and topcoat manufacturer.
D.
Polyurethane Intermediate Coat and Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible
with undercoat.
2.6
A.
2.7
A.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Concrete: Normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete complying with requirements
in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" with a minimum 28-day compressive strength
of 3000 psi (20 MPa), 3-inch (75-mm) slump, and 1-inch (25-mm) maximum aggregate
size.
STEEL FINISHES
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces according to SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal
Blast Cleaning or SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
1.
B.
After cleaning, apply a conversion coating compatible with the organic coating to
be applied over it.
Powder Coating: Immediately after cleaning, apply two-coat finish consisting of epoxy
primer and TGIC polyester topcoat, with a minimum total dry film thickness of not less
than 8 mils (0.20 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C.
Primer Application: Apply zinc-rich epoxy primer immediately after cleaning, to provide a
minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm) per applied coat, to surfaces that are
exposed after assembly and installation, and to concealed surfaces.
D.
High-Performance Coating: Apply intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to primecoated surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and with
requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and
Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
Apply at spreading rates
recommended by coating manufacturer.
1.
2.8
Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove and refinish, or
recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements.
METALLIC-COATED-STEEL FINISHES
A.
Galvanized Finish: Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil
and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a zinc-phosphate conversion coating
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES
323119 - 4
suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections,
and abraded areas, and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
C.
Powder Coating: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply TGIC polyester
powder-coat finish, with a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
1.
D.
Powder Coating: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply two-coat finish
consisting of zinc-rich epoxy prime coat and TGIC polyester topcoat, with a minimum dry
film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm) for topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's
written instructions to achieve a minimum total dry film thickness of 4 mils (0.10 mm).
1.
E.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy primer, polyurethane intermediate coat, and
polyurethane topcoat to prepared surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written
instructions and with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Apply at spreading
rates recommended by coating manufacturer.
1.
Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove and refinish, or
recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DECORATIVE FENCE INSTALLATION
A.
Install fences according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Install fences by setting posts as indicated and fastening rails and infill panels to posts.
C.
Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts in firm, undisturbed soil.
Excavate holes to a diameter of not less than 4 times post size and a depth of not less
than 24 inches (600 mm) plus 3 inches (75 mm) for each foot (300 mm) or fraction of a
foot (300 mm) that fence height exceeds 4 feet (1.2 m).
D.
Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.
1.
2.
Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and
hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices.
Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation.
Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES
323119 - 5
3.
4.
Posts Set in Concrete: Extend post to within 6 inches (150 mm) of specified
excavation depth, but not closer than 3 inches (75 mm) to bottom of concrete.
Space posts uniformly at 6 feet (1.83 m) o.c.
END OF SECTION 323119
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES
323119 - 6
SECTION 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Seeding.
Sodding.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed
leaves, twigs, and detritus.
B.
Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
C.
Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils
or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
D.
Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or
mitigating a pest.
This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides,
rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use
as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.
E.
Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to
plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and
slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria,
and viruses.
F.
Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place
surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil
amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
G.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top
surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
H.
Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of
organic matter and soil organisms.
I.
Surface Soil: Whatever soil is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the
Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed
areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 1
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Certification of grass seed.
1.
1.4
Certification of each seed mixture for turf-grass sod.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened
containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and
indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable.
B.
Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications
for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and
Installation" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time
for planting within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying.
1.5
A.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of
landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after
each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than
the following periods:
1.
Seeded Turf: Sixty (60) days from date of Substantial Completion.
a.
2.
When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting
season, or if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next
planting season.
Sodded Turf: Thirty (30) days from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SEED
A.
Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed
Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.
B.
Seed Species: State-certified seed of grass species as follows:
1.
Sun and Partial Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 2
a.
2.2
Mix of species suited to Philadelphia climate and an urban setting.
TURFGRASS SOD
A.
Turfgrass Sod: Certified Number 1 Quality/Premium, including limitations on thatch,
weeds, diseases, nematodes, and insects, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass
Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable
sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous
growth and development when planted.
B.
Turf-grass Species: Sod of grass species as follows:
1.
Sun and Partial Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows:
a.
2.3
A.
Mix of species suited to Philadelphia climate and an urban setting.
INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent
calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows:
1.
2.
Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve
and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.
Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve
and a minimum of 55 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.
B.
Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, and with a
minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 (3.35-mm) sieve and a maximum of 10
percent passing through No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve.
C.
Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10
percent sulfur.
D.
Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.
E.
Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.
F.
Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent
passing through No. 50 (0.30-mm) sieve.
G.
Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials.
H.
Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water
absorption capacity by weight.
I.
Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 3
2.4
ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A.
Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8;
moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 3/4-inch (19mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert
contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings.
B.
Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or of
granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.
C.
Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely
divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water-absorbing
capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent.
D.
Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste;
of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.
E.
Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25
percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic
substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, and material harmful to plant growth.
2.5
FERTILIZERS
A.
Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of one (1) percent
nitrogen and ten (10) percent phosphoric acid.
B.
Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent
available phosphoric acid.
C.
Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character,
consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic
sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following
composition:
1.
D.
Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent waterinsoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:
1.
2.6
A.
Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent
phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.
Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent
potassium, by weight.
PLANTING SOILS
Planting Soil: ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent
organic material content. Verify suitability of soil to produce viable planting soil. Clean
soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 4
slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous
materials harmful to plant growth. Mix soil with the following soil amendments and
fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil:
1.
2.7
A.
2.8
A.
Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4.
MULCHES
Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of
wheat, rye, oats, or barley.
PESTICIDES
General: Pesticide, registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as
required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless
authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
TURF AREA PREPARATION
Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 6 inches (150 mm).
Remove stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish,
and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
1.
2.
3.
Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening.
Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil
amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil.
Spread planting soil to a depth of 6 inches (150 mm) but not less than required to
meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if
planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.
a.
Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.
B.
Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose,
uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finish elevation.
Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish
grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.
C.
Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface
to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
D.
Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if
eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 5
3.2
SEEDING
A.
Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). Evenly
distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other.
Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting
saucer.
B.
Sow seed at a total rate of 5 to 8 lb/1000 sq. ft. (2.3 to 3.6 kg/92.9 sq. m).
C.
Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch (3 mm) of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.
D.
Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread
uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre (42 kg/92.9 sq. m) to form a continuous
blanket 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in loose thickness over seeded areas. Spread by hand,
blower, or other suitable equipment.
1.
E.
3.3
Anchor straw mulch by crimping into soil with suitable mechanical equipment.
Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying compost mulch
within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly
to a thickness of 3/16 inch (4.8 mm), and roll surface smooth.
SODDING
A.
Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or
muddy.
B.
Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not
stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid
damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact
with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine
sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod
and adjacent grass.
C.
Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after
planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum
depth of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) below sod.
3.4
TURF MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting,
and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll,
regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth
turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.
B.
Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain height
appropriate for species without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more
than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 6
C.
3.5
A.
Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in
accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written
recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in
proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.
SATISFACTORY TURF
Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:
1.
B.
Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted,
even-colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare
areas, and surface irregularities.
Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and
continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.
END OF SECTION 329200
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 7
SECTION 329300 - PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Plants.
Planting soils.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.
B.
Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed
leaves, twigs, and detritus.
C.
Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
D.
Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils
or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
E.
Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or
mitigating a pest.
This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides,
rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use
as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.
F.
Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to
plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and
slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria,
and viruses.
G.
Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place
surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil
amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
H.
Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk
where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root
system and the stem or trunk.
I.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the
top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
J.
Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of
organic matter and soil organisms.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLANTS
329300 - 1
K.
1.3
Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project
site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such
as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils.
B.
Samples of mineral mulch.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product certificates.
B.
Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for
maintenance of plants during a calendar year.
1.5
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time
supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.
1.
B.
Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by
a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
1.
2.
The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling.
Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth.
a.
b.
State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and
soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable
for healthy, viable plants.
Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present,
provide additional recommendations for corrective action.
C.
Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with
applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1.
D.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.6
A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver bare-root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock,
pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist
until planting.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLANTS
329300 - 2
B.
Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems
from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying
damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their
natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not
drop plants during delivery and handling.
C.
Handle planting stock by root ball.
D.
Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F (16 to 18 deg C) until
planting.
E.
Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install
immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees
in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and
mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.
1.7
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail
in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Warranty Periods from Date of Planting Completion:
a.
b.
1.8
A.
Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse,
lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are
beyond Contractor's control.
Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.
Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: twelve (12) months.
Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: twelve (12) months.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Initial Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape
Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are
installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for
not less than maintenance period below.
1.
2.
Maintenance Period for Trees and Shrubs: twelve (12) months from date of
planting completion.
Maintenance Period for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Six (6) months from date
of planting completion.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLANTS
329300 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLANT MATERIAL
A.
General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem
form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on
Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by
transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous
stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects
such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
B.
Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball,
which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before
planting.
2.2
A.
INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent
calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows:
1.
2.
Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve
and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.
Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve
and a minimum of 55 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.
B.
Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a
minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 (3.35-mm) sieve and a maximum of 10
percent passing through No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve.
C.
Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10
percent sulfur.
D.
Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.
E.
Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.
F.
Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent
passing through No. 50 (0.30-mm) sieve.
G.
Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials.
H.
Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water
absorption capacity by weight.
I.
Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLANTS
329300 - 4
2.3
ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A.
Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8;
moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 3/4-inch (19mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert
contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:
B.
Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or granular
texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.
C.
Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely
divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water-absorbing
capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent.
D.
Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste;
of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.
E.
Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25
percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic
substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, debris, and material harmful to plant growth.
2.4
FERTILIZERS
A.
Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of four (4) percent
nitrogen and twenty (20) percent phosphoric acid.
B.
Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent
available phosphoric acid.
C.
Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character,
consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic
sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following
composition:
1.
D.
Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent waterinsoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:
1.
E.
Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent
phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.
Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent
potassium, by weight.
Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercialgrade planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria,
converting nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots.
1.
Size: 5-gram tablets.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLANTS
329300 - 5
2.
2.5
A.
2.6
Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5
percent potassium, by weight plus micronutrients.
PLANTING SOILS
Planting Soil: ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent
organic material content. Imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources;
do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes. Verify suitability of soil to produce
viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clods, clay lumps, pockets of
coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris,
and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
MULCHES
A.
Organic Mulch: Shredded hardwood.
B.
Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5
to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch
(25-mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 2 to 5 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent
inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings.
C.
Mineral Mulch: Rounded riverbed gravel or smooth-faced stone.
1.
2.
2.7
Size Range: 3/4 inch (19 mm) maximum, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) minimum.
Color: Uniform tan-beige color range acceptable to Architect.
WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS
A.
Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric:
(101g/sq. m) minimum.
B.
Composite Fabric: Woven, needle-punched polypropylene substrate bonded to a
nonwoven polypropylene fabric, 4.8 oz./sq. yd. (162 g/sq. m).
2.8
A.
Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd.
PESTICIDES
General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as
required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless
authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLANTS
329300 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT
Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches (150 mm). Remove
stones larger than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and
other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.2
A.
Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose,
uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish
grades.
EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS
Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a
45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of
bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in
drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on
undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or
smoothed during excavation.
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.3
Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening.
Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil
amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil.
Spread planting soil to a depth of 6 inches (150 mm) but not less than required to
meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or
subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.
Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter.
Excavate at least 12 inches (300 mm) wider than root spread and deep enough to
accommodate vertical roots for bare-root stock.
Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to
the bottom of the root ball.
Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations [may] [may not] be used as planting soil.
TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING
A.
Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1.
B.
Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly;
do not break.
C.
Set stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare [1 inch (25 mm)
above] [2 inches (50 mm) above] adjacent finish grades.
1.
Use planting soil for backfill.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLANTS
329300 - 7
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Bare-Root Stock: Set and support bare-root stock in center of planting pit or trench with
root flare [1 inch (25 mm) above] [2 inches (50 mm) above] adjacent finish grade.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
3.4
Balled and Burlapped: After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize
plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root
balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if
any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken
before or during planting operation.
[Balled and Potted] [Container-Grown]: Carefully remove root ball from container
without damaging root ball or plant.
Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without
damaging root ball or plant. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or
broken before or during planting operation.
Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air
pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before
placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.
Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled;
in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets
beside the root ball about 1 inch (25 mm) from root tips; do not place tablets in
bottom of the hole.
Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of
soil.
Use planting soil for backfill.
Spread roots without tangling or turning toward surface, and carefully work backfill
around roots by hand. Puddle with water until backfill layers are completely
saturated. Plumb before backfilling, and maintain plumb while working backfill
around roots and placing layers above roots.
Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled;
in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets
beside soil-covered roots about 1 inch (25 mm) from root tips; do not place tablets
in bottom of the hole or touching the roots.
Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of
soil.
When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the
surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above
the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.
TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING
A.
Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.
B.
Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional
horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not
cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs;
and prune to retain natural character.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLANTS
329300 - 8
3.5
GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING
A.
Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines 12 inches
(300 mm) apart in even rows with triangular spacing.
B.
Use planting soil for backfill.
C.
Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.
D.
Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation
around plants to hold water.
E.
Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.
F.
Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of
recovery from transplanting shock.
3.6
PLANTING AREA MULCHING
A.
Install weed-control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of [6
inches (150 mm)] [12 inches (300 mm)] and secure seams with galvanized pins.
B.
Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.
1.
2.
3.7
Trees and Tree-like Shrubs in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring of 2-inch (50mm) average thickness, with 24-inch (600-mm) radius around trunks or stems. Do
not place mulch within 3 inches (75 mm) of trunks or stems.
Organic Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 2-inch (50-mm) average thickness of
mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish
grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches (75 mm) of trunks or stems.
PLANT MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching,
restoring planting saucers, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing
other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as
required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.
B.
Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other
processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
C.
Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of
pests and pathogens or disease. Use practices to minimize the use of pesticides and
reduce hazards.
D.
Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in
accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLANTS
329300 - 9
recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in
proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.
E.
Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other
contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods.
Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.
END OF SECTION 329300
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
PLANTS
329300 - 10
SECTION 329343 – STREET TREE PLANTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
A. Perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and
Special Conditions.
B. Hazardous Materials – Provide materials which do not contain asbestos, PCB or other
hazardous materials.
C. Provide certification in accordance with the Special Conditions from the Contractor,
manufacturers, and installers that materials provided for the Work comply with the
above requirements.
D. Coordinate work with that of other trades affecting or affected by work of this Section,
and cooperate to assure the steady progress of work.
1.2
SECTION SUMMARY
A. Furnishing and installing all planting of new street trees in continuous soil trenches as
specified herein.
B. Provide additional mulch, fertilizer, and soil amendment(s) if and as required.
C. Staking and guying, including necessary hardware and deadman if requested by
Architect.
D. Maintenance under contract and guarantee.
E. Testing of soil materials including off-site borrow soil, mulch, amendment materials and
manufactured soils for approved use in tree planting soil mix. Verification testing of onsite sub-soils as required.
F. Percolation Test in tree pits.
G. Furnishing material from approved off-site source(s) as a base component for tree
planting soil mix and furnishing other soil amendment materials.
H. Amending, preparing, and mixing planting soils for tree planting, throughout the life of
the contract.
I.
Preparing sub-grade.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 1
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 321440 - Granite Cobble Paving
B. Section 329300 - Exterior Plants
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Notices and Scheduling:
1. Within 15 calendar days after Contract Notice to Proceed, submit to Architect
invoices or certificates of deposit from nursery(ies) guaranteeing timely delivery of
all specified and tagged plant materials. If any plant materials are unavailable at
the time of submittal, Contractor shall contact Architect to determine acceptable
alternatives. Indicate the following:
a. Confirm size and grade of trees to be planted.
b. Indicate source of origin and the health of trees each type.
2. Submit to Architect a schedule itemizing landscape planting work to be performed.
This schedule shall be submitted within 15 calendar days after Contract Notice to
Proceed.
a. Include in this schedule anticipated dates for commencement and sequencing
of tree planting work, including but not limited to selections and tagging,
layouts and layout approval, placement of trees, and commencement of
maintenance period.
b. Schedule shall also include, and relate to, work being performed under
separate contracts, as applicable.
c. If planting is delayed more than 24 hours after delivery, set balled and
burlapped plants on the ground in a shaded area, with rootballs well protected
with soil, wet peat, or other acceptable material. Protect balls and roots from
freezing, sun, drying winds, and/or mechanical damage. Water as necessary
until planted.
B. Product Data: Submit technical descriptive data for each manufactured or packaged
product of this Section. Include manufacturer's product testing and analysis and
installation instructions for manufactured or processed items and materials.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 2
C. Locations: Submit locations of material sources. Submit location of mixing sites.
1. Architect shall have the right to reject any soil supplier.
2. Soil Mix supplier shall have a minimum of five years experience in supplying
custom planting soil mixes.
3. Submit supplier name, address, telephone and fax numbers and contract name.
4. Submit certification that accepted supplier is able to provide sufficient quantities of
materials and mixes for the entire project.
D. Certificates:
1. Submit certified analysis for each treatment, amendment, and fertilizer material
specified and as used. Include guaranteed analysis and weight for packaged
material.
2. Furnish certification that each tree is true to name and in conformance with these
Specifications. In addition, furnish such certificates of inspection as may be
required by Federal, State or other authorities that plant material is free of disease
or hazardous insects.
3. Furnish certificates/cultivars by supplying nursery.
4. The use of chemical insect control materials is strictly prohibited.
5. Prior to job acceptance submit to Architect written certifications for the following
total quantities by weight as used on Project Site for Project materials:
a. Quantity of organic amendment.
b. Quantity of additional soil amendments.
c. Quantity of antidesiccant.
E. Test Reports – Soil Analysis: The Contractor shall submit representative samples of all
soil materials and organic material components which are intended to be used for
planting soil mixes and final mixes, to a Soil and Plant Testing Laboratory acceptable to
the Architect. Samples of all soil materials to be brought to the site must be approved
before delivery. Deficiencies in the soils shall be corrected by the Contractor, as
directed by the Architect after review of the testing agency report. Testing reports shall
include the following:
1. Date issued.
2. Project Title and names of Contractor and material supplier.
3. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number, and name(s), as
applicable, of each field and laboratory inspector.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 3
4. Date, place, and time of sampling or test, with record of temperature and weather
conditions.
5. Location of material source.
6. Type(s) of test.
7. Results of tests including identification of deviations from acceptable ranges.
8. Particle size analysis to include sand sieve analysis shall be performed and
compared to the USDA Soil Classification System per ASTM D422 (hydrometer
test) or ASTM F1632 (pipette test). The silt and clay content shall be determined on
soil passing the #270 sieve and shall be reported separately.
9. Percent of organic shall be determined by an Ash Burn Test or Walkley/Black Test,
ASTM F1647.
10. Saturated hydraulic conductivity per ASTM F1815.
11. Chemical analysis shall be undertaken for Nitrate, Ammonium, Nitrite,
Phosphorous, Potassium, Calcium, Magnesium, Iron, Manganese, Zinc, Copper,
Soluble Salts, Cation Exchange Capacity, and acidity (pH).
12. Soil analysis tests shall show recommendations for soil additives, including organic
and inorganic soil amendments, necessary to accomplish particular planting
objectives noted.
13. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the current standards of the
Association of Official Agriculture Chemists.
14. Certified reports on analysis from producers of composted organic materials are
required, particularly when sources are changed. The analysis performed shall
include pH, density, salinity, total organic nitrogen, Carbon-to-Nitrogen Ratio,
Solvita Maturity Index (or approved equal test for measuring CO2 rate / NH3
volatility), moisture, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and phosphorous.
Yard waste composts that may contain grass clippings shall be tested for
chlopyralid and picloram.
15. Biological Tests for organisms in compost and mixes:
a. Contact the testing laboratory to review testing and sampling requirements
before sending samples.
b. Sampling requirements: At middle height of windrow, remove sample two feet
into the pile. Place sample in clean container. Repeat gathering methods for
five to ten times at equidistant spacing intervals on both sides of the compost
pile. Mix gathered samples with clean utensils. Remove approximately 500g of
mixed composite samples. Send final sample by overnight courier to the testing
laboratory. Submit sample with completed testing laboratory submission form.
c. Maintain clear and concise records for testing and sampling procedures.
d. Compost samples shall be testing for the following:
1) Active bacterial biomass.
2) Total bacterial biomass.
3) Active fungal biomass.
4) Total fungal biomass.
5) Protozoa, to include flagellates, amoebae, and ciliates.
6) Total nematode numbers.
7) Hyphal diameter
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 4
17. Although the report(s) may contain the laboratory’s comments or recommendations
regarding amendment requirements or procedures, the report shall not be
interpreted to prescribe or dictate procedures or quantities of soil materials for the
work of this Contract.
F. All approved samples shall be submitted to the Architect, including:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Leaf mold, each source, 5 lb. packaged.
Sand, each source, 5 lb. packaged.
Loam, each source, 5 lb. Packaged.
Base component material, each source, 5 lb. packaged.
Yard Waste Compost, each source, 5 lb. packaged.
Each mix type specified 5 lb. packaged.
G. Statement(s) of Qualifications: Submit within 45 days of notice to proceed to confirm
qualifications as specified in Article 1.06, herein.
H. Equipment Data: Submit descriptive information with wheel load data for each
proposed item of equipment to be used for execution of earthwork of this Contract.
Equipment Data will be evaluated for conformance to site restriction of use.
I.
Schedule and Protection Plan: Submit a detailed plan for scheduling and sequencing
of all contract work and for protection of soil mixes and other completed work including
coordination with contractors requiring access through the site. Indicate with
schedules and plans the utilization of finished work protection measures (wooden
protection boards or other approved methods, erosion and sedimentation controls, and
corrugated or welded-peak-faced steel plates at construction vehicle entries to
minimize off-site tracking of soil by tire treads) over the work area of construction
operations concurrent with all construction operations until substantial completion.
J. Schedule for performing percolation tests.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Installation and maintenance foreman on the job shall be competent, Englishspeaking supervisor(s), experienced in landscape installation and maintenance.
Perform work with personnel totally familiar with planting soil preparation and
planting installations under the supervision of a foreman experienced with
landscape work.
2. Agricultural Chemist/Soil Scientist: Experienced person or persons employed by
public or private soils testing laboratory, qualified and capable of performing tests,
making soil recommendations, and issuing reports as specified.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 5
3. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to see that the specifications are
being adhered to. Failure of the Architect to immediately reject unsatisfactory
workmanship or to notify the Contractor of his/her deviation from the specifications
shall not relieve the Contractor of his/her responsibility to repair and/or replace
unsatisfactory work.
B. References:
1. Association of Official Agricultural Chemists.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) using test criteria as specified
or required by other references.
3. Soil Science Society of America, Methods of Soil Analysis.
4. Tree and shrub transplanting manual, latest edition, International Society of
Arboriculture.
5. American Standard for Nursery Stock, latest edition, American Association of
Nurserymen, Inc.
C. Pre-Installation Conferences: Person(s) responsible for soil preparation and mixes of
this Section shall attend Pre-Installation Conference(s) to coordinate with work of other
sections.
D. Inspections and Testing
1. Soil, leaf mold, mulch and other materials testing and soil-mix testing required in
this Section, shall be furnished and paid for by Contractor.
2. The Owner reserves the right to take and analyze at any time such additional
samples of materials as deemed necessary for verification of conformance to
specification requirements. Contractor shall furnish samples for this purpose upon
request and shall perform testing as requested.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with all rules, regulations, laws and ordinances of local, state and federal
authorities having jurisdiction. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services
necessary to make Work shall comply with such requirements without additional cost to
Owner.
B. Procure and pay for permits and licenses required for work of this section.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 6
1.7
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for pedestrian and vehicular safety and control
within the work site. He/she shall provide the necessary warning devices and ground
personnel needed to give safety, warning and protection to persons and vehicular
traffic within the area.
B. During site preparation, soil installation and protection, the Contractor shall be
responsible for all damage to existing features above and below ground (benches,
utility lines, irrigation pipes, lampposts, path surfaces, and existing vegetation) incurred
as a result of work operations. Repairs and/or replacements shall be made to the
satisfaction of the Owner.
C. Investigate the conditions of public thoroughfares and roads as to availability,
clearances, loads, limits, restrictions, and other limitations affecting transportation to,
ingress into and egress from this work site. Conform to all government regulations in
regard to the transportation of materials to, from, and at the job site, and secure in
advance such permits as may be necessary.
D. Should the Contractor, in the course of Work, find any discrepancies between Contract
Drawings and physical conditions or any omissions or errors in Drawings, or in layout
as furnished by the Owner, it will be Contractor’s duty to inform the Architect
immediately in writing for clarification. Work done after such discovery(-ies), unless
authorized by Architect, shall be done at the Contractor’s risk.
E. Environmental Requirements for Soils:
1. Perform both off-site mixing and on-site soil work only during suitable weather
conditions. Do not work soil when frozen, excessively wet or in otherwise
unsatisfactory condition.
2. Soil mixes shall not be handled, hauled or placed during rain or wet weather or
when near or above the point where maximum compaction will occur.
F. Environmental Requirements for Soil: Sequencing and Scheduling: Adjust, relate
together and otherwise coordinate work of this Section with work or Project and all
other Sections of Project Specifications.
G. Environmental Requirements and Planting Schedule: Plant only within the following
dates, weather permitting. Do not plant when the ground is frozen, excessively wet, or
the soil is otherwise in an unsatisfactory condition for planting:
1. The Spring season for deciduous trees shall be that period from March 1 through
May 30.
2. The Fall season for deciduous trees shall be that period from September 15
through December 15.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 7
1.8
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials to the location where soils are to be
mixed, in unopened bags or containers, each clearly bearing the name, guarantee, and
trademark of the producer, material composition, manufacturers' certified analysis, and
the weight of the material.
B. Soil or amendment materials stored on site temporarily in stockpiles prior to placement
shall be protected from intrusion of contaminants and erosion. All temporary storage
means and methods shall be approved by the Owner.
C. Store and handle packaged materials in strict compliance with manufacturer’s
instructions and recommendations. Protect all materials from weather, damage, injury
and theft.
D. In addition, the following provision is established: Material should not be handled or
hauled, placed or compacted when it is wet as after a heavy rainfall or is frozen. Soil
should be handled only when the moisture content is less than the point where
maximum compaction will occur.
E. After mixing, soil materials shall be covered with a tarpaulin until time of actual use, and
protected from contamination or erosion.
F. Inspection
1. Trees shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Architect at the place of
growth, and again upon delivery and prior to planting for conformity to specification
requirements as to quality, size and variety. Such approval shall not impair the right
of rejection due to damage suffered in handling, transportation and/or planting.
Rejected trees shall be removed immediately from the site. Inspection outside the
States of New Jersey, Pennsylvania, or Delaware shall be made at the expense of
the Contractor. A Contractor’s representative shall be present at all inspections.
Written requests for inspection of trees at their place of growth shall be submitted
to the Architect at least 14 days prior to digging. The Architect may refuse
inspection if in his/her judgment a sufficient quantity of trees is not available for
inspection.
G. Plant Material, Conditions of Moving and Delivery:
1. The use of an antidesiccant shall not be allowed except by written approval and
consent by Architect.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 8
a. If approved, spray deciduous plants with an antidesiccant, immediately before
moving plant material from its source, applying an adequate film over trunks,
branches, twigs, and foliage.
b. Approval shall be required for any subsequent instance of use.
2. Dig and handle trees with care to prevent injury to trunks, branches and roots.
3. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind-tie trees in such manner as to
damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Pack and ship to ensure
arrival at site in good condition. Provide protective covering during delivery. No
trees will be accepted if the rootball is cracked or broken, or trunks scarred, or
branches broken.
4. Trees:
a. Deliver after preparations of planting areas have been completed and approved
and place plants immediately.
b. If planting is delayed more than 24 hours after delivery, set balled and
burlapped plants on the ground in a shaded location with rootballs well
protected with soil, wet peat, or other acceptable material. Protect balls and
roots from freezing, sun, drying winds, and/or mechanical damage. Water as
necessary until planted.
1.9
GUARANTEE PERIOD AND REPLACEMENTS
A. The guarantee period for trees shall begin at the date of final acceptance.
B. All trees shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for a period of two years from the date
of final acceptance to be in good, healthy and flourishing condition as determined by
the Architect.
C. When work is accepted in parts, the guarantee periods extend from each of the partial
acceptance to the terminal date of the last guarantee period. Thus, all guarantee
periods terminate at one time.
D. The Contractor shall replace, without cost, and as soon as weather conditions permit,
and within a specified planting period, all trees determined dead and/or dying by the
Architect during and at the end of the guarantee period.
1. Trees shall be replaced that are not free of dead or dying branches and bearing
foliage of normal density, size and color.
2. Trees having lost their central leader or exhibiting crown dieback at the end of the
one- year guarantee shall be replaced.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 9
3. Replacements shall match adjacent specimens of the same species.
Replacements shall be subject to all requirements stated in this specification.
Labor and all materials needed for installation of replacements are included in the
guarantee.
E. The guarantee of all replacement trees shall extend for an additional period of one year
from the date of their acceptance after replacement.
F. The Contractor shall make periodic inspections, at no extra cost, during the guarantee
period to determine what changes, if any, should be made in the maintenance program
(see Section 3.07 below). Any recommended changes shall be submitted in writing to
the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PLANT MATERIAL
A. General Requirements
1. The Contractor shall furnish and plant all trees as specified and in quantities listed.
2. All trees shall be nursery grown.
3. Trees shall be true to species and cultivar specified. Certification of cultivars by
supplying nursery must be supplied in writing to Architect.
4. Trees shall be in accordance with the American Nurserymen Association Standards
in all ways.
5. All trees shall be of specimen quality, symmetrical, and so-trained or favored in
development and appearance as to be unquestionably and outstandingly superior
in their forms and compactness. They shall exhibit vigorous growth, be well
branched and densely foliated when in leaf, free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae
and shall have well developed root systems.
6. Trees with multiple leaders will not be accepted. Trees with a damaged or crooked
leader, bark or abrasions, sun-scald, disfiguring knots, or insect damage or
evidence of infestation will not be accepted.
7. The depth of planting must be checked for all trees being tagged at the nursery. If
the trunk flare is not visible, the trunk flare (the intersection of the trunk and the
buttress roots) must be located. Any tree with significant adventitious root growth
or evidence of girdling roots shall be subject to rejection by the Architect on a case
by case basis. Any soil above the root/trunk flare shall be removed prior to digging
(see root ball preparation detail drawing). After the removal of any excess soil
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 10
above the root/trunk flare, the tree shall be hand dug and drum laced. Machine
digging shall be grounds for rejection of the tree. The rootball size shall be
determined from the elevation of the root/trunk flare in accordance with American
Standard for Nursery Stock for the caliper size of the tree.
8. Size: Caliper measurement for trees shall be taken on the trunk 6” above the natural
ground line. Height and spread dimensions refer to the main body of the plant and
not from branch tip to tip. If a range of size is given, no plant shall be less than the
minimum size and not less than 50% of the plants shall be as large as the
maximum size specified. Plants that meet measurements but do not possess a
normal balance between height and spread shall be rejected.
Trees larger than specified may be used only if approved by the Architect. Use of
such plants shall not increase the contract price. If larger plants are approved, the
root ball shall be increased in proportion to the size of the plant, in accordance with
the American Standard for Nursery Stock.
9. Substitution shall not be permitted.
2.2
PLANT MIX SOIL MATERIALS
A. General
1. All plant mix soil material shall fulfill the requirements for new plant mixes as
specified. Specified soil is a manufactured product comprised of several natural
materials.
2. Samples of individual components of plant mixes and also blended plant mixes
shall be submitted by the Contractor for testing and analysis to the approved
testing laboratory. Include verification testing of on-site sub soils. Comply with
specific materials requirements specified.
a. No base component or soil components for plant mixes shall be used until
certified test reports by an approved agricultural chemist have been received
and approved by the Architect.
b. As necessary, make any and all soil mix amendments and resubmit tests
reports indicating amendments until approved.
3. The Owner may request additional testing by Contractor for confirmation of mix
quality and/or soil mix amendments at any time until completion.
B. Base Component Material
1. Base Component Material shall be sand that meets the requirements outlined
below mixed by volume with loam material that meets the requirements outlined
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 11
below. Base component materials shall not be site salvaged and must be off-site
borrow material.
2. Test Base Component Materials, both individual components and mixed materials,
for compliance with material specifications. These test criteria and results, when
approved, shall establish the standard to which all subsequent Base Component
Material tests must conform.
3. Prior to mixing Base Component Material with organic matter (leaf mold or yard
waste compost), have one (1) composite sample tested from each 50 CY of
material intended for use in soil mixes of planting work.
4. Sand for Base Component Material shall meet the following requirements:
a. Texture:
Sand Fraction
Gravel
Very coarse sand
Coarse sand
Medium sand
Fine sand
Very fine sand
Size (mm)
> 2.0
1.0 – 2.0
0.5 – 1.0
0.25 – 0.5
0.1 – 0.25
0.05 – 0.1
Sieve Size
#10
#18
#35
#60
#140
#270
% Passing
95 – 100%
90 – 100%
65 – 75%
15 – 20%
0 – 4%
0 – 2%
b. Chemical Analysis:
1) Soil reaction (pH): 5.0 – 6.5 ± 0.5
2) Soluble salt content (Conductivity): < 1.5 dSm-1
c. Material shall have a saturated hydraulic conductivity rate of no less than 30
inches per hour, per ASTM 1815.
5. Loam for Base Component Material shall meet the following requirements:
a. Soil Texture per ASTM D422 or ASTM F1632, as determined on material
passing a 2 mm screen:
Main Fractions
Sand
Silt
Clay
Size (mm)
0.05-2.0
0.002-0.05
<0.002
Percent
83 - 87
7 - 10
4-8
In addition, maximum size shall be ½”, the total gravel (> 2 mm) shall be
less than 10% of the total material, and the sand passing the 2 mm screen
shall have the following particle size distribution:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 12
Sand Fraction
Very coarse
Coarse
Medium
Fine
Very fine
Size (mm)
1.0 – 2.0
0.5 – 1.0
0.25 – 0.5
0.10 – 0.25
0.05 – 0.10
Sieve Size
#18
#35
#60
#140
#270
% Passing
87-90
65-71
34-42
17-23
14-18
b. Chemical Analysis:
1) Organic matter content (%) oven dry weight of soil shall be within the range
of 4 to 10%.
2) Soil reaction (pH): 6.0 ± 0.5
3) Soluble salt content (Conductivity): < 1.5 dSm-1
6. Before base sand-loam mix is used for mixing with organic amendments,
handle and pile the mix in the following manner:
a. Mix the base sand with base loam in a ratio of 3 parts sand to 1 part loam.
Adjustments to the ratio may have to be made to meet the specifications for
the base mix. Homogenize to make a uniform mix, free of subsoil lenses
and other irregularities.
b. Aerate the base mix to make a friable planting medium.
c. Screen out all clay lumps, stones, roots, and other debris.
7. Material Requirements, Base Component Mix: The final mix of sand and loam
materials shall substantially conform to the following:
a. Soil Texture per ASTM D422 or ASTM F1632, as determined on material
passing a 2 mm screen:
Main Fractions
Sand
Silt
Clay
Size (mm)
0.05-2.0
0.002-0.05
<0.002
Percent
95.0
3.0
2.0
In addition, maximum size shall be ½”, the total gravel (> 2 mm) shall be
less than 5% of the total material, and the sand passing the 2 mm screen
shall have the
following particle size distribution:
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 13
Sand Fraction
Very coarse sand
Coarse sand
Medium sand
Fine sand
Very fine sand
Size (mm)
1.00
0.50
0.25
0.10
0.05
Sieve Size
#18
#35
#60
#140
#270
% Passing
92-95
67-73
20-26
5-9
5
b. Chemical Analysis:
1) Organic matter content (%) oven dry weight of soil: 1- 4%
2) Soil reaction (pH): 6 - 7
3) Soluble salt content (Conductivity) - < 1.5 dSm-1
c. Saturated hydraulic conductivity of no less than 15 inches per hour per
ASTM 1815.
C. Organic Matter: Organic matter for amending planting media shall be a stable, material
produced from the aerobic decomposition and curing of yard wastes. The compost
shall meet the following criteria
1) Organic matter content of no less than 40% as determined by ASTM
2974-87
2) Moisture content of 35 to 70% as determined by ASTM D2974.
3) Carbon to nitrogen ratio of 15:1 to 30:1
4) Soluble salts not exceeding 4 dSm-1
5) Solvita Maturity Index 6 to 8
6) 95 – 100% passing a 3/8” screen
7) pH 6 to 8
8) Non-phytotoxic, watercress germination test
9) Biological Organisms: The compost shall have the following levels of
organisms (direct microscopy). Refer to Article 1.04 E.15 for testing and
sampling requirements.
· 15 to 30 or more µg active bacteria /g, dry weight (d.w.) compost
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 14
· 150 µg (fungal compost) to 300 or more µg (bacterial compost) total
bacteria /g dw compost
· 2 to 10 µg or more active fungi /g, d.w. compost
· 150 to 200 µg total fungal biomass /g, d.w. compost
· 10,000 or more flagellates
· 10,000 or more amoebae
· 20 - 50 ciliates.
· 50 – 100 Total nematodes
· No root-feeding nematodes
2.3
SOIL AMENDMENT MATERIAL
E. Ground Limestone: Ground Limestone as a soil amendment material will only be used
pending results of analysis.
1. Provide a Ground Agricultural Limestone with a minimum of 88% of calcium and
magnesium carbonates.
2. Ground Limestone material shall have a total 100% passing the 10 mesh sieve,
minimum of 90% passing the 20 mesh sieve and a minimum of 60% passing the
100 mesh sieve.
E.
Lightweight Aggregate: Provide an expanded shale in accordance with the following:
2.
3.
4.
5.
Aggregate size shall be 3/4" to - #4 size and, shall conform to the following sieve
analysis:
Sieve Size
% Passing
1”
3/4”
1/2”
3/8”
#4
100
96.9
52.7
25.8
2.6
Dry loose weight: 50.8 lbs./cu.ft.
Dry rodded weight: 50.5 lbs./cu.ft
Specific Gravity: SSD+l. 51
F. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable with a minimum 99 percent passing through No. 6
sieve and a maximum 10 percent passing through No. 40 sieve.
G. Agricultural Gypsum: Finely ground, containing a minimum of 90 percent calcium
sulfate.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 15
H. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials, of a size as
specified.
2.4
PLANTING SOIL MIXES
A. Adequate quantities of mixed planting soil materials shall be provided to attain, after
compaction and natural settlement, all design finish grades.
B. Uniformly mix ingredients using a mechanical soil blender designed for such purpose
as specified for each Mix Type (Base Component Material, compost, and other
ingredients deemed to be necessary as a result of testing). Windrowing / tilling on an
approved hard surface area may also be used as an alternative. Organic matter shall
be maintained moist, not wet during mixing.
1. Mixing of Amendments: Add organic amendment in proportions as specified and
as confirmed by testing.
Testing of Plant Mixes:
1. Perform initial tests to confirm compliance with base material and mix
specifications. These test results, when approved, will establish the standard to
which all other test results must conform.
2. Follow-up Testing: Have one (1) composite sample delivery and upon arrival to the
site from each 50 CY or as required by the Owner for use in each type plant mix to
include the following:
a. Particle size analysis:
Material.
Use sieve sizes as specified for Base Component
b. Organic matter content.
c. Nutrient Analysis:
1) Have nutrient levels (pH, ammonium nitrogen, nitrate nitrogen, nitrite
nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium, magnesium, calcium, magnesium, zinc,
iron, copper, and manganese) tested, and request testing laboratory
recommendations for additional fertilizer requirements at all plant areas if
nutrient levels are below average. Soluble salts shall also be tested.
2) Nutrient deficiencies in soils of plant areas shall be corrected during the
maintenance period in the season following installation not at time of
installation.
b.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
Biological Organisms: The mixes shall have the following levels of organisms
(direct microscopy). Refer to Article 1.04 E.15 for testing and sampling
requirements. Mix shall have microbiological populations as listed below:
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 16
Plant
Material
Deciduous
Trees
Active
Total
Baterial
Bacterial
Biomass Biomass
Active
Total
Hyphal
Fungal
Fungal
Diameter
Biomass Biomass (µg /g)
(µg /g)
(µg /g)
(µg /g)
1.0-5.0
50-200
10.0
50.0
(µg /g)
– 500
2000
– 3.0
Protozoa Numbers/g:
Total
Beneficial
Nematode
Ciliates Numbers
(#/g)
Flagellates
Amoebae
5000+
5000+
25
50
– 50 - 75
D. Soil Mix Types: Provide the following planting soil mix types at the locations indicated.
Percentages of components, unless otherwise noted, will be established upon
completion of individual test results for components of the various mixes. The
controlling factor will be the percent (%) organic matter as specified for each mix. Note
that percent (%) by volume of components will be, in large part, determined by the
compost. Specifically the bulk density of the compost will directly impact the organic
matter readings which have been specified for each mix.
1. Soil A:
a. Organic amendment shall be mixed with the Base Component (sand-loam)
mix at a rate necessary to provide an organic matter content of 5-6% by
weight, as determined by ASTM F1647.
b. This material shall be used as backfill immediately adjacent to the tree root
ball.
2. Structural Planting Soil Mix:
a. Soil A: 60%
b. Lightweight Aggregate (ex. Solite or approved equal): 40%.
c. Other amendments as required by test results and as approved.
d. This material shall be used in tree trench beyond the immediate
vicinity of the root ball as shown on the details.
E. Stockpiling
a. General: Stockpiling on-site, off-site, and at source should be restricted to no more
than the needs of what can be used in a 24-hr. period. Under no circumstances
shall on-site or off-site stored mataria1 exceed 50 CY. Stockpiles should be no
more than 6 feet in height to prevent anaerobic conditions within the pile(s).
Composts should be turned weekly to prevent anaerobic conditions within the
piles. Stockpiles shall be sheltered from weather to prevent excessive water
absorption and dispersal by winds.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 17
2.05
MULCH
A. Mulch: Provide 3/8” limestone at 2” depth where indicated on drawings.
2.06
ROOTBALL STABILIZATION SYSTEMS
A. Stakes and Guys:
1. General: Stakes and guys shall only be required if directed by the Architect to
prevent wind overturn of proposed trees.
2. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood, redwood, or nontoxic pressure-preservative-treated softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and
other defects, 2 by 2 inches (50 by 50 mm) by length indicated, pointed at one end,
4 per tree.
3. Guying Material: Flat woven polypropylene material ¾” wide, 900 lb. break strength,
white in color as provided by Deep Root Partners, L.P., 345 Lorton Avenue #103,
Burlingame, CA (800-458-7668) or approved equivalent.
B. Single-Stake Systems.
C. Subsurface Rootball Pinning Systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
VERIFICATION
A. Prior to construction and soil placement operations at tree trenches, ascertain the
location of all electric cables conduits under-drainage systems and utility lines. Take
proper precaution so as not to disturb or damage sub-surface elements. Contractor
failing to take these precautions shall be responsible for making requisite repairs to
damaged utilities at Contractor's own expense.
B. It is the explicit intent of this Specification to use continuous trenches infilled with
Structural Planting Soil (See Section 2.04, part D, paragraph 2 above) between
individual tree pits. Interruption of continuous trenches is permitted only at driveways,
fire hydrants and major utility interferences, or as otherwise determined by the
Architect.
C. Verify that required underground utilities are available, located, and ready for use.
Coordinate with other trades.
D. Verify that all work requiring access through or adjacent to areas where plant mixes are
to be placed has been completed and no further access will be required.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 18
3.2
PERCOLATION TEST
A. Contractor to perform percolation test after digging the trench to the appropriate depth
and prior to placing any soil mixes.
B. A percolation test shall be conducted by performing the following steps in sequence:
1. Prepare a test hole located within the proposed tree pit. The test hole shall have a
diameter of 12 inches, as precisely as possible, with vertical sides 18 inches deep
not including any allowable liners or filter layers on either the bottom or sides.
2. Establish a fixed point at the top or bottom of the test hole from which all
measurements will be taken.
3. Scratch the bottom and sides of the test hole to remove any smeared soil surfaces,
taking care not to significantly change the hole dimensions. Add two inches of
coarse sand to protect the bottom from scouring, or insert a board or other
impervious object in the hole so that water may be poured down or on it during the
filling operation. A mesh or perforated liner designed to maintain the test hole
dimensions in extremely loose soils while allowing essentially unrestricted flow of
water may be used with permission of the Owner.
4. Carefully fill the hole with clear water to a minimum depth of 12 inches from the
bottom of the hole. Maintain this minimum 12-inch or greater water level by adding
water as necessary in order to saturate surrounding soils for a period no less than
15 minutes after first filling the hole.
5. After saturation, if the water level drops to a depth of nine inches in fewer than 30
minutes, measure the length of time in minutes for it to drop from a depth of nine
inches to a depth of six inches. If the rate is erratic in the opinion of the Owner, the
hole shall be refilled and soaked until the drop per increment of time is steady. The
time for the level to drop from a depth of nine inches to a depth of six inches,
divided by three, is the percolation rate in minutes per inch.
6. If the initial three-inch drop requires more than 30 minutes (rate equal to more than
ten minutes per inch) the soil shall be saturated by filling the hole to the top and
maintaining it full for at least four hours. The soil should then be permitted to swell
a minimum of 12 hours so that the soil conditions will approach those which exist
during the wettest season of the year. After the 12-hour swelling period, the test
shall be made again by filling the hole to a 12-inch depth and maintaining that level
for 15 minutes, letting the level drop to nine inches, then timing the drop between
nine inches and six inches. The time elapsed between nine inches and six inches,
divided by three, shall be the percolation rate.
7. In certain soils, particularly coarse sands, the soil may be so pervious as to make a
percolation test difficult, impractical, and meaningless. At the discretion of the
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 19
Owner, the percolation test may be discontinued and a rate of two minutes per inch
or less can be assumed provided that at least 24 gallons of water has been added
to the percolation hole within 15 minutes and it is impossible to obtain a liquid
depth of nine inches.
3.3
PREPARATION OF TREE PIT AND TRENCH
A. Prior to laying and spreading Structural Planting Soil, the Contractor shall verify asconstructed or existing elevations and do whatever additional grading is necessary to
bring the subgrade to a true, smooth, slope as indicated on Drawings.
1. Clean up subgrade, remove and dispose of all debris and garbage prior to
inspection, and prior to spreading Structural Planting Soil.
B. Any soils polluted by gasoline, oil, plaster, construction debris, unacceptable soils, or
other substances which would render the subgrade soils unsuitable for a proper plant
growth shall be removed from the premises whether or not such pollution occurs or
exists prior to or during the Contract period. In the event that such material is placed,
this material shall be removed and replaced with approved material. All remedial
operations associated with soil mixes and controlled fill shall be reviewed and
approved by the Owner.
3.4
PLANTING MIXTURES
A. Structural Planting Soil shall be used within continuous tree trenches paved with openjointed granite blocks. Planting Soil Mix A shall be used within the tree pit and, after
tree installation, and shall be covered with mulch as specified herein.
B. All amendments shall be thoroughly incorporated into the mixture to assure uniform
distribution.
C. Additional amendments shall be mixed into the soil as recommended by the testing
laboratory and as approved by the Architect for each tree type and condition of
installation.
3.5
PLACING STRUCTURAL PLANTING SOIL
A. Remove all large clods lumps, brush, roots stumps, litter, and other foreign material
and stones one-half inch (1/2”) in diameter or larger. Dispose of removed material
legally off-site.
B. Do not place a muddy or wet soil mix.
C. Place and spread Structural Planting Soil over approved subgrade to a depth
sufficiently greater than the depth required for indicated sub-base and granite blocks
as indicated, so that after natural settlement, compaction and misting and/or light
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 20
rolling, the completed work will conform to the lines grades, and elevations shown or
otherwise indicated.
D. Place Structural Planting Soil in maximum 6-inch lifts and compact each lift to 95%
maximum, 92% minimum, standard proctor density. Do not overcompact.
3.6
PLANTING OPERATION
A. Trees shall be protected at all times from sun or drying winds. Trees that cannot be
planted immediately upon delivery shall be kept in the shade and well watered by the
Contractor. Trees shall not remain unplanted for longer than one day after delivery.
B. Planting Depth
Trees shall be placed on compacted subgrade. If trees cannot be set on compacted
subgrade, place tree on Planting Soil Mix A at the depth where roots spread from trunk
as shown in diagram. The trunk flare must be located and placed at the correct level
before continuing planting procedures. Expose flare of trunk by removing excess fill on
top of the rootball.
All ropes and strings must be cut. Non-biodegradable material must be removed and the
burlap folded back from the top of the ball. Completely remove drum lacing and wire
baskets. . When placement of the trees has been approved by the Architect, Planting
Soil Mix A shall be placed within tree pit zone. Soil must be laid in layers and compacted
at 6 to 8 inch intervals and thoroughly settled with water. Trees shall stand plumb after
guying.
D. Staking, Guying and Wrapping
1. If directed by the Architect four 8’ straight, sound, rough sawn wooden stakes are to
be used per tree.
2. Tree wrap shall not be used on the trees.
E. Pruning
1. Each cut should be made carefully, at the correct location, leaving a smooth
surface with no jagged edges or torn bark. The correct anatomical location is just
beyond the branch collar.
2. Large or heavy limbs should be removed using three cuts. The first cut undercuts
the limb one or two feet from the parent branch or trunk. The second cut is the top
cut which is made slightly further out on the limb than the undercut. The third cut is
to remove the stub.
3. The natural character of the plant shall be preserved.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 21
4. All dead wood, suckers, broken or badly bruised branches shall be removed.
5. Excessive pruning at the time of transplanting must be avoided. The extent of top
pruning should be based upon the ability of the plant roots to function.
6. Pruning shall be done with clean, sharp tools. No leaders shall be cut.
3.7
MAINTENANCE OF TREES AFTER PLANTING
1. Maintenance shall begin immediately after each tree is planted and shall continue through
the date of final acceptance of the contract (see Section 1.09, above) or as required by the
specifications: Period of Establishment (see Item 2, below). In the event of the threat of
serious damage from pests or pathogens, the plants shall be treated by preventative or
remedial measures approved for good horticultural or arboricultural practice. All trees shall
be watered at the times and at the rates necessary for seasonal conditions for healthy
growth.
Contractor or subcontractor is to inspect the trees at least once per month – or more
frequently as is seasonably appropriate.
Maintain trees by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, tightening and repairing
staple supports, and resetting to proper grades or vertical position as required to establish
healthy, viable plantings.
Provide follow-up applications of biostimulant as follows: Apply three (3) applications of
biostimulant to all trees at the interval of two (2) months after initial planting, four [4] months
after planting, and finally, six (6) months after planting. Apply biostimulant as per the
manufacturer’s directions, mixing one (1) pound of the biostimulant powder per 100 [one
hundred] gallons of water. All tree planting pits shall be watered with this mixture so as to
thoroughly saturate soil.
2. Period of Establishment: The contractor shall be required to continue the work specified
under “Maintenance of Trees After Planting” for a period of two [2] years after the final
inspection, and until acceptance and completion of all planting items in the contract.
3.8
ACCEPTANCE
1. The Architect shall inspect all work for acceptance upon written request of the Contractor.
The request shall be received at least 10 calendar days before the anticipated date of
inspection.
2. Upon completion and re-inspection of all repairs or renewals necessary, the Owner shall
certify in writing as to the acceptance of the work.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 22
3.9
FINAL INSPECTION AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE
At the end of the guarantee period, the Architect will inspect all guaranteed work at the
written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received 10 calendar days before
the anticipated date for final inspection. Upon completion and re-inspection of all repairs
or renewals necessary, the Architect shall certify in writing as to the final acceptance of the
project.
3.10
DISPOSAL AND CLEAN UP
A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by soil work from paved areas. Clean wheels
of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved
areas. (See Section 1.04, part I, above)
B. Legally dispose of off-site all refuse and debris from these operations. Do not dump or
burn materials on site.
1. The Contractor shall remove waste materials, unsuitable and excess materials from
the Owner’s property and shall recycle and provide for reuse as specified, and
when deemed unsuitable for recycling and reuse, legally dispose of off-site.
C. Maintain the site in an orderly condition during the progress of the Work. Continuously
and promptly remove excess waste materials; keep walks and streets clear. Store
materials and equipment where directed. Promptly remove equipment, surplus
materials and debris and trash resulting from operations under this Contract upon
completion and prior to initial acceptance of Work. Leave the site in a neat and orderly
condition, i.e. “broom clean”.
END OF SECTION 329343
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STREET TREE PLANTING
329343 - 23
SECTION 331000 - WATER UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes water-distribution piping and specialties outside the building for the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Water services.
Fire-service mains.
Valves.
Valve boxes.
Fittings.
Division 31 Section “Earthwork” for excavation and backfill required for sewage
systems not included in this section.
Division 03 Section “Concrete” for concrete work required for water systems not
included in this section.
Division 22 Section – Plumbing for interior building systems not included in this
section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with City of Philadelphia Water Department Specification and Standard Details.
B.
Inspection and Approval: All water pipe and fittings shall have number cast or stamped
thereon and shall be made in accordance with the specifications of the Water
Department, the rules and regulations of the Water Department and subject to their
inspection and approval, except foundry inspection for pipe and fittings shall be hereby
waived and in lieu thereof, manufacturer shall certify by affidavit as to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Material of Composition.
Weight of Pipe or Fitting.
Date of Cast.
Test Bar Report.
Hydrostatic Tests.
Number of Pipe or Fitting.
Marking Pipe and Fittings:
1.
The weight, class or nominal thickness and casting period shall be shown on each
pipe and each cast iron fitting shall have the 250 PSI pressure rating cast thereon.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 1
2.
3.
D.
Disinfecting Water Mains:
1.
2.
E.
2.
3.
4.
5.
A.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to make himself thoroughly familiar with the
Philadelphia Streets Department and Pennsylvania Department of Transportation
(PennDOT) standard specifications for paving work, including the following:
2.
3.
4.
A.
All new pipe lines shall undergo a hydrostatic field test in accordance with AWWA
Standard C600-64 Section 13. The test pressure shall be 150 PSI. The contractor
shall take all necessary precautions to prevent this test pressure from entering the
adjoining distribution system.
The duration of each pressure test shall be at least one (1) hour.
Should the pipe line fail the test, the contractor shall make all necessary repairs and
the test repeated until satisfactory to the engineer.
All necessary repairs and retests shall be made at the contractor's expense.
After the satisfactory completion of the Hydrostatic and Sanitary Tests, the
corporation stop threads shall be mutilated.
PAVING AND SURFACING
1.
1.4
The contractor shall be required to disinfect all new water mains in accordance with
procedures set forth in the latest A.W.W.A. standard for disinfecting water mains
(A.W.W.A.- C-601).
Copies of the 1983 Philadelphia Water Department standard specifications W-22
for disinfecting water mains are available in room 1100, Municipal Services
Building, Philadelphia, PA.
Hydrostatic Tests:
1.
1.3
The manufacturer's mark, the year the pipe and fitting were cast shall be cast or
stamped thereon.
The letters "DI' or "DUCTILE" for Ductile Pipe and "CI" or "CAST IRON" for cast iron
fittings shall be cast or stamped upon each fitting and both ends of the pipe
Philadelphia Streets Department, Standard Specifications for Paving and Repaving
- 1967.
Philadelphia Streets Department, 1984 Standard Construction Items.
PennDOT, Form 408, Specifications - Latest publication.
Standard Specifications of track owner for paving restoration in track areas, where
applicable.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
Pipes and Fittings.
Valves and accessories.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 2
B.
Field quality-control test reports.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For the following:
1.
1.5
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
1.6
A.
Valves.
Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
COORDINATION
Coordinate connection to water main with utility company.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
A.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the manufacturers specified.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
PIPING MATERIALS
Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 3
2.3
A.
PIPE AND FITTINGS
Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, Thickness Class 56, with push-on-joint,
bell- and plain-spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
1.
Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, Thickness Class 56, ductile- or
gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.
a.
2.4
Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
CORROSION CONTROL
A.
Corrosion control shall be performed in accordance with the Water Department Standard
Specifications W-23.2.
B.
Mechanical joints, nuts and bolts shall be cleaned when dry by wire brushing. A cold
applied bitumen coating such as Roskote Mastic R28 Rubberized or equal, shall be
thoroughly applied to the joints, and bolting material. Allow coating to dry one hour
before backfilling.
C.
The coating procedure shall apply to all iron and steel, anchors, harnesses and
miscellaneous forms.
2.5
COATING AND CEMENT LINING
A.
The internal surface of all pipes and fittings shall be cement lined and seal coated. The
exterior surface shall be coated with bituminous.
B.
The cement lining shall be in accordance with AWWA Specification C-104.
C.
A minimum of 1/8 inch thick cement lining shall be applied to pipes and fittings, 3-inch to
12-inch diameter inclusive.
D.
Payment for coating and cement lining shall be included in the prices bid for the
applicable items.
2.6
A.
DUCTILITY TESTS
In addition to the standard acceptance tests specified in ANSI specification A21.51
(AWWA C151 Specification), the manufacturer of ductile iron pipe shall perform and
additional test on ductile iron pipe in order to ascertain and assure its ductility. The
ductility test shall be made by the ball impression test, the ring test or an approved equal.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 4
2.7
A.
2.8
A.
2.9
GASKETS
The gasket shall be plain rubber base material as furnished by the makers of the push on
joint pipe.
CAST IRON FITTINGS
Cast iron fittings shall have a 250 PSI pressure rating in accordance with ANSI-A 21.10
(AWWA C110) Specifications.
MECHANICAL JOINT
A.
Mechanical joint fittings shall be in accordance with the standards established by the cast
Iron Pipe Research Association. All fittings shall be provided with bell ends at all openings
unless specifically ordered or otherwise required.
B.
Hydrant valve anchoring tees, offsets, bends and sleeves used to affect closure shall be
mechanical joint fittings, 250 PSI pressure rating, furnished complete.
C.
Approved mechanical joint retainer glands shall be used for all mechanical joint fittings.
D.
Retainer glands shall be of ductile iron. The tee head bolts and hexagon nuts shall
comply with dimensions as outlined in AWWA Specifications C111, and the bolting
material shall be of high strength, low alloy steel as specified in AWWA Specifications
C111.
E.
Where a push on joint is located less than twelve (12) feet from a mechanical joint fitting,
excluding tees, the push on joint shall be harnessed.
F.
The gasket shall be plain rubber base material, as furnished by pipe manufacturer and
shall comply with AWWA Specifications C111.
2.10
BELL AND SPIGOT JOINT
A.
Bell and spigot cast iron fittings may be used for connections to existing mains where
necessary, and shall be in accordance with specifications set forth in the handbook of
cast iron pipe of the cast iron pipe research association, and in accordance with standard
specifications of the City of Philadelphia.
B.
Bell and spigot joints shall be sealed with lead only, pure gum rubber packing gasket,
with scarified joint, to be approved by the engineer, shall be inserted into the bell prior to
pouring of the joint material.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 5
2.11
A.
2.12
A.
2.13
STANDARD PRESSURE GATE VALVE
Gate valves shall be in accordance with standard specifications for standard pressure
gate valves W-16/19, 1965. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, they shall have
vertical stems where the stated depth of the cover permits. The ductile iron retainer
glands as specified under mechanical joint fittings shall be used for all valves.
TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES
Hackensack type tapping sleeves and standard pressure Hackensack type tapping valve
with mechanical joint outlet, complete, including all work and materials necessary for a
complete installation. Valves shall be in accordance with the City of Philadelphia Water
Department standard specification for gate valves, W-16/19 dated 1985.
STANDARD 7-INCH PLASTIC VALVE BOX
A.
The plastic valve box, complete, shall be made up of the following parts- bottom section,
top section, cast iron cover, cast iron adapter ring, and spacer units as required.
B.
The standard 7 inch plastic valve box shall conform to the specifications, and dimensions
of the City of Philadelphia standard details for water mains dated 1985.
2.14
STANDARD 7-INCH CAST IRON VALVE BOX
A.
The cast iron valve box shall be made up of three (3) sections. Top section with cover
plate, middle section and base section. The base section shall be sized to suit the valve
bonnet.
B.
The standard 7 inch cast iron valve box shall conform to the specifications, and
dimensions of the City of Philadelphia standard details for water mains dated 1985.
2.15
A.
COPPER TUBING
Copper tubing shall be type "K" conforming to ASTM Specification B-88.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
CONSTRUCTION
As shown on the standards as specified in applicable parts of standard specifications
and as follows:
1.
Furnishing and delivering cement lined and coated pipe to the site of work,
furnishing all labor, tools and equipment required and necessary for handling and
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 6
placing of pipe, cutting and plugging of pipe, making connections, pumping, joint
material, caulking, testing and disinfecting, tapping of mains, furnishing and
installing corporation stops for hydrostatic and sanitary tests as directed by the
engineer, and all appurtenant work as shown on the plans and/or as specified.
3.2
EXCAVATION
A.
All excavation shall be done in accordance with The City of Philadelphia specifications,
except as modified hereunder. The payment lines for excavation for water mains shall be
in accordance with the City's standard details for water mains.
B.
The price bid shall include the removal and disposal of existing paving and other
deleterious material within the payment lines fixed for excavation, furnishing, placing and
use of temporary sheathing and shoring, removal and disposal of abandoned pipes and
concrete masonry within the water main trench limits fixed for excavation, hauling and
disposal of excavated materials, temporarily supporting underground structures, refill
tamping.
C.
Removal and disposal of existing paving and base not within payment lines fixed for
excavation shall be included in the prices bid for the repaving items when applicable.
D.
All slides, caves, unauthorized excess excavation shall be at the cost of the contractor
and he shall refill without charge any cavities caused with suitable satisfactory material
including concrete or masonry if the engineer shall consider such material necessary.
E.
Before backfilling is finished around any structure, any adjustment necessary for approval
must be completed. Structures of masonry, concrete or other material requiring time in
which to obtain specified strength are not to be backfilled until permission for this work
has been granted by the engineer.
F.
It is the intention that any material found in the trench shall be suitable for backfill unless
rejected by the engineer and subject to the requirements concerning objectionable
matter.
G.
The subgrade backfilling (clean earth) in the pipe trench over the sand backfill shall be
mechanically tamped in 8 inch layers.
H.
Under no conditions will puddling be allowed or permitted
3.3
GASKET
A.
Lubricant shall be furnished in sufficient quantities to provide proper fitting for each
connection. The lubricant shall be non-toxic vegetable soap, as furnished by the makers
of push on joint pipe.
B.
To avoid damage to seal gaskets, the outside edges of field cut pipe shall be beveled
back 1/8 inch from cut ends on a 30 degree angle.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 7
3.4
CAST IRON FITTINGS 250 PSI PRESSURE RATING
Furnishing and installing cement lined and coated cast iron fittings of the various types, all
labor, materials, and equipment required to deliver the fittings to the site of work. All labor,
tools, trucks and equipment necessary for handling and placing fittings, nuts and bolts, making
connections, pumping, joint material, caulking, testing, disinfecting and coating for corrosion
control.
3.5
VALVE BOXES
A.
Valve boxes shall be set to grade, true and plumb with the valve operating nut centered in
the box.
B.
The valve box shall accommodate the Philadelphia Water Department standard key for
operating the valve.
3.6
CUTBACKS IN PAVEMENT AREAS
A.
Where trench width is less than 3 feet, concrete base restoration shall cover the trench
and extend 9 inches over undisturbed or compacted soil on each side.
B.
Where trench width is 3 feet or greater, concrete base restoration shall cover the trench
and extend 12 inches over undisturbed or compacted soil on each side.
C.
Surface course paving restoration shall cover the concrete base and extend 6 inches
beyond on each side. Bituminous surface course includes both binder course and
wearing course.
D.
Concrete pavement restoration shall cover the full area between original joints of the slab
disturbed, unless saw cutting of new jonts at least 12 inches beyond payment lines for
Excavating, and perpendicular to direction of traffic, is permitted by the Engineer.
E.
Where side of trench is less than 3 feet from curb, extend paving restoration to curb line.
F.
Remove curb, where necessary, to nearest joint.
3.7
A.
CURB, FOOTWAY AND DRIVEWAY PAVING
Where curb, footway or driveway paving are disturbed, restore in kind, to extend
determined by the Engineer, and to satisfaction of abutting property owners.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 8
3.8
JOINT SEALING
A.
All joints between new and existing bituminous wearing course shall be sealed with hot
asphalt before surface has cooled.
B.
Apply seal evenly to the surface for squeegee immediately after final rolling. Seal with hot
irons to completely fill surface voids and provide a watertight joint.
3.9
A.
IDENTIFICATION
Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for
underground water-service piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping.
See Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for underground warning tapes.
END OF SECTION 331000
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
WATER UTILITIES
331000 - 9
SECTION 333000 - SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes gravity-flow, nonpressure sanitary sewerage outside the building,
with the following components:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
A.
1.3
Cleanouts.
Fresh Air Inlets.
Division 31 Section “Earthwork” for excavation and backfill required for sewage
systems not included in this section.
Division 03 Section “Concrete” for concrete work required for sewage systems not
included in this section.
Division 22 Section – Plumbing for interior building systems including conductors,
horizontal branches, and connections to building waste systems not included in
this section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
City of Philadelphia Water Department specification for sewers and stormwater conduit.
REQUIREMENTS, TESTS AND INSPECTION
A.
All materials shall be tested for conformance to the current specifications, and in
accordance with the current standard test methods, of technical societies, institutes,
associations of Federal and State specifications, as called for in these specifications, in
the Special Specifications of the Contract or as called for by the Engineer. Current
specifications and current standard test methods are defined as the latest editions,
amendments of revisions that are current at the time of receipt of bids.
B.
The City of Philadelphia Water Department will inspect the tap connection of new sewer
laterals to the City of Philadelphia Sewers. Contractor to pay the cost of the City of
Philadelphia inspection.
C.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: All materials shall be obtained from firms regularly engaged
in manufacture of sewer system products of types, materials, and sizes required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use of similar service for not less than 5 years.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
333000 - 1
D.
Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience
on projects with storm sewage work similar to that required for project.
E.
Codes and Standards - Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portion of
City of Philadelphia Standard Plumbing Code pertaining to selection and installation of
storm and sewage system's materials and products.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data and installation instructions
for storm sewage materials and products.
B.
Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed stormwater
conduit and sewage piping and products, in accordance with requirements of Division
01.
C.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for stormwater conduit and
sewage system materials and products. Include this date, product data, shop drawings,
and record drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division
01.
D.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.5
A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS
General: Provide pipes as shown on the drawings, of weight/class indicated. Provide
pipe fittings and accessories of same material and weight/class as pipes, with joining
method as indicated.
PIPING MATERIALS
DUCTILE-IRON CULVERT PIPE AND FITTINGS
1.
Pipe: ASTM A 716, for push-on joints. Manufactured and tested per ANSI A21.51
(AWWA C151). Pipe 12 inches in diameter and smaller shall be thickness class 56.
Pipe larger than 12 inches in diameter shall be thickness Class 54.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
333000 - 2
2.
3.
4.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
Standard Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron, for push-on joints.
Compact Fittings: AWWA C153, for push-on joints.
Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS
Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for
joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be
joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each
end.
FRESH AIR INLETS
Fresh air inlets shall be per plan.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
EARTHWORK
Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earthwork."
INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A.
General: Install piping in accordance with governing authorities having jurisdiction, except
where more stringent requirements are indicated.
B.
Inspect piping before installation to detect apparent defects. Mark defective materials
with white paint and promptly remove from site.
C.
Lay piping beginning at the low point of the system, true to grades and alignment
indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert.
D.
Place bell ends and groove ends of piping facing upstream.
E.
The width of trenches for sewers shall be as shown on the Plans.
F.
Care shall be taken in placing the pipe into the trench to prevent damaging the joints or
joint-material and to prevent disturbing the trench.
G.
The manufacturer’s recommendations for pipe assembly must be closely followed. Care
must be taken to clean the mating surfaces of the joints before jointing. The jointing
surfaces shall be lubricated as recommended by the manufacturer. The pipe ends shall
be aligned and assembled by hand, bar or the use of a come-along. In all instances the
ends of the pipe must be protected against damage.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
333000 - 3
H.
Protection of Pipes: The mouth of the pipes, in the trenches, shall be carefully protected
from rock falls or damage from any other source. In addition, the mouth of the pipes shall
be provided with means to prevent earth or any other substance from entering.
I.
Length of Pipes: All pipes used in the construction of sewers, stormwater conduits and
other connects shall be the maximum length produced, except where shorter lengths are
required for closures, curved sewers or to secure proper locations for laterals or inlet
connections.
J.
Provisions of Lateral Connections:
1.
2.
Unless otherwise specified, provisions shall be made for lateral connections on
each side of the sewer and/or stormwater conduit in accordance with zoning
requirements, or with existing or preceeding building developments.
Laterals shall be constructed to have a direct fall between the building and or inlet
and the connection at the sewer.
K.
All pipe shall be placed on a stone or concrete cradle as shown on the plans. Pipe with
less than 3 feet of cover shall be encased in concrete, minimum thickness 9 inches.
L.
Connections: Laterals shall be connected to the sewer pipe with factory manufactured
wye branches. Pipe 10" and less shall be connected to sewer with a pipe saddle
connection.
M.
Installing Pipe Fittings:
1.
2.
3.
N.
3.3
A.
After the pipes are placed in the trench, they shall be prepared for coupling by
thoroughly cleaning and then lubricating the joint. For pipes manufactured to
accept "O" ring gaskets, the groove and the "O" ring gasket shall be lubricated as
recommended by the manufacturer. The gasket shall be placed in the groove and
the tension shall be equalized by inserting a suitable tool under the gasket and
running it around the pipe 3 times.
For pipes manufactured to accept fin type gaskets, the inside surface of the bell or
groove and the gasket shall be lubricated as recommended by the manufacturer.
After the joint is lubricated, the pipes shall be coupled immediately. The pipes shall
be pulled up tightly by using a winch, come-along or other appropriate method. A
visual check shall be made to see that the pipe is properly connected.
Factory manufactured wye branches or pipe saddles shall be used to connect laterals to
the City of Philadelphia sewer main. Field fabricated wye branches and connections are
not permitted.
FRESH AIR INLET INSTALLATION
Install fresh air inlet and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use
ductile-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for fresh air inlet and ductile-iron
soil pipe for riser extensions to fresh air inlet.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
333000 - 4
B.
Set frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block per plan.
C.
Set frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.
3.4
A.
3.5
CLOSING ABANDONED UTILITIES
Close open ends of abandoned underground utilities which are indicated to remain in
place. Provide sufficiently strong closures to withstand hydrostatic or earth pressure
which may result after ends of abandoned utilities have been closed.
1.
Close open ends of concrete or masonry utilities with no less than 8" thick brick
masonry bulkheads.
2.
Close open end of conduits with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other
acceptable methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Wood
plugs are not acceptable.
TAP CONNECTION
A.
Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's sanitary building drains
specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Sanitary Sewerage."
B.
Make connections to existing conduits and underground structures, so that finished work
will conform as nearly as practicable to requirements specified for new work.
C.
Use commercially manufactured wyes for branch connections. Field cutting into conduits
will not be permitted. Spring flows into existing lines and encase entire wye, plus 6"
overlap, with not less than 6" of 3000 psi 28-day compressive strength concrete.
D.
Branch connections made from one side into existing 12" to 21" conduit shall have a wye
sprung into the existing line, and entire wye encased with not less than 6" of 3000 psi 28day compressive strength concrete.
1.
For branch connections from side into existing 24" or larger conduit or to
underground structures, cut opening into unit sufficiently large to allow 3" of
concrete to be packed around entire connection. Cut ends of connection passing
through conduit or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside
wall, unless otherwise indicated. On outside of conduit structure wall, encase
entering connection in 6" of concrete for a minimum length of 12" to provide
additional support or collar from connection to undisturbed ground.
2.
Provide concrete which will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000
psi, unless otherwise noted.
3.
Use an epoxy bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete
and conduit material.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
333000 - 5
4.
3.6
A.
Take care while making tap connections to prevent concrete or debris from
entering existing conduit or structure. Remove debris, concrete or other extraneous
material which may accumulate.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has
occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at
completion of Project.
1.
2.
Submit separate report for each system inspection.
Defects requiring correction include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
4.
B.
Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between
structures.
Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or
cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects
are within allowances specified.
Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended,
or repaired, for leaks and defects.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24
hours' advance notice.
Submit separate report for each test.
Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction and the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
6.
Allowable leakage is maximum of 50 gal./inch of nominal pipe size per mile of
pipe, during 24-hour period.
Close openings in system and fill with water.
Purge air and refill with water.
Disconnect water supply.
Test and inspect joints for leaks.
Option: Test ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600, "Hydrostatic
Testing" Section. Use test pressure of at least 10 psig.
Air Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction and UNI-B-6.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
333000 - 6
C.
Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
D.
Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within
allowances specified.
3.7
CLEANING AND RESTORATION
A.
Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials.
B.
The work area shall be restored to its original or better condition. Restoration includes,
but is not limited to repairs or replacement of footway and curbing that is cracked or
broken by the Contractor and replacing brick in brick footways.
END OF SECTION 333000
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
333000 - 7
SECTION 334000 - STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes but is not limited to gravity-flow, non-pressure storm drainage
outside the building, with the following components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
Excavation and backfilling.
Installation of piping and fittings.
Installation of manholes, inlets, catch basins, cleanouts, vaults, swales and ditches.
Connection to existing utility lines.
Testing and related appurtenances.
Division 31 Section “Earthwork” for excavation and backfill required for sewage
systems not included in this section.
Division 03 Section “Concrete” for concrete work required for storm sewer systems
not included in this section.
Division 22 Section – Plumbing for interior building systems including conductors,
horizontal branches, and connections to roof and deck drains not included in this
section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
City of Philadelphia Water Department specification for sewers and stormwater conduit.
REQUIREMENTS, TESTS AND INSPECTION
All materials shall be tested for conformance to the current specifications, and in
accordance with the current standard test methods, of technical societies, institutes,
associations of Federal and State specifications, as called for in these specifications, in
the Special Specifications of the Contract or as called for by the Engineer. Current
specifications and current standard test methods are defined as the latest editions,
amendments of revisions that are current at the time of receipt of bids.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 1
B.
The City of Philadelphia Water Department will inspect the tap connection of new
stormwater sewers to the City of Philadelphia Sewers. Contractor to pay the cost of the
City of Philadelphia inspection.
C.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: All materials shall be obtained from firms regularly engaged
in manufacture of stormwater conduit and sewers system's products of types, materials,
and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use of similar service for
not less than 5 years.
D.
Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience
on projects with storm sewage work similar to that required for project.
E.
Codes and Standards - Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portion of
City of Philadelphia Standard Plumbing Code pertaining to selection and installation of
storm and sewage system's materials and products.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data and installation instructions
for storm sewage materials and products.
B.
Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed stormwater
conduit and sewage piping and products, in accordance with requirements of Division
01.
C.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for stormwater conduit and
sewage system materials and products. Include this date, product data, shop drawings,
and record drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division
01.
D.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
B.
Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
C.
Handle catch basins and stormwater inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging
instructions.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS
General: Provide pipes as shown on the drawings, of weight/class indicated. Provide
pipe fittings and accessories of same material and weight/class as pipes, with joining
method as indicated.
PIPING MATERIALS
Reinforced Concrete Pipe and Fittings
1.
2.
B.
Ductile-Iron Culvert Pipe and Fittings
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.
3.
4.
A.
Pipe: ASTM A 716, for push-on joints. Manufactured and tested per ANSI A21.51
(AWWA C151). Pipe 12 inches in diameter and smaller shall be thickness class 56.
Pipe larger than 12 inches in diameter shall be thickness Class 54, unless specified
otherwise on the Plans.
Standard Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron, for push-on joints.
Compact Fittings: AWWA C153, for push-on joints.
Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
Corrugated Metal Pipe and Fittings
1.
2.3
Circular reinforced concrete pipe used in the construction of stormwater conduits,
including wye branches, bends and fittings, shall conform to ASTM C 76 Standard
Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe, Class
III, Wall B. Quadrant reinforcing of the pipe will not be permitted.
All reinforced concrete pipe used in the construction of stormwater conduits shall
have rubber gasket joints. The joints and the gasket material shall conform to
ASTM C 443 Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and
Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets. The joint shall consist of a bell or groove on
one end of a unit of pipe and a spigot or tongue on the adjacent end of the joining
pipe.
Corrugated-Steel Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 760/A 760M, Type I with fittings of
similar form and construction as pipe.
Special-Joint Bands: Corrugated steel with O-ring seals.
Standard-Joint Bands: Corrugated steel.
Perforations: AASTHO M36, Class 2 Perforations.
NONPRESSURE-TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS
Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for
joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 3
joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each
end.
2.4
CLEANOUTS
1.
2.5
TRENCH DRAINS
1.
2.6
A.
Trench Drains shall be per plan and installed per manufacturer’s recommendations.
MANHOLES
General:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Cleanouts shall be per plan.
Manholes shall precast reinforced concrete manhole sections.
Manholes shall be constructed with steps and/or ladder bars from the invert of the
sewer or stormwater conduit to the top of the manhole.
Manholes built into sanitary sewers or combined sewers shall be fitted with cast
iron frames and closed covers. Manholes built into stormwater conduits shall be
fitted with cast iron frames and solid or vented covers.
Precast Concrete Manholes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Precast reinforced concrete manhole sections, including grade rings, eccentric
cones, riser sections and base sections, shall comply with ASTM C478 Standard
Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections, and shall be
tested and registered with the Quality Certification Staff in accordance with the
Quality Certification Standard QC-1 to Precast Concrete Products. In addition,
manufacturers must be certified in accordance with QC-1 by the Quality
Certification Staff and shop drawings must be approved by the Water Department
Design Branch.
Precast reinforced concrete manholes built into sanitary, combined and
intercepting sewers shall have rubber gasket joints which shall conform to ASTM
C443 Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert
Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets. Precast reinforced concrete manholes built into
stormwater conduits shall have rubber gasket joints or mortar joints.
Resilient Connectors shall be used to insert pipe into precast reinforced concrete
manholes that are built into any intercepting sewers. Resilient Connectors shall
meet the requirements of ASTM C923 Standard Specification for Resilient
Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures and Pipes.
The mortar shall meet the requirements of Section 2.04.H, paragraph 3.In addition
to the requirements specified in ASTM C478, the concrete mix shall meet the
following: The minimum compressive strength shall be 4,000 psi.
The
water-cement ration shall be 0.45. The minimum cement content shall be 564 lb/cu
yd. The cement shall be Portland Cement Type I IA, II, IIA III or IIIA. The slump shall
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 4
be 3 inches maximum and 1 inch minimum. The air content shall be 6 + %.
Air-Entraining Admixtures must meet the requirements of ASTM C260 Standard
Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. Coarse aggregate shall be
No. 67 or No. 57.
C.
Ladders, Bars and Steps:
1.
2.
D.
Manhole Frames and Covers:
1.
2.
3.
2.7
A.
Manhole frames and covers shall be tested and registered with the Quality
Certification Staff in Accordance with the Quality Certification Standard QC-2 for
Gray Iron Castings. In addition, manufacturers must be certified in accordance with
QC-2 by the Quality Certification Staff and shop drawings must be approved by the
Water Department Design Branch.
Manhole frames and covers shall be made of Class 30B gray iron which is tested in
accordance with ASTM A48 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. The
name of the foundry and the heat and lot number shall be cast into the frame and
into the exterior side of the cover.
Manholes frames and covers shall be thoroughly cleaned. All projections and
roughness shall be ground smooth. The bearing surfaces of the frame and cover
shall not rock or jam. Frames and covers shall not be painted.
PRECAST CONCRETE VAULT
1.
2.8
Aluminum for manhole steps shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with
ASTM B221 Standard Supplications for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
Shapes and Tubes, Alloy 6061 T6. Embedded ends of aluminum steps shall have
2 coats of bitumastic.
The plastic encasement shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with
ASTM D2146 Standard Specification for Proplyene Plastic Molding and Extrusion
Materials. Type 11-49108-D.
Precast, Reinforced Concrete Vaults shall be per plan.
INLETS
General:
1.
2.
3.
Inlets shall precast reinforced concrete.
All inlet catch basins shall have traps, unless otherwise shown on the plans, which
may be placed in wall as indicated on the Drawings.
The use of 90 degree bends in the pipe connection between the inlet and the sewer
is prohibited.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 5
B.
Precast Concrete Inlets:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Precast reinforced concrete catch basins shall comply with ASTM C913 Standard
Specification for Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater Structures and shall be
tested and registered according to the Quality Certification Standard QC-1 for
Precast Concrete Products.
In addition to the requirements specified in ASTM C913, the concrete mix shall
meet the following: The minimum compressive strength shall be 4,000 psi. The
water-cement ratio shall be 0.45. The minimum cement content shall be 564
lb./cu.yd. The cement shall be Portland Cement Type I, IA, II, IIA, III or IIIA. The
slump shall be 3 inches maximum and 1 inch minimum. The air content shall be
6% plus or minus 1%. Admixtures, other than air-entraining, must be approved
prior to use. Coarse aggregate shall be No. 67 or 57.
The reinforcing shall be as described in ASTM C913. The welded wire fabric used
for reinforcing shall be the sheet type.
Precast reinforced concrete inlet adjustment risers Grate inlets shall conform to
ASTM C913.
Inlet Grates and Frames:
1.
Inlet grates and frames shall conform to PennDOT Standard Drawing No. R.C. 34
Cast Iron Type M and C inlets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
EARTHWORK
Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earthwork."
INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A.
General: Install piping in accordance with governing authorities having jurisdiction, except
where more stringent requirements are indicated.
B.
Inspect piping before installation to detect apparent defects. Mark defective materials
with white paint and promptly remove from site.
C.
Lay piping beginning at the low point of the system, true to grades and alignment
indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert.
D.
Place bell ends and groove ends of piping facing upstream.
E.
The width of trenches for sewers shall be as shown on the Plans.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 6
F.
Care shall be taken in placing the pipe into the trench to prevent damaging the joints or
joint-material and to prevent disturbing the trench.
G.
The manufacturer’s recommendations for pipe assembly must be closely followed. Care
must be taken to clean the mating surfaces of the joints before jointing. The jointing
surfaces shall be lubricated as recommended by the manufacturer. The pipe ends shall
be aligned and assembled by hand, bar or the use of a come-along. In all instances the
ends of the pipe must be protected against damage.
H.
Protection of Pipes: The mouth of the pipes, in the trenches, shall be carefully protected
from rock falls or damage from any other source. In addition, the mouth of the pipes shall
be provided with means to prevent earth or any other substance from entering.
I.
Length of Pipes: All pipes used in the construction of sewers, stormwater conduits and
other connects shall be the maximum length produced, except where shorter lengths are
required for closures, curved sewers or to secure proper locations for laterals or inlet
connections.
J.
Provisions of Lateral Connections:
1.
2.
Unless otherwise specified, provisions shall be made for lateral connections on
each side of the sewer and/or stormwater conduit in accordance with zoning
requirements, or with existing or preceeding building developments.
Laterals shall be constructed to have a direct fall between the building and or inlet
and the connection at the sewer.
K.
All pipes shall be placed on a stone or concrete cradle as shown on the plans. Pipe with
less than 2 feet of cover shall be encased in concrete, minimum thickness 4 inches.
L.
Connections: Laterals shall be connected to the sewer pipe with factory manufactured
wye branches. Pipe 10”and less shall be connected to sewer with a pipe saddle
connection, unless indicated otherwise in the plans.
M.
Installing Pipe Fittings:
1.
2.
3.
After the pipes are placed in the trench, they shall be prepared for coupling by
thoroughly cleaning and then lubricating the joint. For pipes manufactured to
accept "O" ring gaskets, the groove and the "O" ring gasket shall be lubricated as
recommended by the manufacturer. The gasket shall be placed in the groove and
the tension shall be equalized by inserting a suitable tool under the gasket and
running it around the pipe 3 times.
For pipes manufactured to accept fin type gaskets, the inside surface of the bell or
groove and the gasket shall be lubricated as recommended by the manufacturer.
After the joint is lubricated, the pipes shall be coupled immediately. The pipes shall
be pulled up tightly by using a winch, come-along or other appropriate method. A
visual check shall be made to see that the pipe is properly connected.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 7
N.
3.3
Factory manufactured wye branches or pipe saddles shall be used to connect laterals to
the City of Philadelphia sewer main. Field fabricated wye branches and connections are
not permitted.
TAP CONNECTION
A.
Make connections to existing conduits and underground structures, so that finished work
will conform as nearly as practicable to requirements specified for new work.
B.
Use commercially manufactured wyes for branch connections. Field cutting into conduits
will not be permitted. Spring flows into existing lines and encase entire wye, plus 6"
overlap, with not less than 6" of 3000 psi 28-day compressive strength concrete.
C.
Branch connections made from one side into existing 12" to 21" conduit shall have a wye
sprung into the existing line, and entire wye encased with not less than 6" of 3000 psi 28day compressive strength concrete.
For branch connections from side into existing 24" or larger conduit or to underground
structures, cut opening into unit sufficiently large to allow 3" of concrete to be packed
around entire connection. Cut ends of connection passing through conduit or structure
wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall, unless otherwise indicated. On
outside of conduit structure wall, encase entering connection in 6" of concrete for a
minimum length of 12" to provide additional support or collar from connection to
undisturbed ground.
3.4
1.
Provide concrete which will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000
psi, unless otherwise noted.
2.
Use an epoxy bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete
and conduit material.
3.
Take care while making tap connections to prevent concrete or debris from
entering existing conduit or structure. Remove debris, concrete or other extraneous
material which may accumulate.
INSTALLATION OF INLETS
A.
After excavation has been completed, level off the area where the base section will be
located. Provide a 3/4" crushed stone bed to obtain a level and solid foundation. Do not
use wood, brick or other materials to shim the base section.
B.
When installing a two piece catch basin remove all foreign materials such as dirt, mud
and stones from the joint surfaces. Apply a bitumen-type sealing compound to seal the
joint. The sealing compound shall be approved by the Water Department Design Branch
prior to application.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 8
C.
Seal all lifting holes and the adjustment area around the trap with non-shrink, non-metallic
mortar. The mortar shall not contain gas-forming agents and shall be tested in
accordance with ASTM C827 Standard Test Method for Early Volume Change of
Cementious Mixtures, C191 Standard Test Method for Time Setting of Hydraulic Cement
by Vicat Needle and C 109 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic
Cement Mortars. The change in volume shall be 0 or shall increase slightly. The time of
set shall be 45 minutes minimum. The minimum compressive strength shall be 6000 psi
at 28 days.
D.
Backfill shall be deposited in layers of 8 inches or less and tamped. Compaction of the
backfill through puddling is not allowed.
3.5
CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A.
Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use
ductile-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and ductile-iron soil
pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow
in sewer pipe.
B.
Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block as indicated in
the Drawings. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding grade.
C.
Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement
surface.
3.6
A.
3.7
A.
ROOF DRAIN CONNECTIONS
Connect roof drains to storm drains. Grout joints between ductile iron pipe and P.V.C.
pipes thoroughly with cement mortar to make watertight joint or provided concrete collar.
CLOSING ABANDONED UTILITIES
Close open ends of abandoned underground utilities which are indicated to remain in
place. Provide sufficiently strong closures to withstand hydrostatic or earth pressure
which may result after ends of abandoned utilities have been closed.
1.
Close open ends of concrete or masonry utilities with no less than 8" thick brick
masonry bulkheads.
2.
Close open end of conduits with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other
acceptable methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Wood
plugs are not acceptable.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 9
3.8
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has
occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at
completion of Project.
1.
2.
Submit separate reports for each system inspection.
Defects requiring correction include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
4.
B.
Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between
structures.
Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or
cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects
are within allowances specified.
Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended,
or repaired, for leaks and defects.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction.
Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24
hours' advance notice.
Submit separate report for each test.
Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:
a.
b.
c.
Exception: Piping with soil tight joints unless required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417.
Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924.
C.
Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
D.
Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within
allowances specified.
3.9
A.
CLEANING AND RESTORATION
Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 10
B.
The work area shall be restored to its original or better condition. Restoration includes,
but is not limited to repairs or replacement of footway and curbing that is cracked or
broken by the Contractor and replacing brick in brick footways.
END OF SECTION 334000
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334000 - 11
SECTION 334600 - SUBDRAINAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
A.
Perforated-wall pipe and fittings.
Geotextile filter fabrics.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For geotextile filter fabrics.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
2.4
PERFORATED-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS
Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 405 or AASHTO M 252, Type CP; corrugated,
for coupled joints.
SOIL MATERIALS
Soil materials are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
WATERPROOFING FELTS
Material: Comply with ASTM D 226, Type I, asphalt or ASTM D 227, coal-tar-saturated
organic felt.
GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS
A.
Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate range
from 110 to 330 gpm/sq. ft. (4480 to 13 440 L/min. per sq. m) when tested according to
ASTM D 4491.
B.
Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle-punched continuous filament.
1.
2.
Survivability: AASHTO M 288 Class 2.
Styles: Flat and sock.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SUBDRAINAGE
334600 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
EARTHWORK
Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
A.
Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete
footing forms have been removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions
indicated, but not less than 6 inches (150 mm) deep and 12 inches (300 mm) wide.
B.
Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.
C.
Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter
fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm).
D.
Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock
sections with adhesive or tape.
E.
Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for foundation
subdrainage.
F.
Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from wall and to
top of pipe to perform tests.
G.
After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on
side away from footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finish
grade.
H.
Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter
fabric.
I.
Place layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping
edges at least 4 inches (100 mm).
J.
Place backfill material over compacted drainage course. Place material in loose-depth
layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer. Final backfill
to finish elevations and slope away from building.
3.3
A.
UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
Excavate for underslab drainage system after subgrade material has been compacted
but before drainage course has been placed. Include horizontal distance of at least 6
inches (150 mm) between drainage pipe and trench walls. Grade bottom of trench
excavations to required slope, and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SUBDRAINAGE
334600 - 2
B.
Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.
C.
Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter
fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm).
D.
Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock
sections with adhesive or tape.
E.
Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for underslab
subdrainage.
F.
Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from wall and to
top of pipe to perform tests.
G.
After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping with drainage course to elevation of
bottom of slab, and compact and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile
filter fabric.
3.4
A.
PIPING INSTALLATION
Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated,
with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install
gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions
and other requirements indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping level and with a minimum cover of 36
inches (915 mm) unless otherwise indicated.
Underslab Subdrainage: Install piping level.
Retaining-Wall Subdrainage: When water discharges at end of wall into stormwater
piping system, install piping level and with a minimum cover of 36 inches (915 mm)
unless otherwise indicated.
Lay perforated pipe with perforations down.
Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells facing
upslope and with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell.
B.
Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes
and fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited.
C.
Install thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D 2321.
3.5
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join perforated PE pipe and fittings with couplings according to ASTM D 3212 with loose
banded, coupled, or push-on joints.
B.
Special Pipe Couplings: Join piping made of different materials and dimensions with
special couplings made for this application. Use couplings that are compatible with and
fit materials and dimensions of both pipes.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SUBDRAINAGE
334600 - 3
3.6
CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 334100 "Storm Utility
Drainage Piping."
B.
Cleanouts for Foundation Subdrainage:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Cleanouts for Underslab Subdrainage:
1.
2.
3.7
Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run
and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in
piping.
In vehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for
piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and
covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set top of
cleanout flush with grade.
In non-vehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) cast iron pipe and fittings for
piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and
covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches (300 by 300 by 100
mm) deep. Set top of cleanout 1 inch (25 mm) above grade.
Comply with requirements for concrete specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
Install cleanouts and riser extensions from piping to top of slab. Locate cleanouts
at beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts
open in direction of flow in piping.
Use NPS 4 (DN 100) cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and
riser extensions to cleanout flush with top of slab.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 334100 "Storm Utility Drainage
Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect low elevations of subdrainage system to building's solid-wall-piping storm
drainage system.
C.
Where required, connect low elevations of foundation subdrainage to stormwater sump
pumps. Comply with requirements for sump pumps specified in Section 221429 "Sump
Pumps."
3.8
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Tests and Inspections:
1.
After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to
ensure free flow before backfilling.
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SUBDRAINAGE
334600 - 4
2.
Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results
are satisfactory.
B.
Drain piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.9
A.
CLEANING
Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as
work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is
completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work
stops.
END OF SECTION 334600
Ingersoll Commons
KSK #090085
SUBDRAINAGE
334600 - 5
APPENDIX "A"
March 15, 2012
Mr. John R. Gibbons, AIA, AICP
Associate Principal/Director of Architecture
KSK Architects Planners Historians, Inc.
123 South Broad Street, 2250
Philadelphia, PA 19109
RE:
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
Dear Mr. Gibbons:
Hunt Engineering is pleased to present this Geotechnical Engineering Report for the above referenced project.
The location of the project area (the Site) is shown on Figure 1.1 – Site Location Plan, included in
Attachment 1. The Site is located in Philadelphia and is bounded by North Sixteenth Street on the east, North
Smedley Street on the west, Master Street on the north, and West Seybert Street on the south. This report
was prepared in accordance with our scope of work dated December 16, 2011 and includes a summary of our
subsurface investigation and recommendations for the design of the foundations.
The purpose of this geotechnical investigation was to obtain site specific subsurface information to develop
geotechnical engineering parameters for the proposed development. The conclusions and recommendations
of this report are specific to the areas investigated and should not be applied to areas outside those discussed
herein without first consulting Hunt Engineering Company. No attempt was made during the site investigation
to address any environmental issues that may or may not be present at the Site.
Site elevations referred to within this report are estimated based on existing site conditions presented on Plan
A-0.1 prepared by KSK and dated January 9, 2012. If more precise elevations of the existing ground surface
are required, follow-up field verification is recommended. The aforementioned Plan A-0.1 was used as the
background for the Boring Location Plan included in this report as Figure 1.2 in Attachment 1.
1. PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION
The proposed project consists of ten residential townhouse units facing North Smedley with parking in the
rear of the structures along a private-drive that provides access from Master or West Seybert Streets. The
units are proposed as two-story, three bedroom units. The end units will not have basements, but the
remaining interior units will have seven-foot basements. A park is proposed on the eastern half of the block
that will provide stormwater management facilities.
The layout of the proposed Site development is depicted on the boring location plan included in Attachment 1
as Figure 1.2.
O VER 30 YEARS
OF
E NGINEERING E XCELLENCE
P.O. Box 537 | 22 East King Street | Malvern | PA | 19355 | p: 610-644-4600 | f: 610-644-2466 | www.huntengineering.com
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
2. PUBLISHED HISTORICAL INFORMATION
The following denotes observations made regarding the Site based on a review of available historical
information provided on http://historical.mytopo.com and http://www.philageohsitory.org.
•
A stream flowing along the edge of the current Master Street was indicated on 1843 mapping of the
Site. Other than the presence of the stream, the current topography is similar to the present day
topography based on 1891 topographic mapping.
•
The current street grid was constructed sometime between 1843 and 1862. The current North
Smedley Street was named Greenhill (a.k.a. Green Hill) Street until sometime before 1910. Eliza
Street, later named Ingersoll Street, bisected the Site into a northern and southern section. Ingersoll
Street was still present in 1942 mapping. Currently, Ingersoll Street is not present at the Site.
•
Sporadic structures are first indicated on the property sometime between 1843 and 1862. The Site is
almost fully developed by 1895. Sometime before 1942, a drive-in gasoline service station occupied
most of the southern portion of the Site, and a garage occupied the corner of the Site adjacent to the
intersection of Smedley and Master Streets.
Portions of the historic mapping reviewed for this report are included in Attachment 2 for your reference.
3. PUBLISHED GEOTECHNICAL INFORMATION
The current topographic mapping of the Site indicates the approximate elevation of the Site to vary from 86
feet to 91 feet in elevation. The contouring of the surface gently slopes southeasterly. The Delaware River
lies approximately 1.5 miles east of the Site, and the Schuylkill River lies approximately 1.5 miles west of the
Site.
The published soil information classifies the soils at the Site to be Urban Land. Urban Land soils are present in
highly built-up areas of Bucks and Philadelphia Counties on terraces of the uplands and coastal plain. The soils
and foundation materials are highly variable, and the original soil materials have been disturbed, filled over, or
otherwise removed due to by prior construction. (Reference: Tompkins, Edward A., Soil Survey of Bucks and
Philadelphia Counties, Pennsylvania, July 1975.)
Based on published geologic information, the Site is underlain by the Pensauken and Bridgeton Formations,
undifferentiated, overlying Wissahickon Schist. The Pensauken and Bridgeton formations are primarily detritus
depositions from the Pleistocene geologic era. The detritus, resulting from the erosion of older glacial
material and exposed Coastal plan formations, was deposited along terraces within the Delaware River Valley.
These primarily consist of silt, sand and gravel from fluvial environments. (Reference: Quaternary and Holocene
Deposits of the Coastal Plain, http://3dparks.wr.usgs.gov/nyc/coastalplain/quaternary strata.htm, accessed March
2012.) In the area of the project, the Wissahickon Formation is comprised of micaceous schist, a mediumgrade metamorphic rock. Generally, schist is highly weathered for the top one to four feet. It is moderately
easy (rippable by heavyweight power equipment) to excavate in weathered rock, and difficult (requires drilling
and blasting in most excavations) in unweathered rock with moderate drilling rates. (Reference: Geyer, Alan
R. and J. Peter Wilshusen, Engineering Characteristics of the Rocks of Pennsylvania, revised 1982.)
Published geologic mapping and current topographic mapping are included in Attachment 3 for reference.
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
2
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
4. SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION AND LABORATORY TESTING
Three test borings (B-1 through B-3) were completed at the Site in February 2012. The locations are shown
on the Boring Location Plan included in Attachment 1 as Figure 1.2. The borings were completed by Accurate
Drilling under the direction and supervision of Hunt Engineering Company, using a truck-mounted drill rig
equipped with a manual hammer. The borings were advanced through the soil using 3¼-inch hollow stem
augers to depths ranging from approximately 22 to 30 feet below the existing ground surface. Soil samples
were taken by driving a 2-inch outside diameter split-barrel sampler in accordance with the American Society
for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard D1586. Data obtained during the field investigation, including blow
counts (the number of hammer blows required to drive a split-barrel sampler 6-inches into the subsurface),
sample depths and material descriptions, was recorded on the engineer’s field logs throughout the subsurface
investigation program. Typed copies of the completed logs are presented in Attachment 4 along with a
graphic representation of the information.
Selected soil samples recovered during the subsurface investigation were submitted to the laboratory of L.R.
Kimball, located in Ebensburg, Pennsylvania. The purpose of this testing was to confirm field classifications and
to aid in the evaluation of design parameters. A summary of the laboratory testing and detailed laboratory test
reports are included in Attachment 5.
5. GENERALIZED SUBSURFACE PROFILE
The subsurface conditions encountered during the subsurface investigation are described in detail on the
boring logs, included in Attachment 4. In general, the subsurface conditions can be characterized in three
layers: fill, alluvial sediments, decomposed schist (silty sand), overlying schist. Black staining was evident on the
sandy soil at a depth of approximately 10 feet below existing grade in all three borings.
Fill: Fill, containing brick rubble and gravel, was observed for the surficial 1.5 feet (approximate) on the north
end of the Site, and for the surficial 6.5 feet (approximate) on the south end of the Site. It was not observed at
the boring completed in the center of the Site. This fill material is probably the result of the demolition of
preexisting structures. The SPT-values associated with the samples obtained from this material varied from 8
to 13 blows per foot. Although this material is not considered suitable to support the proposed foundations,
if confirmed stable, it can support sidewalks and pavements.
Alluvial Sediments: Beneath the fill, if present, or from the surface, material consistent with the Pensauken
and Bridgeton formations was observed. The material extended to depths of 11.5 to 14.0 feet below existing
grade, approximately. This stratum consisted of layers of silty clay and sand with varying amounts of silt, clay
and cobbles. Based on the SPT values obtained from the sampling data, the sand layers are medium dense to
very dense, and the clay layers are of a medium to stiff consistency. This stratum is deemed suitable for
support of the proposed townhome structures.
Decomposed Schist: The borings concluded in a stratum of saprolitic silty sand that was generally in a very
dense condition. Saprolite is soil that has retained the appearance of the parent rock. The very dense
saprolitic stratum was encountered between 13 and 15 feet below existing grade.
Groundwater: During the field investigation, groundwater was observed at a depth of approximately 4 feet
at location B-1 and at a depth of approximately 10 feet at location B-2 and B-3.
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
3
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
6. DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS
6.1 Foundation Design
The existing alluvial sediment layer or the decomposed schist material, in their present state, can support
shallow foundations designed with an allowable bearing capacity of 2.6 kips per square foot (ksf). At this
loading, estimated total settlements are expected to be less than 0.5 inches with differential settlements
expected to be less than 0.25 inches.
It is recommended that the foundations not bear on the fill at the Site. If during construction, fill is observed
to exist at the bottom of foundation elevation, the fill material should be removed. The footing can be
lowered or the excavated material can be replaced with compacted acceptable fill. Acceptable fill is defined in
Section 7.4 of this report, and compaction recommendations are presented in Section 7.5 of this report.
The foundations for the proposed townhouse structures are anticipated to be stepped to accommodate
changes in the finished floor elevations. It is recommended that each step not exceed a change in elevation of
greater than 2 feet, and the steps be vertical. The horizontal distance between steps should be more than 4
feet.
Exterior foundations and foundations in unheated areas must be founded a minimum of 36-inches below final
exterior grade to protect from frost heave.
Based on the above information and recommendations, the recommended bottom of foundations should not
be placed higher than the elevations presented in Table 6.1.
TABLE 6.1 – BOTTOM OF FOOTING ELEVATIONS
BOF Depth
Proposed
Applicable Existing Grade
Below
Unit #
Finished
Boring
Elevation
Existing
Floor
Grade
1619, no basement
92.01 feet
B-1
91.0 feet
4.0 feet
1617, basement
91.57 feet
91.0 feet
8.0 feet
1615, basement
91.13 feet
90.5 feet
8.0 feet
1613, basement
90.69 feet
90.3 feet
8.0 feet
1611, basement
90.25 feet
B-2
90.0 feet
8.0 feet
1609, basement
90.25 feet
B-2
90.0 feet
8.0 feet
1607, basement
89.59 feet
89.5 feet
8.0 feet
1605, basement
89.15 feet
89.0 feet
8.0 feet
1603, basement
88.71 feet
88.5 feet
8.0 feet
1601, no basement
88.27 feet
B-3
87.5 feet
6.5 feet
Anticipated BOF
Elevation
87.0 feet
83.0 feet
82.5 feet
82.3 feet
82.3 feet
82.0 feet
81.5 feet
81.0 feet
80.5 feet
81.0 feet
Notes: Proposed Finished Floor elevations and existing grade elevations were estimated from project sheet number A-0.1,
Site Plan, prepared by KSK dated, 1/6/2012. Bottom of footing elevations are based on the estimated existing
grade elevations.
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
4
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
6.2 Seismic Considerations
Based on the soil conditions observed within the test borings and the 2009 International Building Code, a site
class of ‘C’ should be used for the design of the proposed structures.
6.3 Slab and Wall Drainage
The following table, Table 6.3, provides a comparison, by boring location, between recorded groundwater
measurements during the field investigation and proposed slab elevations. Groundwater was measured at
about 4 feet below grade nearest to Master Street. Based on historic maps, there was a stream that flowed
along the current Master Street in this area. The shallow depth of groundwater may be the remaining
presence of the buried stream. It is our understanding that future investigation at the Site will be completed in
another phase of the design development. Although this future investigation is not geotechnically related, it
may include the installation of groundwater monitoring wells. It is recommended that the groundwater
information from this subsequent investigation be reviewed by KSK to determine the impact this shallow
groundwater may have on the construction.
TABLE 6.3 – GROUNDWATER ELEVATIONS VS. FINISHED FLOOR ELEVATIONS
Proposed
Depth of
Finished
Anticipated
Groundwater
Applicable Existing Grade
Elevation of
Unit #
Floor for
Boring
Elevation
at time of Field
Lowest
Groundwater
Investigation
Level
1619, no basement
92.0 feet
B-1
91.0 feet
4.0 feet
87.0 feet
1617, basement
84.0 feet
91.0 feet
1615, basement
83.5 feet
90.5 feet
1613, basement
83.3 feet
90.3 feet
1611, basement
83.3 feet
B-2
90.0 feet
10.0 feet
80.3 feet
1609, basement
83.0 feet
B-2
90.0 feet
10.0 feet
80.0 feet
1607, basement
82.5 feet
89.5 feet
1605, basement
82.0 feet
89.0 feet
1603, basement
81.5 feet
88.5 feet
1601, no basement
88.3 feet
B-3
87.5 feet
10.0 feet
77.5 feet
6.4 Lateral Earth Pressures
The subterranean walls at the Site should be designed to resist lateral loads. The design should consider the
walls to be in the at-rest condition if they are restrained from top deflection, such as basement walls. Walls
that can rotate, such as retaining walls, should be designed considering the soil pressure in the active or passive
state using Coulomb theory. (Reference: Das, Braja M., Introduction to Soil Mechanics, 1979.) It is
recommended that the foundation walls be drained to minimize hydrostatic pressure against their exterior.
Proper draining of the walls should include the following.
•
Backfilling the wall with a granular material to within 2 feet from the surface. The granular backfill
should extend a minimum of 3 feet out from the walls.
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
5
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
•
The granular backfill should be encased in a separation geotextile (Class 4, Type A, PA DOT
Specifications, Publication 408, Section 735) to maintain its free-draining quality throughout the life of
the structure.
•
A slotted PVC pipe should be installed as a perimeter drain pipe for the wall. The perimeter pipe
should be placed adjacent to the wall and above the footing. The perimeter pipe should provide
gravity drainage away from the structure so that water does not collect outside the foundation walls.
If possible, the perimeter pipe can be daylighted for drainage or directed to a stormwater
management area. It is not recommended that the perimeter pipe be connected to an interior sump
pump.
Recommendations for lateral earth pressure parameters for soils in a drained condition are given in the
following table, Table 6.4.
Table 6.4 – LATERAL EARTH PRESSURE DESIGN PARAMETERS
120pcf
Moist Unit Weight, γ
34°
Angle of Internal Friction, φ
Coefficient of At-Rest Earth Pressure, K0
0.44
Coefficient of Active Earth Pressure, Ka
0.28 (Coulomb Theory)
Coefficient of Passive Pressure, Kp
3.53 (Coulomb Theory)
6.5 Pavements
The subgrade for the pavements is silty sand. During the life of the pavement, the fine materials in the silty
sand can migrate into the stone base course beneath the pavement reducing the stone’s drainage capability. It
is recommended that the stone base course be protected from soil migration by installing a separation
geotextile (Class 4, Type A, PA DOT Specifications, Publication 408, Section 735) between the subgrade and
the stone.
7. CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS
7.1 Rock Excavation
Based on the boring data, rock excavation is not anticipated for foundation placement or utility installation.
7.2 Dewatering
Dewatering during construction is anticipated. Dewatering needs are the responsibility of the contractor,
and the dewatering program should be developed by a licensed engineer that specializes in construction
dewatering. The dewatering program should be developed based on groundwater levels measured by the
contractor at the time of construction. The groundwater levels presented in this report are based on
immediate levels obtained during the field investigation and are not sufficient for anticipation of dewatering
needs during construction.
7.3 Footing Construction
Prior to installation of rebar for the footings, the bottom of footings should be densified using a “jumping
jack” style manual tamper. Any loose or soft soil found in the bottom of the footing excavation should be
removed and replaced with compacted satisfactory soil material. Satisfactory soil material is defined in
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
6
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
Section 7.4 of this report, and the recommended compaction levels provided in Section 7.5. It is
recommended that footing construction, inclusive of excavation, densification of the bottom of the
excavation, rebar and concrete placement, be completed in one day or the open footing excavation be
covered in the event of precipitation. Open excavations should also be protected from frost.
7.4 Fill Materials
Satisfactory soil materials for use as fill must meet the following requirements.
•
•
•
•
•
ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SP, SM, SW, SC, GC, SC, ML and CL or a
combination of these group symbols.
Low plasticity (plasticity index less than 10).
Less than 15 percent, by weight, of particles larger than 2 inches in greater dimension.
Less than 2 percent deviation from optimum moisture content.
Free from debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter.
Based on the samples obtained during the field investigation, the soil at the Site does meet the ASTM criteria
for satisfactory soil materials. Based on the limited boring data, construction debris appeared excessive at
boring location B-3. During construction, the fill material in this area should be reviewed as to its applicability
for use as satisfactory soil materials.
7.5 Compaction Requirements
All structural fill, fill used beneath foundations, pavements, sidewalks, should be compacted to a minimum of
95% of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 1557 (Modified Density).
Fill should be placed on a level, stable ground surface. Subgrades, inclusive of structural, pavement or sidewalk
subgrades, should be verified as stable prior to any fill placement or drainage stone course placement. To
confirm stability, proofrolling should be completed with a 10-ton smooth-drum non-vibratory roller,
preferably. If the filling areas are too small to accommodate a 10-ton roller, it is at the discretion of the onsite geotechnical engineer to determine the appropriate method confirm stability. Any undulation or shearing
of the surface under the weight of compaction equipment is indicative of an unstable area. Unstable areas
should be remediated by removing the saturated or soft soil, moisture conditioning the material, and replacing
it in compacted lifts. Remediation could also include replacement of the saturated or soft soil with compacted
satisfactory soil material as defined in Section 7.4 of this report.
It is important that once subgrade elevations are reached, the surface is protected from construction travel or
other occurrences that would disturb the surface before drainage base stone and structural placement.
Construction traffic should be restricted from travelling on stone that is to be used as a base course for
pavements or sidewalks.
Efforts should be made to prohibit infiltration of precipitation into the structural areas during construction. At
a minimum, large open excavations should be sealed with compaction equipment and smaller excavations
should be covered.
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
7
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
7.6 Geotechnical Monitoring during Construction
Variability in the soil layer types and properties between the borings and the foundation locations is common,
especially in urban areas where there were previously-existing structures. Consequently, it is recommended
that the foundation construction be monitored by a geotechnical engineer/technician to determine that the
conditions encountered during construction are suitable to support the intended loadings. Construction
monitoring should be performed under the supervision of Hunt Engineering personnel or a Geotechnical
Engineer who is familiar with the intent of the recommendations presented herein in order to evaluate
whether the conditions anticipated in the design actually existing or whether the recommendations presented
herein should be modified where necessary.
Care should be exercised during any excavation or installation to assure that disturbances to existing utilities
to remain are minimized. Construction activities should also include efforts to minimize surface waters from
entering open foundation excavations. Any water that may accumulate in the bottom of excavations should
be removed immediately.
8.0 LIMITATIONS
The analysis used to provide recommendations and conclusions presented in this report is based on standard
geotechnical practices and assumes consistent subsurface conditions between test borings. If during
construction, subsurface conditions substantially deviate from those described in this report, Hunt Engineering
Company should be contacted for consultation. It is recommended that the final foundation plans will be
made available to Hunt Engineering Company for review. Any substantial change in the proposed plan should
be brought to the attention of Hunt Engineering Company so that the impact of the change on the
recommendations presented herein may be evaluated.
The procedures followed during the Site exploration and geotechnical analysis have followed generally
accepted geotechnical engineering practices and make no other warranties, either expressed or implied, as to
the professional advice provided under the terms of our agreement and included in this report. The
recommendations and conclusions presented in this report assume that recognized proper construction
practices are followed throughout construction. To assure that proper techniques are utilized during
construction, it is recommended that this report be correlated with monitoring under the supervision of Hunt
Engineering Company or a qualified geotechnical engineer.
Hunt Engineering Company appreciates the opportunity to be of service to KSK on this project. If additional
information is required or there are questions regarding the contents regarding this report, please contact the
undersigned at 610.644.4600.
Sincerely,
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
Candace Christy, Hickey, P.E.
Senior Geotechnical Engineer
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
8
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
ATTACHMENT 1 – FIGURES
Figure 1.1 – Site Location Plan
Figure 2.1 – Boring Location Plan
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
SITE LOCATION
FIGURE 1.1 – SITE LOCATION PLAN
Approximate Scale: 1 inch = 150 feet
Reference: Google Earth, www.googleearth.com, accessed March 2012.
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
B-1
DENOTES BORING LOCATION
B-2
B-3
FIGURE 1.2 – BORING LOCATION PLAN
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
ATTACHMENT 2 – HISTORICAL MAPPING
Figure 2.1843 Historic Map, 1843
Figure 2.1862 Historic Map, 1862
Figure 2.1875, Historic Map, 1875
Figure 2.1891, Historic Map, 1891
Figure 2.1895, Historic Map, 1895
Figure 2.1898, Historic Map, 1898
Figure 2.1910, Historic Map, 1910
Figure 2.1942, Historic Map, 1942
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
SITE LOCATION
FIGURE 2.1843 – HISTORIC MAP, 1843
Approximate Scale: 1 inch = 300 feet
Reference: Ellet, Charles, Jr., a Map of the County of Philadelphia from Actual Survey, 1843,
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
SITE LOCATION
FIGURE 2.1862 – HISTORIC MAP, 1862
Approximate Scale: 1 inch = 100 feet
Reference: Smedley, Samuel L., Atlas of the City of Philadelphia 1862, http://www.philageohistory.org, accessed January
2012.
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
SITE LOCATION
FIGURE 2.1875 – HISTORIC MAP, 1875
Approximate Scale: 1 inch = 100 feet
Reference: G. M. Hopkins, City Atlas of Philadelphia, Vol. 6, Wards 2 through 20, 29 and 31, 1875,
http://www.philageohistory.org, accessed January 2012.
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
SITE LOCATION
FIGURE 2.1891 – HISTORIC TOPOGRAPHIC MAP, 1891
Approximate Scale: 1 inch = 4000 feet
Reference: United States Geology Survey, 15 Minute Series, Philadelphia, PA Quadrangle, 1891,
http://historical.mytopo.com, accessed January 2012.
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
SITE LOCATION
FIGURE 2.1895 – HISTORIC MAP, 1895
Approximate Scale: 1 inch = 100 feet
Reference: Bromley, Geo W. and Walter S., Civil Engineering, Atlas of the City of Philadelphia 1895,
http://www.philageohistory.org, accessed January 2012.
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
SITE LOCATION
FIGURE 2.1898 – HISTORIC TOPOGRAPHIC MAP, 1898
Approximate Scale: 1 inch = 4000 feet
Reference: United States Geology Survey, 15 Minute Series, Philadelphia, PA Quadrangle, 1898,
http://historical.mytopo.com, accessed January 2012.
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
SITE LOCATION
FIGURE 2.1910 – HISTORIC MAP, 1910
Approximate Scale: 1 inch = 100 feet
Reference: Bromley, Geo W. and Walter S., Civil Engineering, Atlas of the City of Philadelphia 1910,
http://www.philageohistory.org, accessed January 2012.
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
SITE LOCATION
FIGURE 2.1942 – HISTORIC MAP, 1942
Approximate Scale: 1 inch = 100 feet
Reference: Philadelphia Land Use Map, 1942, Plans & Registry Division, Bureau of Engineering Surveys & Zoning,
Department of Public Works, Federal Works Progress Administration for Pennsylvania, http://www.philageohistory.org,
accessed January 2012.
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
ATTACHMENT 3 – PUBLISHED GEOTECHNICAL INFORMATION
Figure 3.1 Current Topographical Map
Figure 3.2 Geologic Map
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
SITE LOCATION
FIGURE 3.1 – PUBLISHED TOPOGRAPHIC INFORMATION, CURRENT
Approximate Scale: 1 inch = 100 feet
Reference: USGS Topo Maps, 1999 – 2012 My Topo, http://mapserver.mytopo.com, accessed 2012.
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
SITE LOCATION
FIGURE 3.2 – PUBLISHED GEOLOGIC MAP
Approximate Scale: 1 inch = 1 mile
Reference: USGS Topo Maps, 1999 – 2012 My Topo, http://mapserver.mytopo.com, accessed 2012.
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
ATTACHMENT 4 – BORING DATA
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
GENERALIZED SUBSURFACE PROFILE
0
95
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
HEC Project #2122003
March 2012
INGERSOLL COMMONS
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
95
FF 92.01 (1st Floor)
B-1
B-2 FF 90.05 (1st Floor)
90
15-13-9-9
8-9-8-5
-
-
85
4-6-8-11
4-7-5-3
-
14-16-13-14
-
-
9-28-28-21
4-5-3-5
-
8-12-10-13
-
-
Elevation (ft)
1-4-6-4
-
2-2-3-11
85
B-3 FF 88.27 (1st Floor)
-
2-2-2-1
-
WITH LARGE LEGEND & BLOW COUNTS 2012 FEBRUARY_INGERSOLL COMMONS.GPJ HUNT ENG.GDT 3/8/12
90
14-8-5-3
-
14-8-11-10
8-23-14-11
-
80
80
-
9-11-9-11
-
4-5-8-13
6-5-7-7
-
50-50-21-30
-
-
75
75
7-10-13-19
-
22-43-50
-
50/.5-50/.4
70
70
8-10-13-12
-
50
-
Auger Refusal, 22 ft depth
65
65
29-50/.5
-
60
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
Distance Along Baseline (ft)
Fill
Clay
Sand
Gravelly Sand
Silty Sand
Clayey, Silty
Sand
350
400
60
ENGINEERS FIELD BORING LOG
FORM NO: D-481
(12/89)
REPRODUCE LOCALLY
Ingersoll Commons
PROJECT NAME
STATE RT. NO.
COUNTY
Philadelphia
SECT.
SEGMENT
OFFSET FROM CENTERLINE
STATION
OFFSET
C. Hickey
INSPECTOR
EQUIPMENT USED
B-1
BORING NO.
1
1
SHEET
OF
DATE: START 2/13/12
DRILLERS NAME/COMPANY
CME 45 Truck Mounted Drill Rig with Manual Hammer
DRILLING METHODS Hollow-Stem Augers; Split-Spoon Sampling
;
;
DEPTH: 30.0'
CASING: SIZE: 2.25" ID
WATER:
;
DATE: 2/16/12
CHECKED BY: apc
DEPTH:
O.G.
ELEV.
2/13/12
END
91.00'
Mike/Ryan/Accurate Drilling
4.0'
DEPTH:
TIME:
0-Hour
TIME:
DATE:
2/13/12
DATE:
0.00
S-1
14
8
75
2
4.00
2
100
3
11
6.00
S-4
8.00
S-5
10.00
14
16
13
14
8
12
10
13
H2O CONTENT
USCS
AASHTO
vm
-
1
2
PROBABLE FILL: silty clay, some brick
fragments, brown with pockets of gray
fill
0.5
1.5'
89.50
1.50
-
2
REMARKS
FILL: brick rubble, quartz fragments
d
3
2
DESCRIPTION
fill
1.5'
5
S-3
POCKET PENT/
TORVANE (TSF)
75
2.00
S-2
RQD (%)
RECOVERY(%)
RECOVERY
(FT)
BLOWS/0.5 FT.
ON SAMPLER
SAMPLE NO./
TYPE/CORE RUN
DEPTH (FT)
NOT ENCOUNTERED
sp
w
2.0'
4.50
5.00
90
sp
sand some silt, mica, gray brown
POORLY GRADED SAND WITH SILT,
cobbles, brown
86.50
86.00
w
1.8'
100
2.0'
-
S-5: % fines=11.2,
non-plastic
SP-SM
13.5%
A-1-b
10 feet, approximate 2-inch
layer of black-stained sand
with petroleum odor
13.00
4
S-6
100
5
8
13
15.00
sm
w
2.0'
-
77.00
14.00
DECOMPOSED SCHIST: saprolitic
WELL-GRADED SAND WITH SILT,
micaceous, layers of brown, orange-brown
and gray
18.00
S-7
19.50
22
43
50
100
sm
w
1.5'
20 feet, spoon refusal
23.00
23.50 S-8
50
0.5'
100 -
A-1-b 20.4%
SW-SM
SPOON REFUSAL, 23 feet
23 feet, spoon refusal
S-8: % fines=20.0%,
non-plastic
30.00 end of boring, 30 feet
NOTE: Elevations are assumed based on Google Earth approximations.
advanced augers to 30 feet,
61.00 no auger refusal
ENGINEERS FIELD BORING LOG
FORM NO: D-481
(12/89)
REPRODUCE LOCALLY
Ingersoll Commons
PROJECT NAME
STATE RT. NO.
COUNTY
Philadelphia
SECT.
SEGMENT
OFFSET FROM CENTERLINE
STATION
OFFSET
C. Hickey
INSPECTOR
EQUIPMENT USED
B-2
BORING NO.
1
1
SHEET
OF
DATE: START 2/13/12
DRILLERS NAME/COMPANY
CME 45 Truck Mounted Drill Rig with Manual Hammer
DRILLING METHODS Hollow-Stem Augers with Center Plug; Split-Spoon Sampling
;
;
DEPTH: 18.9'
CASING: SIZE: 2.25" ID
WATER: DEPTH: 10.0'
;
DATE: 2/16/12
CHECKED BY: apc
DEPTH:
O.G.
ELEV.
2/13/12
END
90.00'
Mike/Ryan/Accurate Drilling
TIME:
0-Hour
TIME:
DATE:
2/13/12
DATE:
0.00
S-1
15
13
9
8
8.00
S-5
10.00
75
6
8
11
9
28
28
21
14
8
11
10
H2O CONTENT
USCS
m
-
4
S-4
cl
1.2'
5
6.00
AASHTO
60
4.00
S-3: % fines=89, PL=19%,
LL=27%
CL
18.1%
2.5
1.5'
50
A-4(6)
sp
6.50
83.50
sand with cobbles, brown
vm
1.0'
100
sp
w
2.0'
-
12.00
15.00
50
50
21
30
2.0'
50/.5
50/.4
0.9'
100
78.00
10 feet, approximate 2-inch
layer of black-stained sand
with petroleum odor
DECOMPOSED SCHIST: saprolitic silty
sand, micaceous, layers of brown,
orange-brown and gray
13.00
S-6
REMARKS
PROBABLE FILL: LEAN CLAY, brown and
gray
m
9
9
DESCRIPTION
cl
1.0'
8
S-3
POCKET PENT/
TORVANE (TSF)
50
2.00
S-2
RQD (%)
RECOVERY(%)
RECOVERY
(FT)
BLOWS/0.5 FT.
ON SAMPLER
SAMPLE NO./
TYPE/CORE RUN
DEPTH (FT)
NOT ENCOUNTERED
sp
w
-
18.00
19.00 S-7
90
-
sm
w
18.9 feet, spoon refusal,
spoon bouncing
22.00
68.00
AUGER REFUSAL, end of boring, 22 feet
NOTE: Elevations are assumed based on Google Earth approximations.
22 feet, auger refusal
ENGINEERS FIELD BORING LOG
FORM NO: D-481
(12/89)
REPRODUCE LOCALLY
Ingersoll Commons
PROJECT NAME
STATE RT. NO.
COUNTY
Philadelphia
SECT.
SEGMENT
OFFSET FROM CENTERLINE
STATION
OFFSET
C. Hickey
INSPECTOR
EQUIPMENT USED
B-3
BORING NO.
1
1
SHEET
OF
DATE: START 2/13/12
DRILLERS NAME/COMPANY
CME 45 Truck Mounted Drill Rig with Manual Hammer
DRILLING METHODS Hollow-Stem Augers with Center Plug; Split-Spoon Sampling
;
;
DEPTH: 23.0'
CASING: SIZE: 2.25" ID
WATER: DEPTH: 10.0'
;
DATE: 2/16/12
CHECKED BY: apc
DEPTH:
O.G.
ELEV.
2/13/12
END
87.50'
Mike/Ryan/Accurate Drilling
TIME:
0-Hour
TIME:
DATE:
2/13/12
DATE:
1
0.00
4
6.00
55
5
8.00
S-5
10.00
S-6
12.00
3
8
23
14
11
9
11
9
11
6
5
7
7
15.00
H2O CONTENT
USCS
m
60
6.50
ml
1
1.2'
81.00
PROBABLE FILL: silty clay, light gray
m
25
0.5'
75
1.5'
-
13.00
S-7
AASHTO
fill
1.1'
5
S-4
POCKET PENT/
TORVANE (TSF)
d
-
3
S-3
fill
0.8'
5
FILL: brick rubble, quartz gravel, topsoil
40
4.00
REMARKS
d
4
4
7
DESCRIPTION
fill
1.2'
6
2.00
S-2
RQD (%)
60
4
S-1
RECOVERY(%)
RECOVERY
(FT)
BLOWS/0.5 FT.
ON SAMPLER
SAMPLE NO./
TYPE/CORE RUN
DEPTH (FT)
NOT ENCOUNTERED
7
10
13
19
0.5'
8
10
13
12
1.5'
29
50/.5
1.0'
25
8.50
SC-SM
SILTY CLAYEY SAND, mica, gray brown
12.9%
A-2-4(0)
10.50
sm
m-w 11.50 silty sand with cobbles, brown
DECOMPOSED SCHIST: saprolitic silty
sand, micaceous, layers of brown,
orange-brown and gray
sm
w
79.00 S-5: % fines=33.5,
PL=19%, LL=25%
77.00
10.5 feet, approximate
76.00 2-inch layer of black-stained
sand with petroleum odor
-
18.00
S-8
20.00
75
sm
w
-
23.00
24.00 S-9
100
-
sm
w
24.00
63.50
SPOON REFUSAL, end of boring, 24 feet
NOTE: Elevations are assumed based on Google Earth approximations.
24 feet, spoon refusal
Ingersoll Commons
North Smedley Street, Philadelphia, PA
Geotechnical Engineering Report
March 15, 2012
ATTACHMENT 5 – LABORATORY RESULTS
HUNT ENGINEERING COMPANY
APPENDIX "B"
Soil Gas Sampling Points: The two
rounds of sampling data demonstrates
attainment of Act 2.
MW-3
AOC-3: Lead impacted soil characterized and
soil remediated. Sampling data demonstrates
attainment of the Act 2 standards.
MW-2
AOC-4: Five (5) gasoline USTs removed.
Petroleum impacted soil remediated and the
post excavation sampling data demonstrates
attainment of the Act 2 standards.
MW-5
AOC-5 / Test Pit #1: PAH soil contamination characterized from 5' bg to
7' bg. Soil remediation proposed for week of June 24, 2013 and
attainment sampling will be completed.
Test Pit - no
contamination
detected above Act
2 Stds.
MW-1
Test Pit - no
contamination
detected above Act
2 Stds.
AOC-2: Two former 300-gallon gasoline
USTs. Tanks removed and sampling data
demonstrates attainment of Act 2.
MW-4
MW-7
MW-6
AOC-1: Site groundwater is being monitored
to demonstrate attainment of the Act 2
statewide health standard (SHS). Two
sampling rounds are remaining (MW-1 to MW3, & MW-5 to MW-7.
Well to be removed since sampling data
demonstrates attainment of Act 2.
MW = Monitoring Well
SHS = Statewide Health Standards
AOC = Area of Concern
APPENDIX "C"
CITY OF PHILADELPHIA
OFFICE OF HOUSING AND COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT
PHILADELPHIA HOUSING DEVELOPMENT CORP.
REDEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR CONSTRUCTION AND REHABILITATION OF SINGLE FAMILY HOUSES AND
SMALL MULTI- FAMILY PROPERTIES
2-4 UNITS, 3 STORIES OR LESS
MAY 2011
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
SECTION 00 01 10 - TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
00 00 00
00 01 10
DIVISION 01
01 10 00
01 77 00
01 81 20
DIVISION 02
Division 02
02 26 10
02 41 00
DIVISION 03
Division 03
03 30 00
DIVISION 04
Division 04
04 10 00
04 20 00
04 40 00
DIVISION 05
Division 05
05 40 00
05 50 00
05 70 00
DIVISION 06
Division 06
06 10 00
06 20 00
DIVISION 07
Division 07
07 11 00
07 13 00
07 20 00
07 28 00
Title
Cover Sheet
Table of Contents
Issue
May 2011
May 2011
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
General Requirements
Closeout Procedures
Sustainable Design Requirements
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
EXISTING CONDITIONS
Existing Conditions
Quality Standards and Construction Procedures
Hazardous Material Assessment and Remediation
Demolition
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
CONCRETE
Concrete Quality Standards and Construction Procedures
Cast-in-Place Concrete
May 2011
May 2011
MASONRY
Masonry Quality Standards and Construction Procedures
Maintenance of Masonry
Unit Masonry Assemblies
Stone Assemblies
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
METALS
Metals Quality Standards and Construction Procedures
Cold-Formed Metal Framing
Metal Fabrications
Decorative Metal
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
Wood, Plastics, and Composites
Quality Standards and Construction Procedures
Rough Carpentry
Finish Carpentry
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Thermal and Moisture Protection
Quality Standards and Construction Procedures
Damproofing
Sheet Waterproofing
Thermal Insulation
Drainage Plane
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - 1
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
Section
07 31 13
07 46 00
07 51 00
07 52 00
07 62 00
07 72 00
07 92 00
07 96 00
07 97 00
DIVISION 08
Division 08
08 01 10
08 01 53
08 11 00
08 11 13
08 20 00
08 30 00
08 50 00
08 52 00
08 56 00
08 71 00
08 90 00
DIVISION 09
Division 09
09 23 00
09 24 00
09 29 00
09 30 00
09 50 00
09 64 00
09 68 00
09 90 00
DIVISION 10
Division 10
10 28 00
DIVISION 11
Division 11
11 31 00
DIVISION 12
Division 12
Title
Asphalt Shingles
Siding
Built-Up Bituminous Roofing
Modified Bituminous Roofing
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Roof Accessories
Sealants
Air Sealing
Blower Door Air Leakage Testing
Issue
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
OPENINGS
Openings Quality Standards and Construction Procedures
Operation and Maintenance of Doors and Frames
Wood Window Repair
Doors and Frames
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
Storm Doors and Windows
Specialty Doors and Frames
Windows
Wood Windows
Security Screens and Doors
Door Hardware
Louvers and Vents
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
FINISHES
Finishes Quality Standards and Construction Procedures
Gypsum Plaster
Portland Cement Plastering (Stucco)
Gypsum Board
Tiling
Resilient Flooring
Wood Flooring
Carpeting
Painting and Coating
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
SPECIALTIES
Specialties Quality Standards and Construction Procedures
Toilet and Bath Accessories
May 2011
May 2011
EQUIPMENT
Equipment Quality Standards and Construction Procedures
Residential Appliances
May 2011
May 2011
FURNISHINGS
Furnishings Quality Standards and Construction Procedures
May 2011
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - 2
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
Section
12 20 00
12 35 30
DIVISION 22
Division 22
22 00 00
22 36 00
22 40 00
DIVISION 23
Division 23
23 05 93
23 11 23
23 21 13
23 30 00
23 35 00
23 51 23
23 52 00
23 52 16
23 54 00
23 81 26
DIVISION 26
Division 26
26 00 00
DIVISION 31
Division 31
31 10 00
31 20 00
31 31 16
DIVISION 32
Division 32
32 00 00
32 13 13
32 31 13
32 31 23
32 31 29
Title
Window Treatments
Residential Casework
Issue
May 2011
May 2011
PLUMBING
Plumbing Quality Standards and Construction Procedures
Plumbing and Drainage
Domestic Water Heaters
Plumbing Fixtures
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
Quality Standards and Construction Procedures
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
Facility Natural-Gas Piping
Hydronic Piping
HVAC Air Distribution
Exhaust Systems
Gas Vents
Central Heating System Requirements
Heating Boilers
Furnaces
Split System Air Conditioners
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
ELECTRICAL
Electrical Quality Standards and Construction Procedures
Electrical
May 2011
May 2011
EARTHWORK
Earthwork Quality Standards and Construction Procedures
Site Clearing
Earth Moving
Termite Control
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Exterior Improvements
Quality Standards and Construction Procedures
Paving
Portland Cement Concrete Paving
Chain Link Fences and Gates
Plastic Fences and Gates
Wood Fences and Gates
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
May 2011
END OF SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00 01 10 - 3
DIVISION 01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
SECTION 01 10 00 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. PERMITS
1. The contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit. The contractor, and/or his
subcontractors, shall secure and pay for all other permits and governmental fees,
licenses, and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the work.
a. The developer may secure the necessary permits as directed by OHCD/PHDC/RDA.
B. CODES AND REGULATIONS
1. The contractor and his subcontractors to comply with all laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations, and orders of any public authority having jurisdiction on the performance of
the work.
2. The contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the work.
C. TAXES
1. The contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the work or portions
thereof provided by the contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or
negotiations concluded.
D. LABOR AND MATERIAL
1. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the contractor shall provide and
pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery,
water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper
execution and completion of the work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or
not incorporated or to be incorporated in the work.
2. The contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the contractor’s
employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The contractor shall not permit
employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them.
3. Substitutions: Product names, if and where noted, are given as a standard for type and
quality.
a. Contractor or developer may propose substitution for any named product by
submitting,sufficient information (catalog cuts, technical data, performance data,
samples, etc.) to prove that the proposed substitute is of equal or greater quality and
will perform as well as or better than the named product to OHCD/PHDC/RD.
Substitutes are not to be installed unless approved in writing by OHCD/PHDC/RDA
E. WARRANTY
1. The contractor warrants that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will
be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted, that the work will be
free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the work will
conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 10 00 - 1
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
a. The contractor’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse,
modifications not executed by the contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance,
improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage.
F. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES
1. The contractor shall perform no portion of the work requiring submittal and review of
Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective
submittal has been approved by the Inspector and/or Architect. Such work shall be in
accordance with approved submittals.
2. Shop Drawings showing all essential construction, finishes, materials, field dimensions,
views and other details shall be provided for approval as required by the Specifications
and/or drawings.
a. Contractor to submit four (4) copies of each material; one for OHCD/PHDC/RDA,
one for the Inspector, one for the Architect, and one to be returned to the contractor.
3. Samples and Product Data to establish standards of acceptable quality shall be
submitted to OHCD/PHDC/RDA.
a. Contractor to submit four (4) copies of each material; one for OHCD/PHDC/RDA,
one for the Inspector, one for the Architect, and one to be returned to the contractor.
G. REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS
1. The contractor to carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other
and with information furnished by OHCD/PHDC/RDA and shall report any errors,
inconsistencies, or omissions discovered to the Architect, developer, and
OHCD/PHDC/RDA.
2. The contractor to take field measurements and verify field conditions and to compare
such field measurements and information with the Contract Documents before
commencing activities. Immediately report any errors, inconsistencies, or omissions
discovered to the Architect, developer, and OHCD/PHDC/RDA.
H. USE OF SITE
1. The contractor to confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances,
permits, and the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not encumber the site with
materials or equipment.
I.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
1. The contractor is responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the work
or to make its parts fit together properly.
J. CLEANING UP
1. The contractor to keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of
waste materials or rubbish caused by construction operations.
a. The contractor to provide daily clean up of the site.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 10 00 - 2
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
2. At completion of the work the contractor to remove from and about the Project waste
materials, rubbish, the contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery, and
surplus materials.
K. INDEMNIFICATION
1. Upon completion of the Project, and prior to final payment, the contractor to provide a
complete waiver of liens, including a waiver of liens from each subcontractor and
material supplier, stating that each has received payment for all labor and materials
relating to the Project and disclaiming any right to file a lien against the property.
L. INSURANCE
1. Certificates of Insurance, on a form acceptable to OHCD/PHDC/RDA shall be submitted,
prior to the start of the work, to OHCD/PHDC/RDA.
a. Submit one copy to the Architect and developer.
M. EXECUTION OF THE WORK
1. The contractor to install and maintain dust barriers, temporary covers and temporary
doors as required to maintain security, safety, weather tightness, and cleanliness.
2. The contractor to provide secure temporary supports as required and maintain same
until permanent supports are fully in place.
3. At Project completion, the contractor to provide a “Clean” building and site, vacuum
carpet and mop hard surface floors, wipe down walls, ceilings, and fixtures. Remove all
stains and paints from glass, flooring, plastic laminate, metal, and similar finishes. The
interior of the building is to be dust free, ready for the Lead Risk Assessors to perform
their final assessment.
END OF SECTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 10 00 - 3
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. SUMMARY
1. Section includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Inspection procedures.
b. Warranties.
c. Final cleaning.
B. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
1. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. Certificate of Substantial Completion will not be issued until all of these items are complete:
a. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items
on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
b. Advise OHCD/PHDC/RDA of pending insurance changeover requirements.
c. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements,
final certifications, and similar documents.
d. Obtain and submit releases permitting OHCD/PHDC/RDA unrestricted use of the
Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
e. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys,
property surveys, and similar final record information.
f. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
OHDC/PHDC/RDA. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
g. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to ODDC/PHDC/RDA.
Advise OHDC/PHDC/RDA personnel of changeover in security provisions.
1) Remove all temporary locks installed by Contractor, sub-contractors, or other
contractor related personnel.
h. Complete startup testing of systems.
i. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
j. Required submittals to regulatory agencies.
k. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, excess materials, construction tools, and similar elements.
l. Advise OHDC/PHDC/RDA of changeover in heat and other utilities.
m. Submit changeover information related to occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
n. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
o. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 00 - 1
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
2. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect or developer and Inspector will either proceed with inspection
or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. OHDC/PHDC/RDA will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either
on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect or developer, that must be
completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
a. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections
as incomplete is completed or corrected.
1) The Architect or developer will perform one re-inspection when requested and
only when assured that the Work has been substantially completed.
b. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
C. FINAL COMPLETION
1. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
a. Submit a final Application for Payment according to provisions in the Contract.
b. Submit certified copy of Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect or developer. The
certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise
resolved for acceptance.
c. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
d. Submit Hazardous Material final inspection report.
e. Instruct OHDC/PHDC/RDA personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of
products, equipment, and systems.
2. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect or developer and Inspector will either proceed with inspection or notify
Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. OHCD/PHDC/RDA will prepare a final Certificate
for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
a. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections
as incomplete is completed or corrected.
1) The Architect or his consultants will perform one re-inspection when requested
and only when assured that the remaining corrective Work has been completed.
D. LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
1. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space
and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing
correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
a. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 00 - 2
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
b. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for
ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
c. Include the following information at the top of each page:
1) Project name.
2) Date.
3) Name of Architect or developer.
4) Name of Contractor.
5) Page number.
E. WARRANTIES
1. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect or developer for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.
2. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents
of the Project Manual.
a. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11inch paper.
b. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty.
Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the
product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and
telephone number of Installer.
c. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
3. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance
manuals.
F. MATERIALS
1. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
G. FINAL CLEANING
1. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to
comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
2. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean
each surface or unit to condition acceptable for testing by hazardous material risk assessor. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
a. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 00 - 3
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
1) Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter,
and other foreign substances.
2) Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
3) Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
4) Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
5) Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
6) Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt/dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
7) Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar
spaces.
8) Sweep and mop concrete floors in unoccupied spaces.
9) Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
10) Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
11) Remove labels that are not permanent.
12) Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical
nameplates.
13) Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.
14) Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
15) Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.
16) Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
17) Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction.
18) Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 00 - 4
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
19) Leave Project clean and ready for risk assessment and occupancy.
3. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection
and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
4. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and
dispose of lawfully.
END OF SECTION
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 77 00 - 5
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
SECTION 01 81 20 - SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. SUMMARY
1. The OHCD/PHDC/RDA has determined that all projects will follow a best practices
approach of environmentally responsible design and construction. This Section outlines
this approach. Attention will be given to: materials and products, energy and resource
efficiency, durability, and indoor environmental quality both during construction and for
future homeowners. These requirements are in addition to minimum efficiencies,
methods, and other aspects specified in other divisions of this specification manual.
a. ENERGY STAR Certification: If the project will meet ENERGY STAR for New Homes
certification, also refer to Part G of this Section.
b. LEED Certification: If the project is pursuing LEED for Homes Certification, also refer
to Part H of this Section.
2. Section Includes:
a. General requirements and procedures for the following:
1) Indoor Water Use.
2) Heating and Cooling Distribution System.
3) Space Heating and Cooling Equipment.
4) Water Heating.
5) Lighting.
6) Appliances.
7) Residential Refrigerant Management.
8) Environmentally Preferable Products.
9) Waste Management.
10) Indoor Air Quality During Construction.
B. DEFINITIONS
1. Absorptive Materials: Materials which can absorb moisture and air-borne particulates
leading to mold growth or other damage. Materials include but are not limited to: carpet,
gypsum wallboard, and wood flooring, trim, and doors.
2. Environmentally Preferable Products: Products which contain no formaldehydes, contain
no added urea-formaldehyde, and meet VOC content levels listed in other parts of this
Section.
3. Green Guard: The Green Guard Environmental Institute certifies products and materials
for low chemical emissions.
4. IAQ: Indoor Air Quality.
5. Urea-formaldehyde: Thermosetting resin or plastic made from urea and formaldehyde,
heated in the presence of a mild base such as ammonia. Urea-formaldehyde may have
short- or long-term health effects.
6. VOC: Volatile Organic Compound. Gases which are emitted from certain solids or liquids
which may contain VOC’s and may have short- or long-term health effects.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
01 81 20 - 1
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
C. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
1. Respond to questions and requests from the OHCD/PHDC/RDA.
2. Track the total amount of waste generated on the project and amount diverted from
landfill. Report monthly waste totals and amount diverted totals to OHCD/PHDC/RDA
with each Application for Payment. Separate diverted totals into categories listed in other
parts of this Section.
3. Maintain minimum IAQ standards during construction as required by other Articles of this
Section.
4. Provide Manual J calculations in accordance with most current version of the ACCA
Manual J Residential Load Calculation Manual prior to purchase and/or installation of
new heating or cooling equipment, unless written authorization is received from
OHCD/PHDC/RDA to exclude the calculations.
D. SYSTEMS AND PRODUCTS
1. Systems and Products, General: Provide systems, materials and products meeting the
following requirements.
2. Indoor Water Use: Comply with Division 224000 Plumbing Fixtures.
3. Heating and Cooling Distribution System: Comply with 230000 HVAC Air Distribution.
4. Space Heating and Cooling Equipment: Comply with Division 23 Sections specific to
system or systems being installed.
5. Water Heating. Comply with Section 223600 Domestic Water Heaters.
6. Lighting. Comply with Section 260000 Electrical.
7. Appliances. Comply with Section 113100 Residential Appliances.
8. Residential Refrigerant Management. Comply with Section 238126 Split System Air
Conditioners.
9. Environmentally Preferable Materials:
a. Formaldehyde Free: Select insulation products which contain no formaldehyde or are
Green Guard certified.
b. No Added Urea-Formaldehyde: To the fullest extent possible, select engineered
wood products which contain no added urea-formaldehydes in resins.
1) If products containing urea-formaldehyde resins need to be used either due to
inability to obtain product or cost issues, obtain written permission from
OHCD/PHDC/RDA prior to purchase and installation. Clearly explain why
material containing added urea-formaldehyde resin must be used in request to
OHCD/PHDC/RDA. If permission is granted, follow requirements for handling
and installing outlined in other Sections of the OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building
Specifications.
c. Flooring: Select flooring products with the following attributes:
1) Carpet and carpet pad complying with the Carpet & Rug Institute Green Label
and Green Label Plus program unless approved in writing by OHCD/PHDC/RDA
to install non-complying carpet and carpet pad.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
01 81 20 - 2
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
d. Interior Paints & Finishes: Paints and coatings with low to no VOC’s, complying with
the following VOC content limits:
a) Architectural paints and coatings applied to interior walls and ceilings must
not exceed the VOC content limits established in Green Seal Standard GS11, Paints, the most current addition, available at this link: http:
//www.greenseal.org/Portals/0/Documents/Standards/GS11%20Stn%20Dev/paints_GS_11.pdf.
b) Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates
must not exceed the VOC content limit of 250 g/L.
c) Clear wood finishes, floor coatings, stains, primers, sealers, and shellacs
applied to interior elements must not exceed the current VOC content limits
established in South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule
#1113, Architectural Coatings, available at the following link: http:
//www.aqmd.gov/rules/reg/reg11/r1113.pdf.
e. Adhesives and Sealants: Adhesives and sealants with low to no VOC’s, complying
with current VOC content limits as outlined in the South Coast Air Quality
Management District (SCAQMD) Rule #1168 available at the following link: http:
//www.aqmd.gov/rules/reg/reg11/r1168.pdf.
E. WASTE MANAGEMENT
1. Performance Requirements: The OHCD/PHDC/RDA has determined that projects shall
divert as muchnon-hazardous construction and demolition waste as possible from
landfills. Amount will be measured as a percentage of the total and percent totals will be
measured by weight in tons.
2. Waste Management Plan: The Contractor will develop a waste management plan. This
plan will be submitted to OHCD/PHDC/RDA for review prior to starting construction. The
plan will identify anticipated types of waste and a plan for diverting waste from landfills,
including names of organizations and facilities which will accept the diverted waste. The
following waste to be diverted will be indentified at minimum, (as applicable to each
project):
a. Recycling Waste: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
1) Packaging:
a) Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and
store in a dry location.
b) Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
c) Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove
pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets
into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling
wood.
d) Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with
requirements for recycling wood.
2) Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees off site.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
01 81 20 - 3
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
3) Concrete and Masonry: Place unusable excess/waste in designated
area/container. Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort
with other metals.
4) Wood Materials: Place unusable excess/waste in designated area/container.
5) Metals: Place unusable excess/waste in designated area/container.
6) Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and
store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals.
7) Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other
metals from acoustical panels and tile and place with other metals.
F. INDOOR AIR QUALITY DURING CONSTRUCTION
1. General: The OHCD/PHDC/RDA has determined that all projects will institute minimum
IAQ standards during construction. Standards are as follows:
a. Smoking is prohibited inside buildings during construction and within 10 feet of any
window and door openings.
b. Storage Area: The Contractor must designate a secure and clean area to store all
absorptive materials and products.
1) Designate and review this area with OHCD/PHDC/RDA prior to taking delivery of
and starting to store absorptive materials.
2) Keep the designated area dry, clean, and orderly; prevent contamination of
products from moisture and construction debris/dirt. Cover products with tarps
that are weighted down.
3) Monitor the storage areas for contamination; correct problems and implement
preventative measures.
c. Protection:
1) Do not install dry materials until wet materials have been installed and allowed to
dry to greatest extent practical.
2) Immediately remove products exhibiting stains, mold, mildew, or other evidence
of water or moisture damage from site.
3) Protect fabricated ductwork stored on site, wrapped and protected from dust and
debris. Elevate ductwork off of floor level.
4) Completely seal exposed duct ends and exposed return air and supply air grilles
with plastic film and tape, or other suitable material, until after final cleaning of
unit.
G. ENERGY STAR FOR NEW HOMES CERTIFICATION
1. General: This part of the Section applies only to projects pursuing ENERGY STAR for
New Homes Certification, as directed by the OHCD/PHDC/RDA. This Part is in addition
to all requirements in preceding parts of this Section.
2. References
a. ENERGY STAR National Program Requirements:
1) Information on current program requirements is available here: http:
//www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=bldrs_lenders_raters.homes_guidelns.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
01 81 20 - 4
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
3. Administrative Requirements
a. HERS Rater will inform the designers of ENERGY STAR requirements.
b. HERS Rater will provide energy modeling of proposed construction to demonstrate
that construction meets or exceeds ENERGY STAR for New Homes standards
c. HERS Rater will perform inspections and tests to confirm performance in accordance
with ENERGY STAR National Program Requirements.
d. Contractor will respond to questions and requests from the OHCD/PHDC/RDA, and
HERS Rater.
H. LEED FOR HOMES CERTIFICATION
1. General: This part of the Section applies only to projects pursuing LEED for Homes
Certification, as directed or approved by the PHCD/OHDC/RDA. This Part is in addition
to all requirements in preceding parts of this Section References
a. LEED for Homes Reference Guide, current edition per USGBC and GBCI.
b. LEED for Homes Providers: Providers do not need to be in the state where the
project is located. Refer to the USGBC website for a full listing of LEED for Homes
Providers: http: //www.usgbc.org/DisplayPage.aspx?CMSPageID=1554
2. Definitions
a. In supplement and/or addition to definitions listed in Part B of this Section, the
following:
1) Environmentally Preferable Products: Products which contain recycled content,
and are extracted, processed and manufactured locally, i.e.: within 500 miles of
the home and that generally have a lesser or reduced effect on human health
and the environment when compared with competing products or services that
serve the same purpose. This comparison may consider raw materials
acquisition, product, manufacturing, packaging, distribution, reuse, operation,
maintenance, or disposal of the product or service.
2) Green Rater: Individuals who work with the LEED for Homes Provider overseeing
all verification services on a project.
3) LEED for Homes Provider: Providers are responsible for working with eligible
LEED for Homes projects, Green Raters, and verifying that homes are built to
meet the requirements of the LEED for Homes Rating System.
4) MERV: Minimum efficiency reporting value, a standard for mechanical air filters.
5) USGBC: Unites States Green Building Council, a non-profit organization
dedicated to promoting sustainable design and developers of the LEED for
Homes Rating System.
3. Administrative Requirements
a. In supplement and/or addition to requirements outlined in Part C of this Section:
1) With approval to proceed with LEED certification by OHCD/PHDS/RDA, a
qualified architect with LEED Accreditation shall be engaged.
2) The developer and architect shall select a LEED for Homes Provider to monitor
the project and perform inspections as required under LEED practices. A LEED
for Homes Provider is required on LEED for Homes projects.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
01 81 20 - 5
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
3) Respond to questions and requests from the OHCD/PHDC/RDA, Architect,
LEED for Homes Provider and Green Rater.
4) Submit information to document compliance with LEED as directed by the
Architect, LEED for Homes Provider and Green Rater.
4. Environmentally Preferable Materials
a. Recycled Content: To the fullest extent possible, select products and materials which
contain recycled content as defined in Part C of this Section. Materials containing
recycled content include but are not limited to the following:
1) Concrete
2) Flooring products (carpet, vinyl, linoleum)
3) Doors
4) Roofing
5) Drywall
b. Extracted, Processed and Manufactured Locally: To the fullest extent possible, select
products and materials which have raw materials which were extracted and
processed within 500 miles of project site and which were manufactured within 500
miles of project site. Local materials are generally -but not limited to, the following:
1) Concrete
2) Flooring products (carpet, vinyl, linoleum)
3) Doors
4) Roofing
5) Drywall
5. Waste Management
a. In supplement to Part E of this Section, the following
1) Performance Requirements: Divert as much non-hazardous construction and
demolition waste at minimum from landfills. Amount will be measured by weight
in tons.
END OF SECTION
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
01 81 20 - 6
DIVISION 02
EXISTING CONDITIONS
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS
QUALITY STANDARDS AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
A. Quality Standards: Conform to the following standard material/product attributes and
installation and workmanship requirements for all Sections within this Division.
1. Ensure that safety measures in accordance with local building code and as described in
other Sections of this Division are in place implemented during all demolition activities.
Protect adjacent properties from damage.
1. Conduct a pre-demolition conference at the site with the OHCD/PHCD/RDA prior to
commencing demolition activities unless directed by OHCD/PHDC/RDA to do otherwise.
2. If hazardous materials are encountered, notify the OHCD/PHDC/RDA immediately.
3. OHCD/PHDC/RDA encourages either on-site or off-site sorting and recycling of
demolition debris and material or, engaging an architectural salvage company to reduce
labor, waste and overall demolition cost. Any monetary gain for such actions is the
property of the Contractor. Legally remove and dispose of non-recyclable waste to an
EPA approved landfill.
a. In cases where Contractor does not hire a waste removal service, submit landfill
tickets and certifications to OHCD/PHDC/RDA.
B. Construction Procedures: Conform to the following standard construction procedures.
Procedures apply to all Sections within this Division.
1. Ensure that all utilities are shut off and capped before commencing any demolition
activities.
2. Do not close or obstruct streets, sidewalks or other occupied or used facilities without
obtaining permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Where directed by the OHCD/PHDC/RDA or the Philadelphia Historic Commission,
carefully remove and salvage items for reuse and reinstallation or for delivery to the
OHCD/PHDC/RDA prior to commencing demolition activities. Protect and store items
designated for reuse and reinstallation in a secure location as directed by the
OHCD/PHDC/RDA until time of reinstallation.
4. Protect adjacent properties, structures, landscaping, and vehicles as necessary to
prevent damage, dust, and contamination. Provide pollution control measures specified
in other Sections of this Division.
5. Where demolition activities expose any portion of an adjacent building or buildings,
protect the building(s) from weather and water infiltration.
END OF DOCUMENT
QUALITY STANDARDS AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS - 1
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
SECTION 02 26 10 - HAZARDOUS MATERIAL ASSESSMENT AND REMEDIATION
A. SUMMARY
1. Section Includes:
a. Identification and Removal of the following:
1) Asbestos containing materials.
2) Lead based Paint.
3) Mold.
2. Field Conditions:
a. It is anticipated that the following hazardous materials may be present in the existing
facility:
1) Asbestos containing materials.
2) Lead based paint products.
3) Mold.
4) No report of the presence of Asbestos containing materials, lead based paint, or
mold exists.
a) Contractor is responsible for identifying asbestos and/or asbestos containing
materials. Contractor to prepare report of asbestos and/or asbestos
containing materials and submit report to OHCD/PHDC/RDA.
(1) Insulation, including pipe wrap and duct, not easily identifiable as
fiberglass, and the observation of 9 inch square floor tile, will require
assessment for asbestos.
b) Prior to the start of Work, have an independent laboratory perform, a Risk
Assessment to determine the presence of lead based paint. Risk Assessment
report to be submitted to the RDA.
(1) Risk Assessment must be performed by a Risk Assessor certified by the
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania. Include a copy of the certification with
the Risk Assessment report.
c) In lieu of preparing a risk assessment, Contractor may proceed with Work as
if all paint is lead based.
(1) Contractor to retain the services of an abatement contractor who is
certified by the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania to perform lead
abatement and operate as if all surfaces are painted with lead based
paint. All applicable lead-safe procedures to be followed after abatement
work is complete. Copies of all licenses and/or certificates shall be
submitted to OHCD/PHDC/RDA prior to the start of remediation work.
d) Lead paint abatement must be performed prior to beginning any other work
within the structure.
5) If materials suspected of containing asbestos are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify developer and OHCD/PHDC/RDA.
a) Once the presence of asbestos containing material is confirmed, the
developer will make the necessary arrangements for its removal, or direct the
Contractor how to proceed.
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL ASSESSMENT AND REMEDIATION
02 26 10 - 1
OHCD/PHDC/RDA Small Building Specifications
May 2011
(1) Only licensed and/or certified firms and/or individuals are permitted to
remove asbestos containing materials. Prior to the start of remediation
work copies of all licenses and/or certificates shall be submitted to
OHCD/PHDC/RDA.
(2) Once removal of asbestos containing materials commences, all work is to
be in strict compliance with all regulations and requirements of the
authorities having jurisdiction, including requirements for disposal.
(a) Asbestos remediation firm to submit verification that disposal has
been made in an approved asbestos disposal site.
(3) Once remediation work is started no person is permitted in the space
without proper attire and must be de-contaminated in accordance with
regulations upon leaving the area containing asbestos.
6) If materials suspected of containing mold are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify developer and OHCD/PHDC/RDA.
a) Contractor to take all recommended and necessary precautions issued by
authorities having jurisdiction, and remove the mold-containing, and any
adjacent wet, material completely, in accordance with the recommendations
of the US EPA and all other authorities having jurisdiction.
(1) Contractor may retain a mold remediation specialist to perform
investigation and remediation work as approved OHCD/PHDC/RDA.
b) Prior to commencing with new work, the source of the water or moisture
infiltration is to be corrected.
B. SUBMITTALS
1. One copy of all licenses and certificates of certification attesting to licensing or
certification by the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, and other Authorities Having
Jurisdiction requiring licensing or certification, of firms and individuals performing work
for the following:
a. Asbestos assessment and remediation.
b. Lead Based Paint assessment and reme